SP 52-101-2003, Reference Materials ENG

REFERENCE MANUAL for CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE structures without
reinforcement pretensioning based on sp 52-101-2003

Association Zhelezobeton
Central Scientific-Research and
Design-Experimental Institute of
Industrial Buildings and Structures
(CNIIPromzdanii)
Scientific-Research Drawing and
Design Institute of Concrete and
Reinforced Concrete
(NIIZhB)

REFERENCE MANUAL
FOR DESIGNING OF CONCRETE AND
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES MADE
OF HEAVY CONCRETE WITHOUT
REINFORCEMENT PRETENSIONING

(BASED ON SP 52-101-2003)

MOSCOW 2005
REINFORCEMENT PRETENSIONING based on sp 52-101-2003

UDC 624.012.4.04

Manual for concrete and reinforced concrete structures without
reinforcement pretensioning (to SP 52-101-2003). CNIIPromzdanii, NIIZhB.-
M.: OJSC CNIIPromzdanii, 2005. p. 214.
It contains instructions of SP 52 -101-2003 for designing of concrete
and reinforced concrete structures made of heavy concrete without
reinforcement pretensioning as well as recommendations necessary for
designing. The reference manual is meant for design engineers as well as for
construction institutes.

Table 26 , Figure 74.

OJSC CNIIPromzdanii, 2005


PREFACE

The present reference manual has been developed on the basis and in
elaboration of the set of rules SP 52-101-2003 Concrete and reinforced
concrete structures made without reinforcement pretensioning
ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR DESIGNING, PROVISIONS,
SPECIFICATIONS, INSTRUCTIONS, CALCULATION EXAMPLES
FOR ELEMENTS AS WELL AS RECOMMENDATIONS FOR
DESIGNING WHICH ARE A PART OF SP 52-101-2003 ARE GIVEN IN
THE PRESENT REFERENCE MANUAL.
DATA ON DESIGNING UNUSUAL NON-TYPICAL
STRUCTURES WITH UNTENSIONED HIGH-STRENGTH
REINFORCEMENT (600 CLASS AND HIGHER) ARE NOT
COVERED BY THE PRESENT REFERENCE MANUAL, HOWEVER
THEY ARE PRESENTED IN THE REFERENCE MANUAL FOR
DESIGNING OF PRETENSIONED REINFORCED CONCRETE
STRUCTURES MADE OF HEAVY CONCRETE.
SPECIAL DESIGN FEATURES FOR TYPES OF BUILDINGS
AND STRUCTURES FOR WHICH INTERNAL FORCES ARE
ACCOUNTED FOR ARE NOT GIVEN IN THIS REFERENCE
MANUAL. THESE ISSUES ARE COVERED BY THE
CORRESPONDING SETS OF RULES AND REFERENCE MANUALS.
THE FOLLOWING MEASUREMENT UNITS ARE USED IN THE
REFERENCE MANUAL: FORCES ARE EXPRESSED IN NEWTONS
(N) OR KILONEWTONS (KN); LINEAR DIMENSIONS ARE
EXPRESSED IN MM (FOR CROSS-SECTIONS) AND IN M (FOR
ELEMENTS AND THEIR PARTS); STRESS, STRENGTH, MODULUS
OF ELASTICITY ARE GIVEN IN MEGAPASCALS (MPA);
DISTRIBUTED LOADS AND FORCES ARE EXPRESSED IN KN/M
AND N/MM. SINCE 1 MPA = 1 N/MM
2
, WHEN VALUES IN MPA
(STRESS, STRENGTH, ETC.) ARE USED IN EXAMPLES OF
FORMULA CALCULATION, THE REST OF THE VALUES ARE
GIVEN ONLY IN N AND MM (MM
2
).
VALUES OF CHARACTERISTIC AND DESIGN STRENGTH
AND MODULUS OF ELASTICITY ARE PRESENTED IN THE
TABLES IN MPA AND KGF /CM
2
.

THE REFERENCE MANUAL HAS BEEN DEVELOPED BY
CNIIPROMZDANII (ENGINEER I.. NIKITIN, DOCTORS OF
ENGINEERING E.N. KODISH AND N.N. TRIOKIN) WITH THE
PARTICIPATION OF NIIZHB (DOCTORS OF ENGINEERING .S.
ZALESOV, .. CHISTIAKOV, A.I. ZVEZDOV, T.A.MUHAMEDIEV).
PLEASE FORWARD YOUR COMMENTS AND
OBSERVATIONS TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESSES:
127238, MOSCOW, DMITROVSKOE SHOSSE, 46/2, OJSC
CNIIPROMZDANII;
109384, MOSCOW, 2-YA INSTITUTSKAYA STREET, 6, SUE
NIIZHB.


1. GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS

BASIC PROVISIONS

1.1. Recommendations of the reference manual cover designing of
concrete and reinforced concrete buildings and structures made of heavy
concrete which belongs to compression strength class from B10 to B60
without reinforcement pretensioning and are operated under conditions of
systematic thermal exposure in the range not higher than + 50
and no
lower than - 40
in non-corrosive environment with static load impact.

Recommendations of the reference manual do not cover designing of
concrete and reinforced concrete hydraulic structures, bridges, tunnels,
pipes under embankments, highway and aerodrome surface and some other
special structures.
Note. The term heavy concrete is used in accordance with GOST 25192.
1.2. When concrete and reinforced concrete structures are designed
not only design and construction requirements of the present aid shall be
made, but also process requirements to manufacture and erection of a
structure. Conditions of proper service and maintaining of structures shall
be taking into consideration environmental requirements in accordance with
the corresponding regulatory documents.
1.3. For assemblies it is necessary to pay specific attention to
strength and long service life of connections.
1.4. Concrete elements are used:
) mainly for structures which are in compression with normal force
within the limits of the element cross section with normal force along the
element cross-section;
) in specific cases for structures which are in compression with
normal force beyond the limits of the element cross section as well as in
bending structures when their failure does not directly endanger peoples
life and equipment safety (for example, elements located on solid base).
Structures are considered as concrete in case their strength is
provided for by concrete only.
1.5. Design winter temperature of outdoor air is taken as average
temperature of the coldest five-day period depending on construction zone
in accordance with SNIP 23-01-99. Design process temperatures are
specified in the design task.


BASIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.6. Calculation of concrete and reinforced concrete structures
shall be performed for limit states including:
- limit states of the first group (total unserviceability due to
loss of sustaining capacity);
- limit states of the second group (unsuitability to normal service due to
cracks formation or excessive crack opening, occurrence of unallowable
deformations, etc.).
Calculation of limit states of the first group containing in this
reference manual include strength calculation with taking into consideration
structure deformation state failure.
Calculation of limit states of the second group containing in this
reference manual include evaluation of crack opening and deformation.
Calculation of limit states of the second group for concrete
structures containing in this reference manual is not performed.
Limit state calculation for a structure in general as well as its separate
elements shall be performed for all stages: manufacturing, transportation,
erection and service, herewith calculation models shall be in agreement
with taken structural Schematics.
1.7 Calculation of forces and deformation due to different impact on
structures and systems of buildings shall be carried out taking into
consideration potential cracks formation and non-elastic deformation in
concrete and reinforcement (material nonlinearity) as well as structure
deformation state before its failure (geometric nonlinearity).
Calculation method has not been developed for statically
indeterminate structures taking into consideration material non linearity and
it is permissible to determine forces on the assumption of material linear
elasticity.
1.8 Standard values of loads and impacts, combination coefficient,
partial safety factor for loads, intended use reliability factor as well as
classification of loads for constant and temporary (long-term and short-term
ones) are set in accordance with SNIP 2.01.07-85*.
When force effects brought about by lifting, transportation and
mounting are calculated, load of element weight shall be taken with service
factor equal to: 1.60 for transportation, 1.40 for lifting and mounting. In this
case partial safety factors of loads shall be taken into account as well.

It is permissible to assume lower values of service factor justified in
the established procedure but no lower than 1.25

2. MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE AND
REIFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

CONCRETE

CONCRETE QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS AND THEIR DESIGN
APPLICATION

2.1. For concrete and reinforced concrete structures it is necessary to
provide the following concrete classes and grades:
a) Class of compression strength:
10; 15; 20; 25; 30; 35; 40; 45; 50; 55; 60;
b) Class of axial tensile strength:
B
t
0,8; B
t
1,2;
t
1,6; B
t
2,0;
t
2,4; B
t
2,8; B
t
3,2;
c) Frost resistance grade:
F50; F75; F100; F150; F200; F300; F400; F500;
) Watertightness grade:
W2; W4; W6; W8; W10; W12.
2.2. Age of concrete which corresponds to its class of compression
strength and axial tensile strength (design age) is assigned in the design
relying on potential actual terms of loading the structure with design loads.
In the absence of these data, the concrete class is assigned at 28 days.
Value of concrete handling strength for assembly elements is assigned
in accordance with GOST 13015.0 and the corresponding standards for
structures of certain types.
2.3 Class of concrete compression strength is assigned in all cases.
Class of concrete axial tensile strength is assigned in case if this
characteristic is dominating and it is monitored during manufacture (for
example for concrete flexural elements).
Frost resistance grade is assigned for structures which during their
service life are alternately subject to freezing and thaw (aboveground
structures, subject to weather impact, located in one cant ground, under
water, etc.).

Water tightness grade is assigned for structures which have
waterproof restrictions (water houses, supporting walls, etc.).
2.4. For reinforced structures it is recommended to assign class of
concrete compression strength which is no lower than 15; herewith for
heavy-loaded compressed axial elements it is recommended to assign
concrete class no lower than 25.
For concrete compressed elements it is not recommended to assign
concrete class higher than 30.
2.5. For aboveground structures which are subject to weather impact
at design winter temperature from - 5
to - 40
, frost resistance concrete

grade shall be no lower than F75; herewith, in case if these structures are
protected against atmospheric fallout, frost resistance grade might be
applied no lower then F50.
Concrete frost resistance grade is not specified for above described
structures in case if design winter temperature is above - 5
.
Note. Design winter temperature of outdoor air is assigned in accordance with
paragraph 1.5.


SPECIFIED AND DESIGN CONCRETE CHARACTERISTICS

2.6. Specified characteristic of concrete axial compression strength
(prism strength) R
b,n
and axial tension strength (when compression strength
class is assigned) R
bt,n
is taken depending on concrete of class in
accordance with Table 2.1.
Table 2.1.
Strength
type
Specified and design values of concrete strength R
b,
and R
bt,n
for limit
states of the second group R
b,ser
and R
bt
,
ser,
, MPa (kgf/cm
2
) with quality
class of concrete compression strength
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Axial
compression
R
b,
,R
b,ser

7,5
(76,5)
11,0
(112)
15,0
(153)
18,5
(188)
22,0
(224)
25,5
(260)
29,0
(296)
32,0
(326)
36,0
(367)
39,5
(403)
43,0
(438)
Tension
R
bt,
,R
bt,ser
0,85
(8,7)
1,10
(11,2)
1,35
(13,8)
1,55
(15,8)
1,75
(17,8)
1,95
(19,9)
2,10
(21,4)
2,25
(22,9)
2,45
(25,0)
2,60
(26,5)
2,75
(28,0)

When concrete class is assigned in accordance with axial tensile
strength B
t
, specified concrete resistance to axial tension R
bt,n
in MPa is
taken to be equal to numerical characteristics.
2.7. Specified concrete resistance to axial compression R
b
and axial
tension R
bt
for limit states of the first group is calculated using formula:

, ;
, ,
bt
n bt
bt
b
b
b
R
R
R
R

= = (2.1)
where
b
is a safety factor for concrete compression strength which is taken
equal to 1.3;
bt
- safety factor for concrete compression strength which is taken equal
to:
1.5 when concrete class is assigned regarding compression strength;
1.3 when concrete class is assigned regarding tensile strength.
Concrete design strength R
b
and R
bt
(with approximation) depending
on concrete quality class with respect to compression strength and axial
tensile are presented respectively in Tables 2.2 and 2.3
Design values of concrete axial tensile strength R
b,ser
and axial tensile
R
bt,ser
for limit states of the second group

Table 2.2
Strength
type
Concrete design strength for limit states of the first group R
b
and R
bt
, MPa
(kgf/cm
2
) with concrete quality class regarding compression strength
10 15
2
0
25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Axial
compression,
R
b
6.0
(61.2)
8.5
(86.6
)
11.
5
(117
)
14.5
(148)
17.0
(173)
19.5
(199)
22.0
(224)
25.0
(255)
27.5
(280)
30.0
(306)
33.0
(336)
Axial tension,
R
bt
0.56
(5.7
)
0.75
(7.6
)
0.9
0
(9.
2)
1.05
(10.7)
1.15
(11.7)
1.30
(13.3)
1.40
14.3)
1.50
(15.3)
1.60
(16.3)
1.70
(17.3)
1.80
(18.3)

ble 2.3
Concrete design strength with respect to axial tensile for limit states of the first group
R
bt,
MPa (kgf/cm
2
) with concrete quality class regarding axial tensile strength
t
0.8
t
1.2
t
1.6
t
2.0
t
2.4
t
2.8
t
3.2
0.62 0.93 1.25 1.55 1.85 2.15 2.45
(6.3) (9.5) (12.7) (15.8) (18.9) (21.9) (25.0)

are taken equal to the corresponding specified strength, i.e. they are
introduced into calculation along with partial safety factor for concrete
strength
b
=
bt
= 1.0. Values R
b,ser
and R
bt,ser
are given in Table 2.1.
2.8. Concrete design strength might be multiplied by the following
service factors
bi
if required:
)
b1
= 0.9 used for concrete and reinforced concrete structures with
impact of only constant and long-term loads introduced to design values of
R
b
and R
bt;
)
b2
= 0.9 used for concrete structures introduced to design value
R
b
;
)
b3
= 0.9 used for concrete and reinforced concrete structures
encased in concrete vertically is introduced to design value R
b
.
2.9. Value of initial elasticity modulus with compression and tension
b
is taken depending on concrete quality class regarding compression
strength in accordance with Table 2.4
2.10. It is permissible to assume value of Poissons ratio as
b,P
= 0.2.
Shearing modulus of elasticity G is taken equal to 0.4 of the
corresponding value
b
, specified in Table 2.4.

2.11. Values of linear thermal deformation coefficient for concrete
with temperature gradient in the range from -40 up to +50
are taken as
bt
=1
.
10
-5
C
-1
.

Table 2.4
Values of initial tangent modulus of concrete elasticity with compression and tension
b
.
10
-3
, MPa (kgf/cm
2
), with concrete compression strength class
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
19,0
(194)
24,0
(245)
27,5
(280)
30,0
(306)
32,5
(331)
34,5
(352)
36,0
(367)
37,0
(377)
38,0
(387)
39,0
(398)
39,5
(403)

2.12. In order to calculate mass of reinforced concrete or concrete
structure concrete density is taken to be equal to 2400 kg/m
3
.
Reinforced concrete density with percentage of reinforcement 3%
and less is taken to be equal to 2500 kg/m
3
; with percentage of
reinforcement more than 3% density is calculated as sum of concrete and
reinforcement mass per volume unit of a reinforced concrete structure.
Herewith mass of 1 m of reinforcement steel is taken in accordance with
Appendix 1 and mass of sheet steel and shaped bars are set in accordance
with state standards.
When gravity weight of a structure is calculated it is permissible to
assume specific gravity to be equal to 0.01 of density in kg/m
3
.
2.13. Values of concrete relative deformations which characterize
state diagram of compressed concrete (
b0
,
b1,red
,
b2
) and tensile concrete
(
bt0
,
bt1red
and
bt2
) as well as coefficient of concrete creep
b,cr
are given in
paragraphs 4.27 4.23.

REINFORCEMENT

REINFORCEMENT QUALITY CHARACTERISTICS

2.14. For reinforced concrete structures designed in accordance with
requirements of the present aid it is necessary to provide the following
reinforcement types:
- hot-rolled plain rods of reinforcement of class 240 (-I);
- hot-rolled and thermo-mechanical hardened Isteg reinforcement
300 (-II), 400 (-III, A400), A500 (A500);
- cold-deformed Isteg reinforcement of class 500 (-I, 500).

As reinforcement used in structures in accordance with calculation it
is recommended to apply mainly:
Isteg reinforcement of classes 500 and 400 ;
Isteg reinforcement of class 500 in fabricated frames and nets.
Reinforcement gauge is given in Appendix 1.
2.15. For structures which are in outdoor service or in unheated
buildings in zones with design winter temperature lower than - 30
it is
permissible to apply reinforcement class 300 of steel grade St5ps 18 - 40
mm in diameter as well as class 240 of steel grade St3kp.
These types of reinforcement might be applied in structures of heated
buildings located in the specified zones if in construction phase load
carrying capacity of a structure is provided relying on design reinforcement
strength with reduction factor 0.7 and design load with load safety factor
f

= 1.0.
Other types and classes of reinforcement might be applied without
restrictions.
2.16. Hot-rolled reinforcement of class 240 of steel grade St3sp and
St3ps as well as of class 300 of steel grade 10G shall be used for
mounting (limiting) eyes of elements of concrete and reinforced concrete
assemblies.

SPECIFIED AND DESIGN REINFORCEMENT
CHARACTERISTICS

2.17. Basic strength characteristic of reinforcement is a specified
value of tensile strength R
s,
, taken depending on reinforcement class given
in Table 2.5
2.18. Design values of reinforcement tensile strength R
s
for limit
states of the first group are taken using formula

s
n s
s
R
R
,
= , (2.2)
where
s
is partial safety factor of reinforcement strength, which is taken
equal to:
1.1 for reinforcement class 240, 300 and 400;
1.15 for reinforcement class 500;
1.2 for reinforcement class 500.

Design values R
s
are given (with approximation) in Table 2.6.
Herewith, value R
s,
is taken equal to the smallest monitored value in
accordance with the corresponding GOST.
Design values of reinforcement tensile strength R
s,ser


Table 2.5
Reinforcement class
Specified diameter of
reinforcement,
mm
Specified values of tensile
strength R
s,n
and design values of
tensile strength for limit states of
the second group R
s,ser,
MPa
(kgf/cm
2
)
240
300
400
500
500
6 - 40
10 - 70
6 - 40
6 - 40
3 - 12
240 (2450)
300 (3060)
400 (4080)
500 (5100)
500 (5100)

for limit states of the second group are taken equal to the corresponding
specified values of strength R
s,n
(see Table 2.5).
Design values of reinforcement compression strength R
sc
is taken
equal to reinforcement tensile strength R
s
with exception for reinforcement
class 500 for which R
sc
= 400 MPa and reinforcement class 500 for
which R
sc
= 360 MPa (see Table 2.6). When structure is analyzed regarding
impact of constant and long-term loads, it is permissible to assume values
R
sc
to be equal to R
s
for reinforcement classes 500 and 500.

Table 2.6.
Reinforcement
class
Design values of reinforcement strength for limit states of the first
group, MPa (kgf/cm
2
)
Compression
Tension, R
sc

longitudinal, R
s

transverse (stirrups
and diagonal bars),
R
sw
240 215 (2190) 170 (1730) 215 (2190)
300 270 (2750) 215 (2190) 270 (2750)
400 355 (3620) 285 (2900) 355 (3620)
500 435 (4430) 300 (3060) 400 (4080)
500 415 (4230) 300 (3060) 360 (3670)

2.19. Design values of crosswise reinforcement strength (stirrups and
diagonal bars) R
sw
are reduced in comparison with R
s
by means of
multiplying by service factor
s1
= 0.8, however, taken no more 300 MPa.
Design values R
sw
are given (with approximation) in Table 2.6.
2.20. Value of modulus of reinforcement elasticity
s
is taken to be
the same for both compression and tension and equal to E
s
= 2.0
.
10
5
MPa =
2.0
.
10
6
kgf/cm
2
.

3. CALCULATION LIMIT STATES OF THE FIRST
GROUP FOR CONCRETE AND REINFORCED
CONCRETE ELEMENTS

STRENGTH ANALYSIS OF CONCRETE ELEMENTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.1. Strength analysis of concrete elements is performed regarding
impact of longitudinal compressed forces, moments of flections as well as
local compression.
3.2. Concrete elements are calculated with or without regard to
resistance of tensile zone of concrete depending on their service conditions
and specified requirements.
Calculation of eccentrically compressed elements specified in
paragraph 1.4,a is performed without regard to resistance of tensile zone
concrete assuming that reaching of limit state is characterized by failure of
compressed concrete.
Calculation of elements specified in paragraph 1.4,b as well as
elements for which cracking is not permissible in accordance with
operational requirements (elements subject to pressure of water, drop
aprons, barrier walls, etc.) is performed with allowance for resistance of
tensile zone concrete. Herewith, it is taken that limit state is characterized
by reaching of limit state in tensile zone concrete.
3.3. If forces (moment, transverse or normal force) F
1
of constant and
long-term loads exceed 0.9 of forces of all loads, including short-term ones,
calculation regarding impact of forces F
1
shall be performed, assuming
concrete design strength R
b
and R
bt
with allowance for coefficient
b1
= 0.9.
3.4. Strength of concrete elements regarding impact of local
compression is performed in accordance with instructions of paragraphs
3.81 and 3.82.
3.5. Constructional reinforcement shall be provided in concrete
elements under conditions specified in paragraph 5.12.


CALCULATION FOR ECCENTRICALLY COMPRESSED
ELEMENTS
3.6. Calculation for eccentrically compressed elements shall be
carried out with allowance for accidental eccentricity
taken no less than:

1/600 of element length or distance between its cross-sections
fixed against movement;
1/30 of section depth;
10 mm.
For statically indeterminate structures (for example, fixed-end
poles) amount of eccentricity of normal force with respect to cross-section
gravity center
0
is taken equal to eccentricity value derived from static
calculation, however, no less than
.
For statically determinate structures eccentricity
0
is taken
equal to a sum of eccentricities from static structure calculation and
statically distributed.
3.7. With element flexibility l
0
/i > 14 (for a rectangular cross-section
with l
0
/h > 4) it is necessary to take into account impact of deflection on
their load carrying capacity by means of multiplying value
0
by coefficient
specified in accordance with paragraph 3.10.
3.8. Calculation for concrete eccentrically compressed elements with
normal force within the limits of cross-section is performed without regard
to concrete resistance of tensile zone in the following way.
For elements of rectangular cross-sections, T- and I-sections,
when force is applied in the plane of mirror symmetry, calculation is carried
out using condition
N R
b
A
b
, (3.1)
,

where A
b
is square of concrete tensile zone determined using the condition
that its gravity center coincides with a point of application of
normal force N (with allowance for deflection) (Drawing. 3.1.).
For elements of a rectangular cross-section
,
2
1
0
=
h
bh A
b

(3.2)
where for refer to paragraph 3.10.
Symmetrical trapezoidal and V-shaped sections might be calculated
using condition (3.1) provided that maximum compression is at the bigger
cross-section side.

h
b
R
e
o
N
b
b
A
2
1

DRAWING.3.1. SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF FORCES AND
STRESS LINE FOR A CROSS-SECTION NORMAL TO LONGITUDINAL
AXIS OF ECCENTRICALLY COMPRESSED CONCRETE ELEMENT
STRENGTH OF WHICH IS CALCULATED WITHOUT REGARD TO
RESISTANCE OF TENSILE ZONE CONCRETE
1-GRAVITY CENTER OF COMPRESSED ZONE AREA AB, 2 - SAME, AREA OF
THE WHOLE CROSS-SECTION

In other cases calculation is performed on the basis of non-linear
deformational model in accordance with paragraphs 3.72 - 3.76 assuming
that in specified relationship steel area is equal to zero.
With oblique eccentrical compression calculation for a rectangular
cross-section is performed on the basis of condition (3.1) when
b
is
determined using the formula

=
b
e
h
e
bh A
y y
x x
b

0
0
2
1
2
1 , (3.3)
where e
0x
and

e
0y
are eccentricities of force N in direction with respect to
cross-section size h and b.
x
and
y
are coefficients specified in accordance with paragraph 3.10
separately for each direction.
3.9. Eccentrically compressed concrete elements with normal force
beyond the limits of the element cross-section and also elements for which
cracks formation is not permissible regrdless calculation using condition
(3.1) shall be checked with allowance for resistance of concrete of tensile
zone using the condition

1
0

t
bt
y e
I
A
A R
N
, (3.4)

where
t
is distance from gravity center of element cross-section to the most
tensile fiber;
for refer to paragraph 3.10.
For elements of a rectangular cross-section condition (3.4) can be
written in the form

1
6
0

h
e
bh R
N
bt
. (3.5)
It is permissible to analyze concrete elements with allowance for
concrete tensile zone on the basis of non-linear deformation model in
accordance with paragraphs 3.72-3.76 assuming that steel area is equal to
zero.
3.10. Value of coefficient with allowance for deflection effect on
amount of eccentricity of normal force
0
is calculated using formula

cr
N
N
=
1
1
, (3.6)
where N
cr
is nominal critical force determined using formula

2
0
2
l
D
N
cr

= , (3.7)
where D is element stiffness in strength limit state calculated using
the formula
;
) 3 , 0 (
15 , 0
e l
b
I E D
+
= (3.8)
l
0
is determined using Table 3.1.
Table 3.1.
Type of wall and pole bearing
Design length l
0

of eccentrically
compressed
concrete elements
1. With supports upwards and downwards:
) with flap hinges on either side regardless of bearing
displacement value
) with one end restraint and possible bearing
displacement of:
single-aisle building
multiple-aisle building
) with partial restraint of fixed supports
2. Free standing buildings

1.2
1.5
0.8
2

Note. is either distance between floor structures and other horizontal
supports (for floor structures which are monolithically connected to the wall
(pole) with the deduction of floor structure width) or height of a free-standing
building.

For elements of a rectangular cross-section formula (3.8) can be
written in the form

) 3 . 0 ( 80
3
l
b
bh E
D
+
= . (3.8)
In formulae (3.8) and (3.8):
l
is a coefficient taking into consideration impact of long-term load
on vertical deflection in limit state which is equal to

1
1
1
M
M
l
l
+ = , (3.9)
however, no more than 2;
!
is moment of relatively tensile or the least cross-section edge due
to impacts of constant, long-term and short-term loads;
M
1l
is the same for constant and long-term loads;
is a coefficient taken to be equal to

)
/h, however no less than 0.15.
For walls and poles with elastically fixed supports the specified value
is taken for calculation of cross-sections in the middle 1/3 of height .
When calculation is carried out for support cross-sections, it is taken that
= 1.0, for all other cross-sections using linear interpolation.
If a lower support is stiffly restrained, then with an elastic upper
support value determined using the formula (3.6) is taken for sections of
the lower section with height of 2/3..
3.11. Calculation with allowance for deflection of eccentrically
compressed concrete elements of a rectangular cross-section of class not
higher than 20 with l
0
20h is permissible to carry out using condition
N
n
u
b
by, (3.10)
Where the value is determined using the drawing (3.2) depending on values
E0/h and = l
o
/h.
3.12. When impacts of normal forces are sufficient, the following
condition shall be met
0 , 1 +
b
mc
bt
mt
R R

, (3.11)
where
tm

mc
are main tensile and compressed stress calculated using the
formula

2
2
2 2

+
+ =
x x
mc
mt
m , (3.12)
and - normal and shearing stress in the considered section fiber

calculated the same way as for elastic section fiber.
0.000
0.100
0.200
0.300
0.400
0.500
0.600
0.700
0.800
0.900
1.000
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50

Drawing.3.2. Diagram of load-carrying capacity of eccentrically compressed
concrete elements
Graphic symbols: with 0 , 1
1 1
= M M
l
;
with 5 , 0
1 1
= M M
l
;

For a rectangular cross-section condition check (3.11) is performed
for fiber at the level of gravity center of the section and for T- and I-
sections at the level of contact of compression flanges and section wall.

CALCULATION OF FLEXURAL ELEMENTS

E0/H
N
=5
=0
=10
=15
=20

3.13. Calculation of concrete flexural elements shall be performed
using the following condition
M R
bt
W, (3.13)
where W is Z-modulus for outermost tensile fiber; for a rectangular cross-
section
6
2
bh
W = .
In addition for elements of T- and I-sections the following condition
shall be met:
R
bt
, (3.14)
where - shearing stress calculated the same way as for elastic material at
the level of gravity center.

CALCULATION EXAMPLES

Example 1. Given: a separation concrete panel with thickness h =
150 mm, height = 2.7 m, manufactured upright (in a cassette); concrete of
class 15 (
b
= 24000 MPa, R
b
= 8.5 MPa); total load per 1 m of the wall is
N = 700 kN including constant and long-term load N
l
= 650 kN.
It is required to check panel durability.
C a l c u l a t i o n is carried out in accordance with paragraph 3.8.
regarding impact of normal force applied with accidental eccentricity
,
determined in accordance with paragraph 3.6.
Since mm, 10 mm 5 , 4
600
2700
600
and mm 10 mm 5
30
150
30
< = = < = =
h
is taken
=
0

= 10 mm. It is taken that there is hinge support upwards and downwards.
Consequently, design length l
0
is equal to l
0
= = 2.7 m in accordance with
Table 3.1. Taking into consideration that l
0
/h = 2.7/0.15 = 18 > 4,
calculation is carried out with allowance for deflection influence in
accordance with paragraph 3.10.
Using formula (3.9) one can determine coefficient
l
taking into
consideration M
1l
/M
1
= N
l
/N =650/700 = 0.93,

l
= 1 + M
ll
/M
1
= 1+ 0.93 = 1.93.
Since
0
/h = 10/150 = 0.067 < 0.15, assuming
= 0.15.
Stiffness D is calculated using formula (3.8,) assuming cross-section
width b = 1 m = 1000 mm

12
3 3
10 166 , 1
) 15 , 0 3 , 0 ( 93 , 1 80
150 1000 24000
) 3 , 0 ( 80
=
+

=
+
=
l
b
bh E
D

.
mm
2
.
Then
. 797 , 1
1578
700
1
1
- 1
1
kN; 3 , 1578 10 3 , 1578
2700
10 166 , 1
3
2
12 2
2
0
2
=
= =
= =

= =
cr
cr
N
N
N
l
D
N

Concrete design strength R
b
is taken in accordance with paragraph
2.8 with allowance for coefficients
b2
= 0.9 and
b3
= 0.9. Taking into
consideration occurrence of short-term loads one can assume that
b1
= 1.0.
Then R
b
= 8.5
.
0.9. 0,9 = 6,89 MPa.
Let us check condition (3.1) using formula (3.2)
6 . 784 N 784635 ) 797 . 1 067 , 0 2 1 ( 150 1000 89 . 6
2
1
0
= = =
=
h
bh R A R
b b b

kN > N =700
kN, which means panel strength regarding total load impact is ensured.
Since N
l
/N = 0.93 > 0.9 in accordance with paragraph 3.3, let us
check panel strength regarding only constant and long-term loads, that
means with N = 650 kN. In this case
l
= 2, and then
. 745 . 1
1523 / 650 1
1
and 4 , 1523
2
93 , 1
3 . 1578 =
= = =
cr
N
Design strength R
b
is taken with allowance for
b1
= 0.9: R
b
= 6.89
.

0.9 = 6.2 N.
kN 650 kN 6 . 713 N 713620
150
745 , 1 10 2
1 150 1000 2 . 6 = > = =

= N A R
b b
,
i.e. panel strength is ensured with any combination of loads.

CALCULATION OF DURABILITY FOR REINFORCED
CONCRETE ELEMENTS

3.14. Durability of reinforced concrete elements is calculated
regarding moments of flection, transverse forces, normal forces, torque
moments and local load impact (local compression, pushing, cleavage).

FLEXURAL ELEMENTS

CALCULATION OF DURABILITY FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
ELEMENTS UNDERTHE IMPACT OF FLECTION MOMENTS


General provisions

3.15. Calculation of durability of reinforced concrete elements
regarding impact of flection moments shall be performed for cross-sections
which are normal in relation to axle.
Calculation of normal cross-sections of flexural elements shall be
performed on the basis of non-linear deformation model in accordance with
paragraphs 3.72-3.76 assuming that N = 0.
Calculation for a rectangular, T- and I-sections with reinforcement
located at element edges which are perpendicular to bending plane with
moment effect in the cross section plane of mirror symmetry might be
performed with respect to critical forces in accordance with paragraphs 3.17
3.27.
Calculation for elements with such cross-sections regarding impact
of biaxial bending in restrained terms might be performed with respect to
critical forces in accordance with paragraphs 3.28 and 3.29.
3.16. For reinforced concrete elements with ultimate bending
moment with respect to durability less than moment of crack formation
(paragraphs 4.5-4.8), area of longitudinal tensile reinforcement shall be
increased in comparison with specified design value by no less than 15% or
shall satisfy durability analysis regarding moment of crack formation.
3.17. Durability of normal cross-sections shall be performed
depending on correlation between value of relative height of concrete
compressed zone
0
h
x
= , determined using respective equilibrium
conditions, and value of boundary relative height of compressed zone
R
,
with which limit state is reached simultaneously with reaching tensile
reinforcement stress which is equal to design strength R
s
.
Value
R

700
1
8 , 0
s
R
R
+
= , (3.15)
or Table 3.2.
Table 3.2
Reinforcement
class
240 300 400 500 500
Value
R
0,612 0,577 0,531 0,493 0,502
Value
R
0,425 0,411 0,390 0,372 0,376


Rectangular cross-sections

3.18. Calculation for rectangular cross-sections (Drawing.3.3) is
carried out in the following way depending on compressed zone height
:
'
b R
A R A R
x
b
s sc s s

= (3.16)
) with
R
h
x
=
0
using the condition
M < R
b
b(h
0
0,5x) +
'
s sc
A R (h
0
a); (3.17)
) with >
R
using the condition
M <
R
R
b
bh
2
0
+
'
s sc
A R (h
0
- a'), (3.18)
where
R
=
R
(1 0.5
R
) or see Table 3.2.
The right part of condition (3.18) might be increased to a certain
extent if required replacing value
R
(0.7
R
+ 0.3
m
), where
m
= (1
0.5) and assuming that is no more than 1.
If 0, durability is checked using the condition
M R
s
A
s
(h
0
a'). (3.19)
A
h
h
a
s
R
M
a
'
s
b
s
A
x
A'
b
R
A
b
R
sc
A'
o
R
b
A
s
s
b

Drawing.3.3. Schematic representation of forces and stress diagram in a
rectangular cross section of a flexural reinforced concrete element
If compressed zone height calculated without regard to compressed
reinforcement (
'
s
A = 0.0) is less than 2', condition (3.19) might be checked
with the use of replacing ' by /2.

3.19. It is recommended to design flexural elements in such a way to
provide fulfillment of the condition
R
. A failure of the above condition
is permissible only in case if area of tensile reinforcement is calculated
regarding limit states of the second group or taken due to design
considerations.
3.20. Durability check of rectangular cross-sections with a single
reinforcement is performed:
with x <
R
h
0
using the condition
M R
s
A
s
(h
0
0,5x), (3.20)
where is height of compressed zone which is equal to
b R
A R
x
b
s s
= ;
R
see
paragraph 3.17;
with
R
h
0
using the condition
M
R
R
b
2
0
h , (3.21)
where for
R
refer to Table 3.2;
herewith, load carrying capacity shall be increased to a certain extent
using the recommendation from paragraph 3.18,b.
3.21. Longitudinal reinforcement is selected in the following way.
Value
2
0
bh R
M
b
m
= is calculated. (3.22)
If
m
<
R
(see Table 3.2), compressed reinforcement is not required.
When there is no compressed reinforcement, area of tensile
reinforcement is calculated using the formula

. 0
/ ) 2 1 1 (
s m b s
R bh R A = (3.23)
In case if
>
R
, it is required to increase cross-section or to
enhance concrete quality class, or otherwise to install compressed
reinforcement in accordance with paragraph 3.22.
3.22. Areas of tensile A
s
and compressed
'
s
A reinforcements
corresponding to minimum value of their sum in case if compressed
reinforcement is required (see paragraph 3.21) are calculated using the
formulae:
;
) ' (
0
2
0
'
h R
bh R M
A
s
b R
s
=

(3.24)
A
s
=
R
R
b
bh
0
/R
s
+
'
s
A , (3.25)
Where for
R
and
R
refer to Table 3.2.

If value of the taken area of compressed reinforcement
'
S
A
sufficiently exceeds the value calculated using formula (3.24), area of
tensile reinforcement might be a little decreased in comparison with the
value calculated using formula (3.25) by means of the formula

'
0
/ ) 2 1 1 (
s s m b s
A R bh R A + = , (3.26)
where 0
) ' (
2
0
0
'

=
bh R
a h A R M
b
s sc
m
.
Herewith, condition
m
<
R
shall be fulfilled (see Table 3.2).

T-sections and I-sections

3.23. Calculation for cross-sections with a flange in the compressed
zone (T-sections, I-section, etc.) is performed depending on boundary of
compressed zone:
a) if boundary is in the flange (Drawing. 3.4,), the following
condition is met
R
s
A
s
R
b
' '
'
s sc f
f
A R h b + , (3.27)
Calculation is performed in accordance with paragraphs 3.18 and
3.20 in the same way as for rectangular cross-section with width
'
f
b ;
b) if boundary is in the jack rib (Drawing. 3.4,b), i.e. condition (3.27)
is not met, calculation is performed using the condition:
b
b
f
h
s
A
a)
a
'
f
h
b
a
'
b
h
a
s
A
x
0
A
s
)
f
h
h
a
s
x
0
f
A

Drawing.3.4. Boundary of compressed zone in a T-section of a flexural reinforced
concrete element
a in the flange; b in the jack rib


) ' ( ) 5 , 0 ( ) 5 . 0 (
0
' '
0 0
a h A R h h A R x h bx R M
s sc f ov b b
+ + , (3.28)
where A
ov
area of flange overhangs, which is equal to
' '
) (
f f
h b b ,
herewith, compressed zone height is calculated using the formula

b R
A R A R A R
x
b
ov b s sc s s

=
'
, (3.29)
and taken no more than
R
h
0
(see Table 3.2).
If x >
R
h
0
, condition (3.28) might be written in the form
) ' ( ) 5 , 0 (
0
' '
0
2
0
h A R h h A R bh R M
s sc f ov b b R
+ + , (3.30)
Where for
R
refer to Table 3.2.
Note: 1. When overhang height varies, it is permissible to assume value
'
f
h
equal to average overhang height.
2. Compressed flange width
'
f
b , introduced into the calculation shall not
exceed values specified in paragraph 3.26.

3.24. Required area of compressed reinforcement is determined using
the formula

) ' (
) 5 , 0 (
0
'
0
2
0
'
h R
h h A R bh R M
A
sc
f ov b b R
s

=

, (3.31)
where for
R
refer to Table 3.2; A
ov
=
' '
) (
f f
h b b .
Herewith, condition
0
'
h h
R f
shall be met. In case if
0
'
h h
R f
> , area
of compressed reinforcement is determined in the same way as for a
rectangular cross section with width
'
f
b b = using formula (3.24).
3.25. Required area of tensile reinforcement is determined in the
following way:
a) If boundary is in the flange, i.e. the following condition is met:
), ( ) 5 , 0 (
'
0
' '
0
' '
a h A R h h h b R M
s sc f f f b
+ (3.32)
Area of tensile reinforcement is determined in the way as for a
rectangular cross-section with width
'
f
b in accordance with paragraphs 3.21
and 3.22;
) if boundary is in the jack rib, i.e. condition (3.32) is not met, area
of tensile reinforcement is calculated using the formula

s
s sc ov b m b
s
R
A R A R bh R
A
'
0
) 2 1 1 ( + +
=

, (3.33)

where
2
0
0
' '
0
) ' ( ) 5 . 0 (
bh R
a h A R h h A R M
b
s sc f ov b
m

= . (3.34)
Herewith, condition
m

R
shall be met (see Table 3.2).
3.26. Value b
'
f
introduced into the calculation is taken on the basis
of condition that width of flange overhang on either side is no more than 1/6
of the element bay:
) when there are transverse jack ribs or with h h
f
1 . 0
'
is 1/2 of
clearance between longitudinal jack ribs;
) when there are transverse jack ribs (or distance between them is
more than distance between longitudinal jack ribs) and with ; 6 - 1 . 0
' '
f f
h h h <
) with cantilevers of the flange
with h h
f
1 . 0
'
- ; 6
'
f
h
with ; 3 1 . 0 05 . 0
' '
f f
h h h h <
with h h
f
05 . 0 '
'
< overhangs are not taken into account.

Calculation examples

Rectangular cross-sections

Example 2. Given: cross-section size b = 300 mm, h = 600 mm; =
=40 mm; moment of flection with allowance for short-term loads = =200
kN
.
m; concrete quality class 15 (R
b
= 8.5 MPa); reinforcement class 300
(R
s
= 270 MPa).
It is required to determine area of longitudinal reinforcement.
C a l c u l a t i o n. h
0
= 600 40 = 560 mm. Longitudinal
reinforcement is selected in accordance with paragraph 3.21. One can
calculate value
using formula (3.22):

. 25 . 0
560 300 5 . 8
10 200
2
6
2
0
=

= =
bh R
M
b
m

One can use Table 3.2. to find
R
= 0.41. Since
= 0.25 <
R
,
compressed reinforcement is not required.
Required area of tensile reinforcement is calculated using formula
(3.23)
1550 270 / ) 25 . 0 2 1 1 ( 560 300 5 . 8 / ) 2 1 1 (
0
= = =
s m b s
R bh R A mm
2
.
One can assume 228 + 125 (
s
= 1598 mm
2
).

Example 3. Given: a cross-section with dimensions b = 300 mm, h =
800 mm; = 70 mm; tensile reinforcement 400 (R
s
= 355 MPa); area

A
s
=
2945 mm
2
(625); concrete of class 25 (R
b
= 14.5 MPa); moment of
flection = 550 kN
.
m.
It is required to check cross-section durability.
C a l c u l a t i o n h
0
= 800 70 = 730. Durability is checked in
accordance with paragraph 3.20:
Value is calculated:
240
300 5 , 14
2945 355
=
= =
b R
A R
x
b
s s
mm.
One can find
R
= 0,531 in Table 3.2. Since
R
h
x
< = = = 329 , 0
730
240
0
,
condition (3.20) is checked:
R
s
A
s
(h
0
0,5x) = 355
.
2945 (730 0.5
.
240) = 636.8
.
10
6

.
mm =636.8
kN
.
m > = 550 kN
.
m,
i.e. cross-section durability is ensured.
Example 4. Given: a cross-section with dimensions b= 300 mm, h =
800 mm; a = =50 mm; reinforcement class 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa);
moment of flection M = 780 kNm; concrete of class 15 ( R
b
= 8.5 MPa).
0
= h a = 800 50 =750 mm. Required area of
longitudinal reinforcement is determined in accordance with paragraph
3.21. One can find value
: using formula (3.22).

. 544 . 0
750 300 5 . 8
10 780
2
6
2
0
=

= =
bh R
M
b
m

Since
m
= 0.544 >
R
= 0.39 (see Table 3.2) with given cross-
section dimensions and concrete class, compressed reinforcement is
required.
Assuming = 30 mm and
R
= 0.531 (see Table 3.2) required area
of compressed and tensile reinforcement might be calculated using
formulae (3.24) and (3.25):
863
) 30 750 ( 355
750 300 5 , 8 39 . 0 10 780
) ' (
2 6
0
2
0 '
=
=
a h R
bh R M
A
sc
b R
s

mm
2
;
3724 863
355
5 . 8 750 300 531 . 0
' 0
= +

= + =
s
s
b R
s
A
R
R bh
A

mm
2
.
One can assume
'
s
A = 942 mm
2
(320); A
s
= 4021 mm
2
(532).

700 mm; a = 50 mm; a = 30 mm; concrete of class 30 (R
b
= 17 MPa);
reinforcement 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa); area of compressed
reinforcement
'
s
A = 942 mm
2
(320); moment of flection = 580 kN
.
m.
It is required to determine area of tensile reinforcement.
0
= 700 50 = 650 mm. Calculation is performed
taking into consideration the presence of compressed reinforcement in
accordance with paragraph 3.22.
Value
:is calculated
173 , 0
650 300 17
) 30 650 ( 942 355 10 580 ) ' (
2
6
2
0
0
'
=

=

=
bh R
a h A R M
b
s sc
m
.
Since
m
= 0,173 <
R
= 0,39 (see Table 3.2), required area of
tensile reinforcement is calculated using formula (3.26)
. mm 2727
942 355 / ) 173 . 0 2 1 1 ( 650 300 17 / ) 2 1 1 (
2
'
0
=
= + = + =
s s m b s
A R bh R A

One can take 336 (A
s
= 3054 mm
2
).
700 mm; a = 70 mm; a = 30 mm; concrete of class 20 (R
b
= 11.5 MPa);
reinforcement class 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa); area of tensile
reinforcement is A
s
= 4826 mm
2
(632), area of compressed reinforcement
is A
'
s
= 339 mm
2
(312); moment of flection = 630 kN
.
m.
0
= 700 70 = 630 mm. Cross-section durability
is checked in accordance with paragraph 3.18.
Height of compressed zone is calculated using formula (3.16):
7 . 461
300 5 . 11
) 339 4826 ( 355
'
=
=
b R
A R A R
x
b
s sc s s
mm.
One can find
R
= 0.531 and
R
= 0.39 in Table 3.2. Since
, 531 . 0 733 , 0
630
7 . 461
0
= > = = =
R
h
x
cross-section durability is checked using
condition (3.18):
, 630 2 . 606 H 10 2 . 606
) 30 630 ( 339 355 630 300 5 . 11 39 . 0 ) ' (
6
2
0
' 2
0
= < = =
= + = +
M
a h A R bh R
s sc b R

i.. durability in accordance with this condition is not ensured. One can
specify the right part of the condition (3.18) replacing value
R
by (0.7
R
+
0.3
m
), where
m
= (1 - 0.5) = 0.733(1- 0.5
.
0.733) = 0.464:

(0.7
.
0.39 + 0.3
.
0.464)11.5
.
300
.
630
2
+ 355
.
339
.
600 = 636.6
.

10
6
N
.
mm = 636.6 kN
.
m > = 630 kN
.
m, i.e. durability is ensured.

T-sections and I-sections

Example 7. Given: a cross section with dimensions
'
f
b = 1500 mm,
'
f
h = 50 mm, b = 200 mm, h = 400 mm; = 80 mm; concrete of class 25
(R
b
= 14.5 MPa), reinforcement class 400 (R
s
= 355 MPa); moment of
flection = 260 kN
.
m.
0
in accordance with paragraph 3.25 on the assumption that compressed
reinforcement is not required.
One can check condition (3.32) assuming that
'
s
A = 0:
R
b
b
'
f
'
f
h (h
0
0.5
'
f
h ) = 14.5
.
1500
.
50(320 0.5
.
50) = 320.8
.
10
6
N
.
mm =
= 320.8 kN
.
m > = 260 kN
.
m,
i.. compressed reinforcement zone is in the flange and calculation is
performed in the same way as for a rectangular cross-section with width b =
'
f
b = 1500 mm in accordance with paragraph 3.21.
The value is calculated:
117 , 0
320 1500 5 . 14
10 260
2
6
2
0
=

= =
bh R
M
b
m
<
R
= 0.39 (see Table 3.2),
i.. compressed reinforcement is in fact not required.
Area of tensile reinforcement is calculated using formula (3.22)
2446 355 / ) 117 . 0 2 1 1 ( 320 1500 5 . 14 / ) 2 1 1 (
0
= = =
s m b s
R bh R A mm
2
.
One can take 428(A
s
= 2463 mm
2
).
Example 8. Given: a cross section with dimensions
'
f
b = 400 mm,
120
'
=
f
h mm, b = 200 mm, h = 600 mm; = 65 mm; concrete of class 15
(R
b
= 8.5 MPa); reinforcement class 400 (R
s
= 355 MPa); moment of
flection = 270 kN
.
m.
It is required to determine area of tensile reinforcement.
C a l c u l a t i o n.h
0
in accordance with paragraph 3.25 on the assumption that compressed
reinforcement is not required.
Since

R
b
b
'
f
'
f
h (h
0
0.5
'
f
h ) = 8.5
.
400
.
120(535 0.5
.
120) = 193.8
.
10
6
N
.
mm =
= 193.8 kN
.m
< M = 270 kN
.
m,
boundary of compressed zone is in the jack rib and area of tensile
reinforcement is determined using formula (3.33), assuming area of
overhangs equal to 24000 120 ) 200 400 ( ) (
' '
= = =
f f ov
h b b A mm
2
. Value
m

is calculated with
'
s
A = 0
Table3.2), (see 39 . 0 356 . 0
535 200 5 . 8
) 120 5 . 0 535 ( 24000 5 . 8 10 270
) 5 , 0 (
2
6
2
0
'
0
= < =
=

=

=
R
b
f ov b
m
bh R
h h A R M

consequently, compressed reinforcement is not required.
2
0
5 . 1949
355
24000 5 . 8 ) 356 . 0 2 1 1 ( 535 200 5 . 8
) 2 1 1 (
=
=
+
=
+
=
s
ov b m b
s
R
A R bh R
A

One can take 425(A
s
= 1964 mm
2
).
Example 9. Given: a cross-section with dimensions
'
f
b = 400 mm,
'
f
h = 100 mm, b= 200 mm, h = 600 mm; a = 70 mm, concrete of class 25
(R
b
= 14.5 MPa); tensile reinforcement class 400 (R
s
= 355 MPa); area A
s

= 1964 mm
2
(425);
'
s
A = 0.0; moment of flection M = 300 kN
.
m.
0
= 600 70 = 530 mm. Durability is checked in
accordance with paragraph 3.23, assuming
'
s
A = 0.0. Since R
s
A
s
= 355
.
1964 = 697220 H >R
b
' '
f f
h b =14.5
.
400
.
100 = 580000 N, boundary of
compressed zone is in the jack rib and cross-section durability is checked
using condition (3.28).
For this purpose height of compressed zone is calculated using
formula (3.29) assuming area of overhangs equal to
20000 100 ) 200 400 ( ) (
' '
= = =
f f ov
h b b A mm
2
:
140
200 5 . 14
20000 5 . 14 1964 355
=
=
b R
A R A R
x
b
ov b s s
mm <
R
h
0
= 0.531
.
530 = 281 mm (
R
is found in Table 3.2).
R
b
bx (h
0
0,5x) + R
b
A
ov
(h
0
0.5h
'
f
) = 14.5
.
200
.
140
.
(530 0.5
.
140) +
+ 14.5
.
20000(530 0.5
.
100) = 326
.
10
6
N
.
mm = 326 kN
.
m> = 300
kN
.
m,
i.. cross-section durability is ensured.


Elements in biaxial bending

3.27. Calculation of rectangular cross sections, T-sections, I-sections
and L-shaped cross sections in biaxial bending is permissible to perform
assuming that the form of compressed zone is the same like in Drawing.
3.5; herewith, the following condition shall be met
M
x
R
b
[A
wb
(h
0
x
1
/3) + S
ov,x
] + R
sc
S
sx
, (3.35)
where
is a component of flection moment in the plane of axis (two

mutual perpendicular axes crossing gravity center of tensile
reinforcement in parallel with cross-section sides are taken as axes
and ; for a cross section with a flange axis is taken in parallel
with the jack rib plane);
A
wb
= A
b
A
ov
; (3.36)
A
b
area of concrete compressed zone, which is equal to

b
s sc s s
b
R
A R A R
A
'
= ; (3.37)
b0
h
o
i
f
b
x
h
o
bov
y y
h
'
x
1
A'
S
A
S
2
A
b
b
0i
x
1
b' ov
b'f
A
S
x
b
0
1
A'
S
b
2
y
1
x
h
o
i
A
b
0i
b
x
h
o
y

a)
b)

DRAWING.3.5 FORM OF COMPRESSED ZONE IN A CROSS-SECTION OF
A REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENT IN BIAXIAL BENDING
a T-section; b- rectangular cross-section; 1-plane of flection moment effect;
2- gravity center of tensile reinforcement cross-section

A
ov
square of the most compressed flange overhang;
1
size of concrete compressed zone along the most compressed side
face of the cross-section calculated using the formula
ctg 2
2
1 web
A t t x + + = , (3.38)
where ; ctg
ctg
5 . 1
0 0
, ,
= h b
A
S S
t
web
x ov y ov


S
ov,y
,,S
ov,x
static moments of area A
ov
in relation to axes and y;
bending angle of plane of flection moment to axis , i.. ctg =
M
x
/M
y
(M
y
a component of flection moment in the plane
of axis );
b
0
distance from gravity center of tensile reinforcement cross-
section to the most compressed side edge of the jack rib
(side).
When rectangular cross-sections are calculated, values A
ov
, S
ov,x,
S
ov,y

are taken to be equal to zero.
If A
b
< A
ov

or x
1
< 0,2h
'
f
, calculation is performed in the same way
as for a rectangular section with width b =
'
f
b .
If the condition

ov
web
b b
A
x
+
<
5 . 1
1
, is met (3.39)
(where b
ov
is width of the least compressed flange overhang),
calculation is performed without taking biaxial bending into account, i.e.
using formulae from paragraphs 3.18 and 3.23 regarding moment effect
=
, herewith, condition (3.40) shall be checked, assuming

1
is the same
like with biaxial bending.
When value A
b
is calculated using formula (3.37), stress in tension
bar closest to the boundary of compressed zone shall not be less than R
s
,
which is ensured when the following condition is met

R
i ov i
ov
h b b
x b

+ +
+
=
0
'
0
1
'
tg ) (
tg
, (3.40)
where for
R
refer to Table 3.2;
b
0i
and h
0i
are distances from the considered bar respectively to the most
compressed edge (side) normal to axis (see Drawing. 3.5);
'
ov
b is width of the most compressed overhang;
is inclination of line which limits compressed zone to axis y;
value tg is calculated using the formula

wb
A
x
2
tg
2
1
= .
If condition (3.40) is not met, calculation for a cross-section is
performed using stepwise approximation by means of replacing value R
s
in
formula (3.37) for each tension bar by stress values equal to

= 1
8 , 0
700
i
si
(MPa), however no more than R

s.

When structures are designed it is not permissible to use value
i

exceeding
R
by more than 20%, herewith only one structural recalculation
might be performed with replacement in formula (3.37) values R
s
for
tension rods for which
i
>
R
regarding stress equal to

3
2 ) 1 / 8 , 0 ( 700
1
s i
s
R +
=

. (3.41)
When formula (3.37) is used, it is recommended to assume
reinforcement located close to tensile edge as tensile reinforcement with
area A
s
in parallel with axis y; reinforcement located close to compressed
zone in parallel with axis , however, at one the most compressed side of
axis as compressed reinforcement with area
'
s
A (see Drawing. 3.5).
It can be used in case if a condition is fulfilled:
for rectangular cross-sections, T- and L-shaped sections with a
flange in compressed zone x
1
< h;
for rectangular cross-sections, T- and L-shaped sections with a
flange in tensile zone x
1
< h h
f
- b
ov,t
tg,
where h
f
and

b
ov,t
are height and width of the least tensile flange
overhang (Drawing. 3.6).
Otherwise, calculation is performed on the basis of non-linear
deformation model in accordance with paragraphs 3.72-3.76 assuming that
N = 0.
3.28. It is recommended to use graphs of Drawing 3.7 in order to
determine required quantity of tensile reinforcement with biaxial bending
for elements of rectangular, T- and L-shaped sections with a flange in
compressed zone. Location of gravity center of tensile reinforcement is
taken for this purpose and value
s
is determined using the graph depending
on:

MANUAL to CP 52-101-2003 concrete and REinforced concrete structures without prior
reinforcement stress

Drawing. 3.6. T-section with compressed zone spreading into the least tensile
flange overhang

,
;
0
2
0
,
2
0 0
,
h b R
S R S R M
h b R
S R S R M
b
sy sc y ov b y
my
b
sx sc x ov b x
mx

=

=

where S
sx
and

S
sy
are first moments of area
'
s
A in relation to axis y and axis
x.
All the other designations see in paragraph 3.27.
If
mx
< 0, calculation is performed in the same way as for a
rectangular cross-section assuming b =
'
f
b .
If value
s
in the graph is at the left side of the curve corresponding
to the parameter
0
b
b b
ov
+
, reinforcement is selected


Drawing.3.7. Graph of load carrying capacity of a rectangular cross-section, T-
and L-shaped sections for elements in biaxial bending

;
2
0 0
,
h b R
S R S R M
b
sx sc x ov b x
mx

= ;
0
2
0
,
h b R
S R S R M
b
sy sc y ov b y
my

=
0 0
'
h b R
A R A R A R
b
s sc ov b s s
s

=
is performed without regard to biaxial bending, i.. in accordance with
paragraphs 3.22 and 3.26 regarding moment effect =
.
Required square of tensile reinforcement in case if it is in service
with total design strength is calculated using the formula

'
0 0
) (
s
s
b
ov s s
A
R
R
A h b A + + = , (3.42)
where for A
ov
refer to formula (3.36).
Gravity center of a taken tensile reinforcement shall be apart from
tensile edge not further than design gravity center. Otherwise, recalculation
is required assuming new gravity center of the tensile reinforcement cross-
section.
Tensile reinforcement can be used with total strength only if
condition (3.40) is fulfilled.
With reinforcement of class 400 and less condition (3.40) is always
fulfilled if value
s
in graph 3.7 is inside the zone limited by coordinate
axes and a curve corresponding to the parameter
0
'
/ b b
ov
.
If condition (3.40) is not fulfilled, it is necessary to install (to
increase) compressed reinforcement or to enhance concrete of class,
otherwise to increase dimensions of the cross-section (especially, the most
compressed flange overhang).
Values
s
in the graph shall not be between the axis
my
and the
curve corresponding to parameter h
0
/ h. Otherwise,
1
is becoming more
than h and calculation shall be performed in accordance with paragraphs
3.72-3.76.


Example10. Given: reinforced concrete wall plate with sloping 1:4
(ctg=4); reinforcement cross-section and location are determined using
Drawing. 3.8; concrete of class 25 (R
b
=14,5MPa); tensile reinforcement of
class 400 (R
s
=355MPa); A
s
= 763 mm
2
(318);
'
s
= 0.0; flection moment
in the vertical plane is = 82,6 kN
.
m.
C a l c u la t i o n. Using Drawing. 3.8:
mm. 90
2
20
80 ' mm; 75
2
150 300
mm; 90
3
30 1 120 2
mm; 360
3
30 1
30 400
'
0 0
= + = =
= =
=
+
= =
=
f ov ov
h b b
b h

1
5
0
9
0
0
b
b
2
y
3
0
3
0
3
0
3
0
0
A
b
4
0
0
h
0
x
1
x
3
0
0
i
2
0
i
=
1
:
4
y
0
i
h
8
0

Drawing 3.8 For calculation example 10
1- plane of flection moment; 2-gravity center of tensile reinforcement area

Using formula (3.37) one can determine area of concrete compressed
zone A
b
:
18680
5 , 14
763 355
=
= =
b
s s
b
R
A R
A mm
2
.
Area of the most compressed flange overhang and first moments of
the area in relation to axes and are respectively equal to:
ov
=
' '
f ov
h b = 75
.
90 =6750 mm
2
;
S
ov,y
= A
ov
(b
0
+ b
'
ov
/2)=6750(90 + 75/2) = 86.06
.
10
4
mm
3
;
S
ov,x
= A
ov
(h
0
-
'
f
h /2) = 6750(360 90/2) = 212,6
.
10
4
mm
3
.
Since A
b
> A
ov
, one can continue calculation in the same way as for a
T-section.
A
one canb
= A
b
A
ov
= 18680 6750 = 11930 mm
2
.
Compressed zone size
1
is determined using formula (3.38). For this
purpose one can calculate
. 185 4 11930 2 5 . 165 5 . 165 tg 2
. 5 . 165
360 4 90
11930
2126000 4 860600
5 . 1 ctg
ctg
5 . 1
2 2
1
0 0
, ,
= + + = + + =
=
=
+

=
web
web
x ov y ov
A t t x
h b
A
S S
t

Condition (3.39) is checked:
5 . 79
75 150
11930 5 . 1 5 . 1
=
+
=
+
ov
web
b b
A
mm < x
1
= 185 mm,
consequently, calculation is continued using formulae of biaxial bending.
One can check condition (3.40) for the least tension bar. From
Drawing. 3.8 one can have b
0i
= 30 mm, h
0i
= 400 30 = 370 mm;
; 434 . 1
11930 2
185
2
tg
2 2
1
=
= =
web
A
x

531 . 0 562 . 0
370 434 . 1 ) 75 30 (
185 434 . 1 75
tg ) ' (
tg '
0 0
1
= > =
+ +
+
=
+ +
+
=
R
i ov i
ov
i
h b b
x b
(see Table 3.2).

Condition (3.40) is not met. Recalculation is performed with
replacement in formula (3.37) value R
s
for the least tension bar with stress
s,
determined using formula (3.41) and correction of values h
0
and

b
0
.
5 . 335
3
355 2 ) 1 562 . 0 / 8 . 0 ( 700
3
2 ) 1 / 8 . 0 ( 700
=
+
=
+
=
s i
s
R
MPa =
=0.945 R
s.

Since all the rods are of the same diameter new values A
b
,b
0
and h
0

are equal to:
mm. 8 . 359
945 . 0 2
30 1
30 400
mm; 1 . 91
945 . 0 2
30 945 . 0 120 2
; mm 18338
3
945 . 0 2
18680
0
0
2
=
+
=
=
+
+
= =
+
=
h
b A
b

Similarly one can determine values S
ov,y
, S
ov,x
, A
one canb
and x
1
:
S
ov,y
= 6750(91,1 + 75/2 = 86,8
.
10
4
mm
3
;
S
ov,x
= 6750(359,8 90/2) = 212,5
.
10
4
mm
3
;
A
one canb
= 18338 6750 = 11588 mm
2
;
mm. 1 . 173 4 11588 2 3 . 181 3 . 181
mm; 3 . 181 8 , 359 4 1 . 91
11588
2125000 4 868000
5 . 1
2
1
= + + =
=
+

=
x
t

Let us check cross-section durability using condition (3.35) assuming
S
sx
=0 and 1 . 80
4 1
4
6 . 82
ctg 1
ctg
os
2 2
=
+
=
+
= =
M M M
x
kN
.
m:
R
b
[A
one canb
(h
0
x
1
/3) +S
ov,x
] = 14.5[11588(359.8 173,1/3) + 212.5
.
10
4
]
=
=81.57
.
10
6
N
.
mm> M
x
= 80,1
.
10
6
N
.
mm,
Example 11. It is required to find tensile reinforcement area with
moment in the vertical plane = 64 kN
.
m using the data from Example 10.
C a l c u l a t i o n. Components of flection moment in the plane of
axes and are:
52 . 15
4 1
64
ctg 1
sin
2 2
=
+
=
+
= =
M
M M
y
kNm;
M
x
= M
y
tg = 15.52
.
4 = 62.1 kN
.
m.
One can determine required quantity of reinforcement in accordance
with paragraph 3.28.
Assuming values R
b
, h
0
, S
ov,x
and S
ov,y
from Example 10 with S
sy
=
S
sx
= 0 one can calculate values
mx
and
my
:
. 072 . 0
360 90 5 . 14
10 06 . 86 5 , 14 10 52 . 15
; 185 . 0
360 90 5 . 14
10 6 . 212 5 . 14 10 1 . 62
2
4 6
0
2
0
,
2
4 6
2
0 0
,
=

=
=
=

=
=
h b R
S R M
h b R
S R M
b
y ov b y
my
b
x ov b x
mx

Since
mx
> 0, calculation is continued for a T-section.
Since a point with coordinates
mx
= 0.185 and
my
= 0.072 in the
graph of Drawing. 3.7 is located at the right side from the curve
corresponding to the parameter 5 . 2
90
75 150
0
=
+
=
+
b
b b
ov
, and at the left side of the
curve corresponding to the parameter 83 . 0 90 / 75 /
0
'
= = b b
ov
, calculation is
continued with allowance for biaxial bending and total design strength of
reinforcement, i.. condition (3.40) is fulfilled.
In the graph value
s
= 0.20 corresponds to coordinates
mx
= 0.185
and
my
= 0.072. Then in accordance with formula (3.42) area of tensile
reinforcement will be equal to
A
s
= (
s
b
0
h
0
+ A
ov
)R
b
/R
s
= (0.2
.
90
.
360 + 6750)14.5/355 = 540.4 mm
2
.
Rods are taken as 316 (A
s
= 603 mm
2
) and located in the way
specified in the Drawing 3.8.

CALCULATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS
UNDER THE IMPACT OF TRANSVERSE FORCES

3.29. THE CALCULATION OF ELEMENTS UNDER THE
IMPACT OF TRANSVERSE FORCES SHALL ENSURE THE
DURABILITY:
- ALONG THE STRIP BETWEEN THE INCLINED SECTIONS
ACCORDING TO PARA 3.30;
- TO THE ACTION OF TRANSVERSE FORCE ALONG THE
INCLINED SECTION ACCORDING TO PARAS 3.31-3.42;
- TO THE IMPACT OF MOMENT ALONG THE INCLINED
SECTION ACCORDING TO PARAS 3.43-3.48.

ALONG THE STRIP
BETWEEN THE INCLINED SECTIONS

3.30. THE FLEXURAL ELEMENTS ALONG THE CONCRETE
STRIP BETWEEN THE INCLINED SECTIONS ARE CALCULATED
TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE CONDITION
Q 0,3RBBH0,, (3.43)
WHERE Q IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE APPLIED TO THE
PERPENDICULAR SECTION AT A DISTANCE FROM
THE SUPPORT OF AT LEAST H0.

ALONG THE INCLINED
SECTIONS FOR THE IMPACT OF TRANSVERSE FORCES

CONSTANT HEIGHT ELEMENT, REINFORCED BY STIRRUPS
PERPENDICULAR TO THE ELEMENT AXIS

3.31. THE FLEXURAL ELEMENTS ALONG THE INCLINED
SECTION (DRAWING 3.9) ARE CALCULATED TAKING INTO
ACCOUNT THE CONDITION
Q QB + QSW, (3.44)
WHERE Q IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE APPLIED TO THE
INCLINED SECTION WITH A PROJECTION LENGTH C
FROM EXTERNAL FORCES LOCATED ON ONE SIDE FROM
THE CONSIDERED INCLINED SECTION; UNDER A
VERTICAL LOAD APPLIED TO THE TOP SIDE OF THE
ELEMENT VALUE Q IS TAKEN FOR THE PERPENDICULAR
SECTION, WHICH PASSES AT A DISTANCE C FROM THE
SUPPORT; THEREBY THE POSSIBILITY OF THE ABSENCE
OF TEMPORARY LOAD ON THE SUPPORT-ADJACENT
SECTION WITH A LENGTH C SHOULD BE CONSIDERED;
QB IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE APPLIED TO THE CONCRETE
IN INCLINED SECTION;
QSW IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE APPLIED TO THE STIRRUPS
IN INCLINED SECTION.
THE TRANSVERSE FORCE QB IS DETERMINED USING THE
FOLLOWING FORMULA
,
c
M
Q
b
b
= (3.45)
WHERE MB = 1.5 RBTBH
2
0. (3.46)
VALUE QB IS TAKEN AS NO MORE THAN 2.5 RBTBH0 AND
NO LESS THAN 0.5 RBTBH0.
VALUE IS DETERMINED ACCORDING TO PARA 3.32.
THE FORCE QSW IS DETERMINED USING THE FORMULA
QSW = 0.75QSWC0, (3.47)
WHERE QSW IS THE FORCE IN THE STIRRUPS PER UNIT OF
LENGTH OF THE ELEMENT, EQUAL TO

S
C
C
max
Q
Q
w S S
max
Q
sw
R
sw
A
q
F
Q=Q -qC-F
max
b
Q
o
Rsw
A
sw
A R
sw sw
0
h
h
'
b
A
sw
b'f
f
w w

DRAWING 3.9. DIAGRAM OF FORCES IN THE INCLINED SECTION OF
ELEMENTS WITH STIRRUPS FOR ITS CALCULATION WITH RESPECT
TO THE ACTION OF A TRANSVERSE FORCE

,
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q = (3.48)
C0 IS THE LENGTH OF THE PROJECTION OF THE OBLIQUE
CRACK TAKEN EQUAL TO C, BUT NO MORE THAN 2H0.
THE STIRRUPS ARE TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION, IF THE
FOLLOWING CONDITION IS MET
QSW 0.25RBTB. (3.49)
THIS CONDITION MAY BE DISREGARDED, IF SUCH A
REDUCED VALUE OF RBTB IS CONSIDERED IN FORMULA (3.46),
FOR WHICH CONDITION (3.49) IS TRANSFORMED INTO AN
EQUALITY, I.E., ASSUME MB = 6H
2
0
QSW.
PROJECTIO
N Q
3.32. DURING VERIFICATION IN THE GENERAL CASE THE
CONDITIONS (3.44) ARE PROVIDED BY A RANGE OF INCLINED
SECTIONS WITH DIFFERENT VALUES OF C THAT DO NOT
EXCEED THE DISTANCE FROM THE SUPPORT TO THE SECTION
WITH THE MAXIMUM FLECTION MOMENT AND NOT
EXCEEDING 3H0.
WHEN CONCENTRATED FORCES ARE APPLIED TO THE
ELEMENT VALUES OF C ARE TAKEN AS EQUAL TO THE
DISTANCES FROM THE SUPPORT TO APPLICATION POINTS OF
THESE FORCES (DRAWING 3.10) AND ALSO EQUAL TO
sw
b
q
M
c
75 , 0
= BUT NO LESS THAN H0, IF THIS VALUE IS LESS THAN
THE DISTANCE FROM THE SUPPORT TO THE 1
ST
LOAD.
WHEN CALCULATING AN ELEMENT FOR THE IMPACT OF
UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD Q THE LEAST FAVORABLE
VALUE OF C IS TAKEN EQUAL TO
1
q
M
b
, AND

C
C
1
Q
=
Q

-

F
Q
2
F F
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
Q

DRAWING 3.10. ARRANGEMENT
OF CALCULATED INCLINED
SECTIONS FOR CONCENTRATED
FORCES
1 INCLINED SECTION CHECKED
FOR THE IMPACT OF TRANSVERSE
FORCE Q1; 2 THE SAME, FORCE
Q2
IF THEREBY
2 or
5 . 0 1
2
0
1
>
<
b R
q
b R
q
h
q
M
bt
sw
bt
sw
b
,
1
75 . 0 q q
M
c
sw
b
+
=
SHOULD BE
TAKEN, WHERE THE Q1 VALUE IS DETERMINED AS FOLLOWS:
A) IF A CONTINUOUS UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD Q,
Q1 = Q IS APPLIED;
PROJECTIO
N Q
B) IF THE LOAD Q INCLUDES A TEMPORARY LOAD, WHICH
IS BROUGHT TO A UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD QV WITH
AN EQUIVALENT MOMENT (I.E. WHEN MOMENT PROJECTION M
OF THE LOAD QV TAKEN FOR THE CALCULATION ALWAYS
GOES AROUND THE M PROJECTION FROM ANY ACTUAL
TEMPORARY LOAD) Q1 = Q 0.5 QV.
THEREBY IN CONDITION (3.44) VALUE Q IS TAKEN AS
EQUAL TO QMAX - Q1C, WHERE QMAX IS THE TRANSVERSE
FORCE IN THE BEARING SECTION.
3.33. THE REQUIRED INTENSITY OF STIRRUPS, EXPRESSED
AS QSW (SEE PARA 3.31), IS DETERMINED AS FOLLOWS:
A) WHEN THE ELEMENT IS EXPOSED TO CONCENTRATED
FORCES, LOCATED AT THE DISTANCE OF CI FROM THE
SUPPORT, FOR EACH I
TH
INCLINED SECTION WITH A LENGTH OF
PROJECTION CI NOT EXCEEDING THE DISTANCE TO THE
SECTION WITH THE MAXIMUM FLECTION MOMENT, VALUE
QSW(I) IS DETERMINED AS FOLLOWS DEPENDING ON THE
COEFFICIENT = CI/H0, TAKEN AS NOT EXCEEDING 3:
IF
; 25 . 0 , 1875 . 0
5 . 1
) ( 0
0 i
i
bt i sw i
i
i
bt
i
i
b R q
bh R
Q
= + = =
(3.50)
IF I > I,
i
i i
bt i sw
b R q
0
) (
75 . 0
/ 5 . 1

=
(3.51)
WHERE 0I IS THE SMALLEST OF VALUES I AND 2;
QI IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE IN THE I
TH
PERPENDICULAR
SECTION, SITUATED AT A DISTANCE CI FROM THE SUPPORT;
FINALLY THE LARGEST VALUE OF QSW IS TAKEN;
B) WHEN THE ELEMENT IS EXPOSED ONLY TO A
UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD Q THE REQUIRED INTENSITY
OF THE STIRRUPS QSW IS DETERMINED AS FOLLOWS,
DEPENDING ON
1 1
2 q M Q
b b
= :
IF
max 0 1
/ 2 Q h M Q
b b
,

b
b
sw
M
Q Q
q
3
2
1
2
max

= ; (3.52)
IF QB1<2MB/H0 QMAX,

0
1 max
5 , 1 h
Q Q
q
b
sw

= ; (3.53)
THEREBY, IF QB1 < RBTBH0,
0
1 0 0 max
5 , 1
3 5 , 0
h
q h bh R Q
q
bt
sw

= , (3.54)
WHERE MB SEE PARA 3.31; Q1 SEE PARA 3.32.
IF THE OBTAINED VALUE OF QSW DOES NOT SATISFY
CONDITION (3.49), IT SHOULD BE CALCULATED ACCORDING TO
THE FORMULA

2
0
max
2
1 0 max 1 0 max
5 . 1 5 . 1
8 /
5 . 1
8 /
+
=
h
Q q h Q q h Q
q
sw (3.55)
AND TAKEN NO LESS THAN
5 . 3
3 /
1 0 max
q h Q
.
3.34. WITH THE INTENSITY OF THE STIRRUPS DECREASING
FROM THE SUPPORT TO THE SPAN FROM QSW1 TO QSW2 (FOR
EXAMPLE, DUE TO AN INCREASED SPACING OF THE STIRRUPS)
CONDITION (3.44) SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH VALUES OF C
EXCEEDING L1, THE LENGTH OF THE SECTION WITH STIRRUPS
INTENSITY QSW1 (DRAWING 3.11). THEREBY VALUE QSW IS
TAKEN AS EQUAL TO:
IF C < 2H0 + L1, QSW = 0.75QSW1C0 (QSW1 QSW2) (C
L1); (3.56)
IF C > 2H0 + L1, QSW = 1.5QSW2H0,
(3.57)
C0 SEE PARA 3.31.
WHEN THE ELEMENT IS EXPOSED TO A UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED LOAD, THE LENGTH OF SECTION WITH STIRRUPS
INTENSITY QSW1 IS TAKEN NO LESS THAN VALUE L1,
DETERMINED DEPENDING ON QSW = 0.75 (QSW1 QSW2) AS
FOLLOWS:
- IF QSW < Q1,

sw
sw b
q
c q Q c q c M
c l
+ +
=
1 max 0 1
1
75 , 0 /
, (3.58)

sw1 sw1 s w2 s w2
F
l1
C0
C

DRAWING 3.11. FOR CALCULATION OF INCLINED SECTIONS AFTER A
CHANGE OF STIRRUPS INTENSITY

WHERE
sw
b
q q
M
c

=
1
, BUT NO MORE THAN 3H0,
WHEREBY, IF
2 1
0
1
75 . 0
,
5 . 0 1
2
sw
l
bt
sw
sw
l
q q
M
c
b R
q
h
q q
M
+
=
<

;
- IF QSW Q1,

0
1
0 2 min . max
1
2
) 5 . 1 (
h
q
h q Q Q
l
sw b
+
=
; (3.59)
HERE MB, C0 SEE PARA 3.31; Q1 SEE PARA 3.32;
QB,MIN = 0.5 RBTBH0.
IF CONDITION (3.49) IS NOT SATISFIED FOR VALUE QSW2,
THE LENGTH L1 IS CALCULATED WITH VALUES MB = 6H0
2
QSW2
AND QB,MIN = 2H0QSW2 CORRECTED ACCORDING TO PARA 3.31;
THEREBY THE TOTAL (QB,MIN + 1.5QSWH0) IN FORMULA (3.59)
IS TAKEN NO LESS THAN THE UNCORRECTED VALUE OF
QB,MIN.
3.35. THE SPACING OF STIRRUPS CONSIDERED IN THE
CALCULATION SHALL NOT EXCEED VALUE:

Q
bh R
s
bt
w
2
0
max .
= (3.60)
FURTHERMORE, THE STIRRUPS SHALL SATISFY THE
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS STIPULATED IN PARAS 5.20 AND 5.21.

ELEMENTS WITH VARIABLE HEIGHT AND CROSSWISE
REINFORCEMENT

3.36. THE ELEMENTS WITH INCLINED COMPRESSED OR
TENSIONED FACES IN THE SECTIONS NEXT TO THE SUPPORT
ARE CALCULATED ACCORDING TO PARA 3.31, TAKING THE
LARGEST VALUE OF H0 WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE
CONSIDERED INCLINED SECTION AS THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF
SECTION (DRAWING 3.12).

a)
C
h
0
1
h
0
1
q
0
1
h
h
0
q
b)

DRAWING 3.12 BEAMS WITH VARIABLE DEPTH OF SECTION AND AN
OBLIQUE FACE

3.37. FOR BEAMS WITHOUT OFFSET BENDS WITH A
HEIGHT INCREASING EVENLY FROM THE SUPPORT TO THE
SPAN CALCULATED FOR THE IMPACT OF A UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED LOAD Q, THE INCLINED SECTION IS VERIFIED
USING CONDITION (3.44) WITH THE LEAST FAVORABLE VALUE
OF C, EQUAL TO

2
1
01
tg 5 , 1 ) /(
5 . 1
+
=
b R q
h c
bt
, (3.61)
WHEREBY, IF THIS VALUE IS LESS THAN
b R
q
h c
bt
sw
5 . 0 ) tg 2 1 (
tg 2 1
2
2
01

=

OR, IF QSW/(RBTB) > 2(1-2TG)
2
, THEN LEAST FAVORABLE
VALUE OF C IS EQUAL TO

.
tg 5 , 1 ) /( ) 75 , 0 (
5 . 1
2
1
01
+ +
=
b R q q
h c
bt sw
(3.62)
THE TAKEN VALUE OF C SHALL NOT EXCEED 3H01/(1-
3TG), OR THE LENGTH OF THE BEAM SECTION WITH A
CONSTANT VALUE .
HERE: H01 IS THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF THE BEARING
BEAM SECTION;
Q1 - SEE PARA 3.32;
IS THE ANGLE BETWEEN THE COMPRESSED AND
TENSIONED BEAM FACES.
THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH IS TAKEN EQUAL TO H0 = H01+ C
TG .
WHEN STIRRUPS INTENSITY DECREASES FROM QSW1 AT
THE SUPPORT TO QSW2 AT THE SPAN, CONDITION (3.44)
SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH VALUES OF C EXCEEDING L1, THE
LENGTH OF ELEMENT SECTION WITH STIRRUPS INTENSITY
QSW1; THEREBY VALUE QSW IS DETERMINED USING FORMULA
(3.56) OR FORMULA (3.57) PARA 3.34 DEPENDING ON THE
FULFILLMENT OR NON FULFILLMENT OF CONDITION
tg 2 1
2
1 01
+
<
l h
c .
WHEN THE BEAM IS EXPOSED TO CONCENTRATED
FORCES, VALUE C IS TAKEN AS EQUAL TO THE DISTANCE
FROM THE SUPPORT TO THE APPLICATION POINTS OF THESE
FORCES AND ALSO DETERMINED USING FORMULA (3.62) WITH
Q1 = 0, IF THIS VALUE OF C IS LESS THAN THE DISTANCE FROM
THE SUPPORT TO THE 1
ST
LOAD.
3.38. FOR CANTILEVERS WITHOUT OFFSET BENDS WITH
HEIGHT EVENLY INCREASING FROM THE FREE END TO THE
SUPPORT (DRAWING 3.13) IN GENERAL CONDITION (3.44) IS
CHECKED ASSIGNING INCLINED SECTIONS WITH VALUES OF C
DETERMINED USING FORMULA (3.62), WITH Q1 = 0 AND TAKEN
AS NOT EXCEEDING THE DISTANCE FROM THE BEGINNING OF
THE INCLINED SECTION IN THE TENSION AREA TO THE
SUPPORT. THEREBY H01 AND Q ARE TAKEN TO MEAN THE
EFFECTIVE DEPTH AND THE TRANSVERSE FORCE AT THE
BEGINNING OF THE INCLINED SECTION IN THE TENSION AREA
RESPECTIVELY. FURTHERMORE, IF C > 2H01/(1-2TG), THE
INCLINED SECTIONS LEADING TO THE SUPPORT ARE CHECKED.
Q
Q
h
0
h
0
1
F F F
c

DRAWING 3.13. CANTILEVER WITH HEIGHT DECREASING FROM THE
SUPPORT TO THE FREE END

WHEN THE CANTILEVER IS EXPOSED TO CONCENTRATED
FORCES THE BEGINNING OF THE INCLINED SECTION IS
LOCATED IN THE TENSION AREA OF NORMAL SECTIONS
PASSING THROUGH THE APPLICATION POINTS OF THESE
FORCES (SEE DRAWING 3.13).
UNDER THE IMPACT OF A UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD
OR A LOAD LINEARLY INCREASING TOWARDS THE SUPPORT
THE CANTILEVER IS CALCULATED AS A CONSTANT DEPTH OF
SECTION ELEMENT ACCORDING TO PARAS 3.31 AND 3.32,
ASSUMING THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH H0 AT THE BEARING
SECTION.

ELEMENTS REINFORCED WITH OFFSET BENDS

3.39. THE DURABILITY OF AN INCLINED SECTION TO THE
IMPACT OF A TRANSVERSE FORCE FOR AN ELEMENT WITH
OFFSET BENDS IS CHECKED USING CONDITION (3.44) WITH THE
ADDITION OF FOLLOWING VALUE TO ITS RIGHT PART:
QS,INC=0.75RSWAS,INCSIN, (3.63)
WHERE AS,INC IS THE SECTIONAL AREA OF THE OFFSET BENDS
INTERSECTING THE OBLIQUE CRACK SITUATED AT
THE END OF THE INCLINED SECTION WITH
PROJECTION
Q
PROJECTION LENGTH EQUAL TO C, BUT NO MORE
THAN 2H0 (DRAWING 3.14);
IS THE ANGLE OF OFFSET BENDS SLOPE TO THE
LONGITUDINAL ELEMENT AXIS.

F
A
s,inc
2h0
C

DRAWING 3.14. FOR THE DETERMINATION OF THE MOST DANGEROUS
OBLIQUE CRACK FOR ELEMENTS WITH OFFSET BENDS DURING THE
CALCULATION OF THE IMPACT OF A TRANSVERSE FORCE

VALUES OF C ARE TAKEN EQUAL TO DISTANCES FROM
THE SUPPORT TO THE ENDS OF OFFSET BENDS AND TO THE
APPLICATION POINTS OF CONCENTRATED FORCES;
FURTHERMORE, INCLINED SECTIONS ENDING AT A DISTANCE
OF 2H0 FROM THE START OF THE NEXT-TO-LAST AND LAST
OFFSET BENDS PLANE SHOULD BE CHECKED (DRAWING 3.15).
3.40. THE DISTANCES BETWEEN THE SUPPORT AND THE
END OF THE OFFSET BEND NEAREST TO SUPPORT S1, AS WELL
AS BETWEEN THE END OF PREVIOUS AND THE BEGINNING OF
THE NEXT OFFSET BEND S2 (DRAWING 3.16) SHALL NOT
EXCEED RBTBH
2
0
/Q.
C
C
C
C
s,inc1
Q
max
1
1
A
3
2
4
0 2h
2h0
2
3
4
A
s,inc2
A
s,inc3

DRAWING 3.15. FOR DETERMINATION OF INCLINED SECTIONS IN AN
ELEMENT WITH OFFSET BENDS
1- 4 ARE THE CALCULATED INCLINED SECTIONS

S
S
S
1 2

DRAWING 3.16. DISTANCES BETWEEN STIRRUPS, SUPPORT AND
OFFSET BENDS

FURTHERMORE, THE OFFSET BENDS SHALL SATISFY THE
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS STIPULATED IN PARA 5.22.

ELEMENTS WITHOUT CROSSWISE REINFORCEMENT

3.41. THE CALCULATION OF ELEMENTS WITHOUT
CROSSWISE REINFORCEMENT FOR THE IMPACT OF A
TRANSVERSE FORCE IS BASED ON THE CONDITIONS
A) QMAX < 2.5RBTBH0; (3.64)
WHERE QMAX IS THE MAXIMUM TRANSVERSE FORCE AT
THE SUPPORT FACE;
B)
c
bh R
Q
bt
2
0
5 . 1
, (3.65)
WHERE Q IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE AT THE END OF THE
INCLINED SECTION STARTING AT THE SUPPORT; VALUE
C IS TAKEN AT NO MORE THAN CMAX = 3 H0.
FOR CONTINUOUS FLAT SLABS WITH THE RESTRICTED
EDGES (CONNECTED WITH OTHER ELEMENTS OR WITH
SUPPORTS) AND A WIDTH OF B> 5H IT IS ALLOWED TO TAKE
CMAX = 2.4H0.
UNDER THE IMPACT OF CONCENTRATED FORCES ON THE
ELEMENT VALUES OF C ARE TAKEN EQUAL TO THE DISTANCES
FORCES (DRAWING 3.17), BUT NO MORE THAN CMAX.
WHEN CALCULATING THE ELEMENT FOR THE IMPACT OF
DISTRIBUTED LOADS, IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITION IS
SATISFIED

6
1
b R
q
bt
, (3.66)
CONDITION (3.65) TAKES THE FORM
QMAX< 0.5RBTBH0 + 3H0Q1 (3.67)
(WHICH CORRESPONDS TO C = 3H0),
Q
C
1
1 C
F
Q
=
Q

-

F
1
1
Q
2
1
F
2
2
1 2

DRAWING 3.17. SCHEMATIC
REPRESENTATION OF THE
LEAST FAVORABLE INCLINED
SECTIONS IN ELEMENTS
WITHOUT CROSSWISE
REINFORCEMENT
1- INCLINED SECTION CHECKED
FOR THE IMPACT OF A
TRANSVERSE FORCE Q1; 2 - SAME,
FORCE Q2

PROJECTION
Q
Benefit to CP 52-101-2003 concrete and ferroconcrete constructions without the preliminary stress of
the reinforcement

AND WHEN CONDITION (3.66) IS NOT FULFILLED -
1
2
0 max
6 q bh R Q
bt

(WHICH CORRESPONDS TO
1
0
5 . 1
q
b R
h c
bt
= ).
FOR THE AFOREMENTIONED FLAT SLABS WITH
RESTRICTED SIDE EDGES THE RIGHT SIDE OF CONDITION (3.66)
IS DIVIDED BY 0.64, AND CONDITION (3.67) TAKES THE FORM
QMAX 0.625RBTBH0 + 2.4H0Q1. (3.67A)
HERE Q1 IS TAKEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARA 3.32 WHEN
UNDER THE IMPACT OF A UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD,
AND UNDER THE IMPACT OF A CONTINUOUS LOAD WITH
LINEARLY CHANGING INTENSITY IT IS TAKEN EQUAL TO THE
AVERAGE INTENSITY IN THE SECTION NEXT TO THE SUPPORT
WITH A LENGTH EQUAL TO A FOURTH OF THE BEAM (SLAB)
SPAN OR HALF OF THE CANTILEVER PROTRUSION, BUT NO
MORE THAN CMAX.
3.42. FOR ELEMENTS WITH VARIABLE DEPTH OF SECTION
WHEN CHECKING CONDITION (3.64) VALUE H0 IS TAKEN FOR
THE BEARING SECTION, AND WHEN CHECKING CONDITION
(3.65) IT IS TAKEN AS THE AVERAGE VALUE OF H0 WITHIN THE
LIMITS OF THE INCLINED SECTION.
FOR ELEMENTS WITH DEPTH OF SECTION THAT
INCREASES WITH AN INCREASE IN THE TRANSVERSE FORCE
VALUE CMAX IS TAKEN EQUAL TO
tg 5 , 1 1
3
01
max
+
=
h
c , WHILE FOR
FLAT SLABS, MENTIONED IN PARA 3.41,
tg 2 , 1 1
4 . 2
01
max
+
=
h
c
,
WHERE H01 IS THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH AT THE BEARING
SECTION;
IS THE ANGLE BETWEEN THE TENSIONED AND
COMPRESSED FACES.
WHEN SUCH AN ELEMENT IS EXPOSED TO A DISTRIBUTED
LOAD, VALUE C IN CONDITION (3.65) IS TAKEN EQUAL TO

,
) 5 . 1 /( 4 / tg
1
2
01
b R q
h
c
bt
+
=
(3.68)
BUT NO MORE THAN CMAX, WHERE Q1 SEE PARA 3.32.

the reinforcement

ACCORDING FOR THE IMPACT OF MOMENTS ALONG INCLINED
SECTIONS

3.43. THE CALCULATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
ELEMENTS FOR THE IMPACT OF MOMENT ALONG INCLINED
SECTIONS (DRAWING 3.18) IS CARRIED OUT BASED ON THE
CONDITION
M MS + MSW, (3.69)
WHERE M IS THE MOMENT AT THE INCLINED SECTION WITH
PROJECTION LENGTH C ONTO THE LONGITUDINAL
AXIS OF THE ELEMENT DETERMINED FOR ALL THE
EXTERNAL FORCES LOCATED TO ONE SIDE FROM
THE CONSIDERED INCLINED SECTION WITH RESPECT
TO THE END OF THE INCLINED SECTION (POINT 0),
OPPOSITE TO THE END WHERE THE CHECKED
LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT IS LOCATED THAT
EXPERIENCES TENSION FROM THE MOMENT AT THE
INCLINED SECTION (DRAWING 3.19)

sw
Q
sw
o
C
l
S S
Z
h
x
w w
sw
sw
s
b
sw
sw
s
R A
R A
R A
N
R A
s s

DRAWING 3.18. DIAGRAM OF FORCES AT THE INCLINED SECTION FOR
ITS FLECTION MOMENT CALCULATION

the reinforcement

C
y
M=Qy- -Fa
M
Q
N
s
a)
q
i
F
i
a
M=ql (C+ ) +FC
i
qy
2
i
2
M
l
1
2
i
C
N
b
N
b
)
q
s
N
1
F
i
0
0
1
l

DRAWING 3.19. DETERMINATION OF THE CALCULATED VALUE OF
MOMENT WHEN CALCULATING AN INCLINED SECTION
A - FOR A FREE BEAM;
B - FOR A CANTILEVER

MS IS THE MOMENT EXPERIENCED BY THE LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT INTERSECTING THE INCLINED SECTION
WITH RESPECT TO THE OPPOSITE END OF THE INCLINED
SECTION;
MSW IS THE MOMENT EXPERIENCED BY THE CROSSWISE
REINFORCEMENT INTERSECTING THE INCLINED SECTION
WITH RESPECT TO THE OPPOSITE END OF THE INCLINED
SECTION (POINT 0).
MOMENT MS IS DETERMINED USING THE FORMULA
MS = NSZS, (3.70)
WHERE NS IS THE FORCE IN THE TENSIONED LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT TAKEN EQUAL TO RSAS, AND
DETERMINED ACCORDING TO PARA 3.45 IN THE
ANCHORING ZONE;
PROJECTION
M
PROJECTION
M
the reinforcement

ZS IS THE ARM OF THE INTERNAL COUPLE, DETERMINED
USING THE FORMULA
b R
N
h z
b
s
s
2
0
= (WHERE B IS THE WIDTH OF THE COMPRESSED
FACE);
WHICH IS TAKEN AT NO LESS THAN H0 A FOR
COMPRESSED REINFORCEMENT; IT IS ALSO PERMITTED TO
TAKE ZS = 0.9H0.
MOMENT MSW FOR TRANSVERSE FITTINGS IN THE FORM
OF STIRRUPS, PERPENDICULAR TO THE LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF
THE ELEMENT, IS DETERMINED USING THE FORMULA
MSW = 0.5QSW C2, (3.71)
WHERE QSW IS DETERMINED USING FORMULA (3.48) PARA 3.31,
AND C IS TAKEN NOT GREATER THAN 2H0.
IF THE STIRRUPS CHANGE THEIR INTENSITY OVER THE
LENGTH C FROM QSW1 AT THE BEGINNING OF THE INCLINED
SECTION TO QSW2, MOMENT MSW IS DETERMINED USING THE
FORMULA:
MSW = 0.5QSW1C
2
0.5(QSW1 QSW2) (C L1)
2
(3.72)
WHERE L1 IS THE LENGTH OF THE SECTION WITH STIRRUPS
INTENSITY QSW1.
VALUE C IS DETERMINED ACCORDING TO PARA 3.46.
3.44. THE MOMENT IMPACT CALCULATION IS CARRIED
OUT FOR INCLINED SECTIONS LOCATED AT LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT BREAK POINTS AND AT THE FACE OF THE
OUTER FREE BEAM SUPPORT AND AT THE FREE END OF
CANTILEVERS IN THE ABSENCE OF SPECIAL ANCHORS FOR
LONGITUDINAL FITTINGS.
FURTHERMORE, INCLINED SECTIONS AT POINTS OF
ABRUPT ELEMENT HEIGHT CHANGE (FOR EXAMPLE, AT CUT-
OFFS) ARE CALCULATED.
3.45. WHEN AN INCLINED SECTION WITH LONGITUDINAL
TENSIONED REINFORCEMENT THAT DOES NOT HAVE ANCHORS
WITHIN THE LIMITS OF THE ANCHORING ZONE IS
INTERSECTED, THE FORCE NS IS DETERMINED USING THE
FORMULA:

a
s
s s s
l
l
A R N = , (3.73)
the reinforcement

WHERE LS IS THE DISTANCE FROM THE END OF
REINFORCEMENT TO ITS POINT OF INTERSECTION
WITH THE INCLINED SECTION;
LAN IS THE LENGTH OF THE ANCHORING ZONE EQUAL TO
LAN = ANDS,
WHERE
bond
s
an
R
R
4
= (3.74)
RBOND IS THE CALCULATED COHESION RESISTANCE OF
THE REINFORCEMENT WITH THE CONCRETE, EQUAL TO
RBOND = 12RBT,
1 IS THE COEFFICIENT THAT CONSIDERS THE IMPACT OF
THE REINFORCEMENT SURFACE TYPE AND IS TAKEN
EQUAL TO:
2.5 FOR A300, A400, A500 REINFORCEMENT CLASSES;
2.0 - FOR V500 REINFORCEMENT CLASS;
1.5 - FOR A240 REINFORCEMENT CLASS;
2 IS THE COEFFICIENT THAT CONSIDERS THE IMPACT OF
THE REINFORCEMENT DIAMETER AND IS TAKEN EQUAL TO:
1.0 FOR A DIAMETER DS 32 MM,
0.9 FOR DIAMETERS 36 AND 40 MM;
IS THE COEFFICIENT THAT CONSIDERS THE IMPACT OF
THE TRANSVERSE CONCRETE REDUCTION AND CROSSWISE
REINFORCEMENT AND IS TAKEN EQUAL TO:
A) FOR THE FREE OUTER SUPPORTS,
IF 0.25 B/RB 0.75 - 0.75;
IF B/RB < 0.25 OR B/RB > 0.75 - 1.0,
HERE B = FSUP/ASUP;
FSUP, ASUP ARE THE BEARING PRESSURE AND THE AREA
OF BEAM SUPPORT;
THEREBY, IF THERE IS A TRANSVERSE A REINFORCEMENT
ENCOMPASSING THE LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT
WITHOUT WELDING, THE COEFFICIENT IS DIVIDED BY VALUE
as
A
sw
6
1+ (WHERE ASW AND S ARE THE SECTIONAL AREA OF THE
ENVELOPING STIRRUP AND ITS SPACING) AND IS TAKEN AT NO
LESS THAN 0.7;
B) FOR THE FREE CANTILEVER ENDS 1.0.
the reinforcement

IN ANY CASE THE AN COEFFICIENT IS TAKEN AT NO LESS
THAN 15 AND THE LENGTH OF THE ANCHORING ZONE LAN IS
TAKEN AT NO LESS THAN 200 MM.
FOR RODS WITH A DIAMETER LESS THAN 36 MM THE AN
VALUE MAY BE TAKEN ACCORDING TO TABLE 3.3.
WHEN TRANSVERSE OR DISTRIBUTIVE REINFORCEMENT IS
WELDED TO LONGITUDINAL TENSIONED RODS THE FORCE NS IS
INCREASES BY VALUE
NW = 0.7 NWW
2
w
d RBT, (3.75)
TAKEN AT NO MORE THAN 0.8 RS
2
w
d NW.
HERE:
NW IS THE NUMBER OF WELDED-ON RODS FOR THE
LENGTH LS;
W IS THE COEFFICIENT TAKEN FROM TABLE 3.4;
DW IS THE DIAMETER OF THE WELDED RODS.
THEREBY VALUE NS IS TAKEN AT NO MORE THAN THE
VALUE CALCULATED USING FORMULA (3.73) WITH THE USE OF
THE = 0.7 COEFFICIENT FOR THE DETERMINATION OF LAN.
WHEN SPECIAL ANCHORS IN THE FORM OF PLATES,
WASHERS, NUTS, CORNERS, CLOSING HEADS, ETC, ARE SET UP
AT THE ENDS OF RODS MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF PARA
5.35 AND WHEN THE ENDS OF RODS ARE WELDED TO RELIABLY
ANCHORED INSET COMPONENTS, THE FORCE NS IS TAKEN
EQUAL TO RSAS.
3.46. FOR FREE BEAMS THE LEAST FAVORABLE INCLINED
SECTION BEGINS FROM THE SUPPORT FACE AND A PROJECTION
C TAKEN AT NO MORE THAN 2H0 AND DETERMINED AS
FOLLOWS:

the reinforcement

TABLE 3.3
REIN-
FORCEM
-ENT
CLASS

COEF-
FICIE
NT
RELATIVE LENGTH OF REINFORCEMENT ANCHORING AN =
LAN/DS FOR CONCRETE CLASSES
V10 V15 V20 V25 V30 V35 V40 V45 V50 V55 V60
A240 0.7 45 33 28 24 22 19 18 17 16 15 15
0.75 48 36 36 26 23 21 19 18 17 16 15
1.0 64 48 40 34 31 28 26 24 22 21 20
A300 0.7 34 25 21 18 16 15 15 15 15 15 15
0.75 36 27 23 19 18 16 15 15 15 15 15
1.0 48 36 30 26 23 21 19 18 17 16 15
A400 0.7 44 33 28 24 22 19 18 17 16 15 15
0.75 48 36 30 25 23 20 19 18 17 16 15
1.0 63 47 39 34 31 27 25 24 22 21 20
A500 0.7 54 41 34 29 26 23 22 20 19 18 17
0.75 58 44 36 31 28 25 23 22 20 19 18
1.0 78 58 48 41 38 33 31 29 27 26 24
V500 0.7 65 48 40 35 32 28 26 24 23 21 20
0.75 69 52 43 37 34 30 28 26 24 23 22
1.0 93 69 58 49 45 40 37 35 32 31 29
NOTE. WHEN CALCULATING TAKING INTO ACCOUNT ONLY CONSTANT AND
LONG-TERM LOADS, VALUES OF AN SHOULD BE DIVIDED BY
B1 = 0.9.

TABLE 3.4.
DW 6 8 10 12 14
W
200 150 120 100 80

A) IF THE ELEMENT IS EXPOSED TO CONCENTRATED
FORCES, VALUES OF C ARE TAKEN EQUAL TO THE DISTANCES
FORCES AND EQUAL TO QMAX/QSW, IF THIS VALUE IS LESS
THAN THE DISTANCE TO THE 1
ST
LOAD;
B) IF THE ELEMENT IS EXPOSED TO A UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED LOAD Q, VALUE C IS DETERMINED USING THE
FORMULA:

q q
Q
c
sw
+
=
max
, (3.76)
HERE QSW IS - SEE FORMULA (3.48).
the reinforcement

IF OVER THE LENGTH THE STIRRUPS CHANGE THEIR
INTENSITY FROM QSW1 AT THE BEGINNING OF THE INCLINED
SECTION TO QSW2, VALUE C IS DETERMINED USING FORMULA
(3.76) WITH A DECREASE OF THE NUMERATOR BY QSWL1 AND
OF THE DENOMINATOR BY QSW, (WHERE L1 IS THE LENGTH OF
THE SECTION WITH INTENSITY QSW1, QSW1=QSW1 - QSW2).
FOR BEAMS WITH AN INCLINED COMPRESSED FACE
UNDER THE IMPACT OF A UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD THE
INCLINED SECTIONS WITH C VALUES EQUAL TO

2
0 max max
tg 4
tg 4 tg
,
tg
sw
sw s
sw
s
q q
h q N Q
c
q q
N Q
c
+

=
+
= , (3.77)
ARE CHECKED, WHERE H0 IS THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH AT
THE BEARING SECTION;
IS THE ANGLE OF SLOPE OF THE COMPRESSED FACE
TO THE HORIZONTAL.
WHEN THE TENSIONED FACE IS SLOPED AT AN ANGLE
TOWARD THE HORIZONTAL, VALUE TG IN THESE FORMULAS
IS REPLACED BY SIN.
FOR CANTILEVERS LOADED BY CONCENTRATED FORCES
(DRAWING 3.19, B) THOSE INCLINED SECTIONS ARE CHECKED
THAT START AT THE APPLICATION POINTS OF CONCENTRATED
FORCES NEAR THE FREE END WITH VALUES OF
sw
q
Q
c
1
= , (WHERE
Q1 IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE AT THE START OF THE
INCLINED SECTION), BUT NO MORE THAN L1, THE DISTANCE
FROM THE START OF THE INCLINED SECTION TO THE SUPPORT.
THEREBY, IF
0
1
2h
q
Q
sw
> , C = L1 SHOULD BE TAKEN. IF THESE
CANTILEVERS HAVE AN INCLINED COMPRESSED FACE, VALUE
Q1/QSW IS REPLACED BY (Q1- NSTG)/QSW.
FOR CANTILEVERS LOADED ONLY WITH A UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED LOAD Q, THE LEAST FAVORABLE SECTION ENDS
AT THE BEARING SECTION AND HAS A PROJECTION LENGTH

) ( q q l
z A R
c
sw a
s s s
+
= , (3.78)
BUT NO MORE THAN 2H0.
the reinforcement

IF C < LLAN, IT IS POSSIBLE NOT TO CALCULATE THE
INCLINED SECTION.
HERE: AS IS THE SECTIONAL AREA OF REINFORCEMENT
BROUGHT TO THE FREE END; ZS IS SEE PARA 3.43; LAN IS SEE
PARA 3.45.
IN THE ABSENCE OF CROSSWISE REINFORCEMENT VALUE
C IS TAKEN EQUAL TO 2H0, WHERE H0 IS THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH
AT THE END OF THE INCLINED SECTION.
3.47. IN ORDER TO ENSURE THE DURABILITY OF INCLINED
SECTIONS FOR THE IMPACT OF MOMENT IN CONSTANT HEIGHT
ELEMENTS WITH STIRRUPS, THE LONGITUDINAL TENSIONED
RODS BROKEN WITHIN THE SPAN SHALL BE BROUGHT BEYOND
THE THEORETICAL BREAK-OFF POINT (I.E. PAST THE NORMAL
SECTION WHERE THE EXTERNAL MOMENT BECOMES EQUAL
TO THE LIMIT MOMENT MULT WITHOUT TAKING INTO
ACCOUNT THE BROKEN OFF REINFORCEMENT, DRAWING 3.20)
FOR A LENGTH NO LESS THAN VALUE W DETERMINED USING
THE FORMULA
2
M
w
1
u
l
t

DRAWING 3.20. TENSIONED RODS BREAKING-OFF WITHIN THE SPAN
1 - THEORETICAL BREAK-OFF POINT; 2 - PROJECTION M

s
sw
d
q
Q
w 5
2
+ = ; (3.79)
the reinforcement

WHEREBY, IF
s
sw
sw
d
Q
h q
h w h
q
Q
5 1 2 ,
2
0
0
0
+
= > , (3.80)
WHERE Q IS THE TRANSVERSE FORCE IN THE PERPENDICULAR
SECTION PASSING THROUGH THE THEORETICAL
BREAK-OFF POINT;
QSW IS SEE PARA 3.31;
DS IS THE DIAMETER OF THE BROKEN-OFF ROD.
FOR A BEAM WITH AN INCLINED COMPRESSED FACE WITH
TG 0.2 VALUE W IS TAKEN EQUAL TO
W = H0 + 5DS, (3.81)
THEREBY, IF >1, W = H0(2.2 1.2/) + 5DS, (3.82)
WHERE ,
2
tg
0
h q
N Q
sw
s

=
IS THE ANGLE OF THE FACE SLOPE TO THE
HORIZONTAL.
FOR A BEAM WITH AN OBLIQUE TENSIONED FACE W IS
DETERMINED SIMILARLY WITH THE REPLACEMENT OF TG BY
SIN.
FOR ELEMENTS WITHOUT CROSSWISE REINFORCEMENT
VALUE W IS TAKEN EQUAL TO 2H0.
FURTHERMORE, THE REQUIREMENTS OF PARAS 5.32 AND
5.33 SHALL BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT.
3.48. IN ORDER TO ENSURE THE DURABILITY OF INCLINED
SECTIONS TO THE IMPACT OF MOMENT THE BEGINNING OF THE
OFFSET BEND IN THE TENSION AREA SHALL BE AT LEAST 0.5H0
DISTANT FROM THE PERPENDICULAR SECTION, WHERE THE
UNBENT ROD IS FULLY USED WITH THE MOMENT, AND THE
END OF THE OFFSET BEND SHALL BE LOCATED NOT CLOSER
THAN THE PERPENDICULAR SECTION WHERE A OFFSET BEND
IS NOT REQUIRED ACCORDING TO THE CALCULATION
(DRAWING 3.21).
the reinforcement

S
M
X 0,5h
0
Z
<
s
,
i
n
c
Z

Z
s
Z

s
,
i
n
c
Z
s
a
h
0
N
b
s
R A
s
M

DRAWING 3.21. FOR THE DETERMINATION OF
THE POSITION OF THE LONGITUDINAL
TENSIONED REINFORCEMENT OFFSET BEND
PROJECTION
M

EXAMPLES OF CALCULATION

C A L C U L A T I O N O F I N C L I N E D
S E C T I O N S O F R E I N F O R C E D C O N C R E T E
E L E M E N T S F O R T H E I M P A C T O F
T R A N S V E R S E F O R C E S

EXAMPLE 12. GIVEN: THE EDGE OF A TT-SHAPED
OVERLAP SLAB WITH SECTION DIMENSIONS: H = 350 MM, B = 85
MM; A = 35 MM; V15 CLASS CONCRETE (RB = 8.5 MPA, RBT = 0.75
MPA); THE EDGE IS REINFORCED BY A FLAT FRAME WITH
TRANSVERSE RODS FROM CLASS A400 REINFORCEMENT (RSW =
285 MPA) WITH A DIAMETER OF 8 MM (ASW = 50.3 MM
2
) WITH A
SPACING SW = 100 MM; FULLY UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD
ACTING ON THE EDGE, Q = 21.9 KN/M; TEMPORARY
EQUIVALENT LOAD QV = 18 KN/M; TRANSVERSE FORCE AT THE
SUPPORT QMAX = 62 KN.
IT IS REQUIRED TO CHECK THE DURABILITY OF INCLINED
SECTIONS AND THE CONCRETE STRIP BETWEEN THEM.
C A L C U L A T I O N . H0 = H A = 350 35 = 315 MM.
LET US CHECK THE DURABILITY OF THE CONCRETE STRIP
USING CONDITION (3.43):
0.3RBBH0 = 0.3
.
8.5
.
85
.
315 = 68276 N > QMAX = 62 KN,
I.E. STRIP DURABILITY IS ENSURED.
LET US CHECK THE DURABILITY OF THE INCLINED
SECTION TO THE TRANSVERSE FORCE ACCORDING TO PARA
3.31.
LET US DETERMINE THE STIRRUPS INTENSITY ACCORDING
TO FORMULA (3.48)

3 . 143
100
3 . 50 285
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q
N/MM.
SINCE
25 . 0 25 . 2
85 75 . 0
3 . 143
> =
=
b R
q
bt
sw
, I.E., CONDITION (3.49) IS
SATISFIED, ONE CAN CONSIDER THE STIRRUPS FULLY AND
VALUE MB IS DETERMINED USING FORMULA (3.46)
MB= 1.5RBTBH0
2
= 1.5
.
0.75
.
85
.
3152 = 9.488
.
10
6
N
.
MM.

LET US DETERMINE THE LENGTH OF THE LEAST
FAVORABLE INCLINED SECTION C PROJECTION ACCORDING TO
PARA 3.32.
Q1 = Q QV/2 = 21.9 18/2 = 12.9 KN/M (N/MM).
SINCE
0 . 2 25 . 2 > =
b R
q
bt
sw
, ONE CAN DETERMINE VALUE C
USING THE FORMULA

2 mm 7 . 280
9 . 12 3 . 143 75 . 0
10 488 . 9
75 . 0
0
6
1
h
q q
M
c
sw
b
< =
+

=
+
=

ONE CAN ASSUME C0 = C = 280.7 MM. THEN
QSW = 0.75QSWC0 = 0.75
.
143.3
.
280.7 = 30168 N = 30.17 KN.

8 . 33 N 33801
7 . 280
10 488 . 9
6
= =
= =
c
M
Q
b
b KN.
Q = QMAX Q1C = 62 12.9
.
0.28 = 58.4 KN.
ONE CAN VERIFY CONDITION (3.44)
QB + QSW = 33.8 + 30.17 = 63.97N > Q = 58.4 KN,
I.E. INCLINED SECTIONS DURABILITY IS ENSURED.
LET US CHECK THE REQUIREMENT PARA 3.35:
100 mm 102
62000
315 85 75 . 0
2 2
0
max ,
= > =

= =
w
bt
w
s
Q
bh R
s
MM,
I.E. THE REQUIREMENT IS MET. PARA 5.21 CONDITIONS SW
<H0/2 = 315/2 = 157 MM AND SW < 300 MM ARE ALSO SATISFIED.

EXAMPLE 13. GIVEN: A FREE BEAM WITH SECTION
DIMENSIONS: B = 200 MM, H = 400 MM; H0 = 370 MM; V25 CLASS
CONCRETE (RBT = 1.05 MPA); TWO-BRANCH STIRRUPS WITH A
DIAMETER OF 8 MM (ASW = =101MM
2
) WITH A SPACING OF SW =
150 MM; A240 CLASS REINFORCEMENT (RSW = 170 MPA);
TEMPORARY MOMENT EQUIVALENT LOAD QV = 36 KN/M,
CONSTANT LOAD QG = 14 KN/M; TRANSVERSE FORCE AT THE
SUPPORT QMAX = 137.5 KN.
IT IS REQUIRED TO CHECK THE INCLINED SECTIONS
DURABILITY.
C A L C U L A T I O N . INCLINED SECTIONS DURABILITY IS
CHECKED ACCORDING TO PARA 3.31. LET US DETERMINE
STIRRUPS INTENSITY ACCORDING TO FORMULA (3.48)
150
101 170
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q = 114.5 N/MM.
SINCE
25 . 0 545 . 0
200 05 . 1
5 . 114
> =
=
b R
q
bt
sw
, I.E., CONDITION (3.49) IS
SATISFIED, THE STIRRUPS ARE CONSIDERED FULLY AND
VALUE MB IS DETERMINED FROM FORMULA (3.46)
MB =1.5RBTBH0
2
= 1.5
.
1.05
.
200
.
3702 = 4.312
.
107 N
.
MM.
ONE CAN DETERMINE THE LEAST FAVORABLE INCLINED
SECTION PROJECTION LENGTH ACCORDING TO PARA 3.32:
Q1 = QG + 0.5QV = 14 + 0.5
.
36 = 32 KN/M (N/MM).
SINCE
1017
545 . 0 5 . 0 1
370 2
5 . 0 1
2
mm 1161
32
10 312 . 4
0
7
1
=

=
> =
=
b R
q
h
q
M
bt
sw
b
MM,
VALUE C IS TAKEN EQUAL TO 1161 MM > 2H0 = 740 MM. THEN C0
= 2H0 = 740 MM QSW = 0.75QSWC0 = 0.75
.
114.5
.
740 = 63548 N =
63.55 KN;

37140
1161
10 312 . 4
7
=
= =
c
M
Q
b
b
N = 37.14 KN;
Q = QMAX - Q1C = 137.5 32
.
1.161 = 100.35 KN.
LET US CHECK CONDITION (3.44)
QB + QSW = 37.14 + 63.55 = 100.69 KN > Q = 100.35 KN,
I.E. INCLINED SECTIONS DURABILITY IS ENSURED.
EXAMPLE 14. GIVEN: A FREE BEAM WITH A SPAN OF
L = 5.5 M; FULLY UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED LOAD ON THE

BEAM Q = 50 KN/M; TEMPORARY LOAD EQUIVALENT QV = 36
KN/M; CROSS SECTION DIMENSIONS B = 200 MM, H = 400 MM; H0
= 370 MM; V15 CLASS CONCRETE (RBT = 0.75 MPA); A240 CLASS
REINFORCEMENT STIRRUPS (RSW = 170 MPA).
IT IS REQUIRED TO DETERMINE THE DIAMETER AND
SPACING OF STIRRUPS AT THE SUPPORT AND TO FIND OUT AT
WHAT DISTANCE AND HOW CAN THE STIRRUPS SPACING BE
INCREASED.
C A L C U L A T I O N . THE GREATEST TRANSVERSE FORCE
IN THE BEARING SECTION IS EQUAL TO
QMAX =
5 . 137
2
5 . 5 50
2
=
=
ql
KN.
LET US DETERMINE REQUIRED STIRRUPS INTENSITY OF
THE SECTION NEXT TO THE SUPPORT ACCORDING TO PARA
3.33, B.
ONE CAN DETERMINE MB ACCORDING TO FORMULA (3.46)
MB = 1.5RBTBH0
2
= 1.5
.
0.75
.
200
.
3702 = 30.8
.
106 N
.
MM.
ACCORDING TO PARA 3.32
Q1 =Q - 0.5QV = 50 0.5
.
36 = 32 KN/M (N/MM).
62790 32 10 8 . 30 2 2
6
1 1
= = = q M Q
b b
N.
SINCE 2MB/H0 QMAX = 2
.
30.8
.
106/370 137500 = 28986 N
<QB1= 62790N, STIRRUPS INTENSITY IS DETERMINED USING
FORMULA (3.52)
9 . 161
10 8 . 30 3
62790 137500
3
6
2 2 2
1
2
max
=

=
=
b
b
sw
M
Q Q
q
N/MM,
ACCORDING TO PARA 5.21 THE STIRRUPS SPACING SW AT
THE SUPPORT SHALL NOT EXCEED H0/2 = 185 AND 300 MM AND
WITHIN THE SPAN 0.75H0 = 278 AND 500 MM. THE MAXIMUM
PERMISSIBLE SPACING AT THE SUPPORT ACCORDING TO PARA
3.35 IS EQUAL TO
150 3 . 149
137500
370 200 75 . 0
2 2
0
max ,
=

= =
Q
bh R
s
bt
w
MM.
LET US TAKE THE STIRRUPS SPACING AT THE SUPPORT
SW1= 150 MM AND 250 MM WITHIN THE SPAN. HENCE
9 . 142
170
150 9 . 161
1
=
= =
sw
w sw
sw
R
s q
A
MM
2
.
WITHIN THE CROSS SECTION ONE CAN TAKE TWO

STIRRUPS OF 10 MM (ASW = 157MM
2
).
THUS, THE STIRRUPS INTENSITY TAKEN AT THE SUPPORT
AND WITHIN THE SPAN IS EQUAL TO, RESPECTIVELY:
9 . 177
150
157 170
1
1
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q
N/MM;
QSW2 =
7 . 106
250
157 170
=
N/MM.
LET US CHECK CONDITION (3.49):
0.25
.
RBTB = 0.25
.
0.75
.
200 = 37.5 N/MM < QSW1 AND 37.5
< Q
SW2
.
CONSEQUENTLY, VALUES OF QSW1 AND QSW2 ARE NOT
CORRECTED.
LET US DETERMINE THE LENGTH OF SECTION L1 WITH
STIRRUPS INTENSITY QSW1 ACCORDING TO PARA 3.34. SINCE
QSW = 0.75 (QSW1 - QSW2) = 0.75(177.9 106.7) = =53.4N/MM >Q1 =
32 N/MM, LET US CALCULATE VALUE L1 ACCORDING TO
FORMULA (3.59), TAKING QB,MIN = 0.5RBTBH0 = 0.5
.
55500 =
27750 N
mm 839 370 2
32
) 370 7 . 106 5 . 1 27750 ( 137500
2
) 5 . 1 (
0
1
0 2 min , max
1
=
+
=
=
+
= h
q
h q Q Q
l
sw b

LET US TAKE THE SECTION LENGTH WITH A STIRRUPS
SPACING OF SW1 = 150 MM EQUAL TO 0.9 M.
EXAMPLE 15. GIVEN: A COVER BEAM LOADED BY
CONCENTRATED FORCES AS SHOWN IN DRAWING 3.22,A;
SECTION DIMENSIONS ACCORDING TO DRAWING 3.22,B; V15
CLASS CONCRETE (RBT = 0.75 MPA); A240 CLASS
REINFORCEMENT STIRRUPS (RSW = 170 MPA).
IT IS REQUIRED TO DETERMINE THE DIAMETER AND
SPACING OF THE STIRRUPS AND TO FIND OUT AT WHAT
DISTANCE FROM THE SUPPORT AND HOW CAN THE STIRRUPS
SPACING BE INCREASED.

1500
1
1
0
1
0
5
,
2
6
3
,
2
1350
2
4
,
1
5
8
,
1
220
6
0
8
9
0
80
8
0
1
0
0
1
F=42 F=34
1
) a
Q,

DRAWING 3.22. FOR CALCULATION EXAMPLE 15

C A L C U L A T I O N . H0 = 890 80 = 810 MM.
LET US DETERMINE THE REQUIRED STIRRUPS INTENSITY
QSW ACCORDING TO PARA 3.33, AND, ASSUMING SECTION
PROJECTION LENGTH C EQUAL TO THE DISTANCE FROM THE
SUPPORT TO THE FIRST LOAD C1 = 1350 MM. THEN 1 = C1/H0 =
1350/810 = 1.667 < 2, AND, CONSEQUENTLY, 01 = 1 = 1.667.
ONE CAN DETERMINE
212 . 1 667 . 1 1875 . 0
667 . 1
5 . 1
1875 . 0
5 . 1
01
1
1
= + = + =
.
ACCORDING TO DRAWING 3.22 THE TRANSVERSE FORCE
AT A DISTANCE OF C1 FROM THE SUPPORT IS EQUAL TO Q1 =
105.2 KN. THEN 1
0
1
1
165 . 2
810 80 75 . 0
105200
bt
bh R
Q
> =

= =
,
AND, CONSEQUENTLY, QSW IS DETERMINED USING
FORMULA (3.51):
7 , 60
667 . 1 75 . 0
667 . 1 / 5 . 1 165 . 2
80 75 . 0
75 . 0
/ 5 . 1
01
1 1
1
=

b R q
bt sw N/MM.
LET US DETERMINE QSW FOR A VALUE OF C EQUAL TO THE
DISTANCE FROM THE SUPPORT TO THE SECOND LOAD C2 = 2850
MM:
2 = C2/H0 = 2850/810 = 3,52 > E; ONE CAN ASSUME 2 = 3,0.
SINCE 2 > 2, ONE CAN TAKE 02 = 2.0.
PROJECTION Q, KN

. 875 . 0 2 1875 . 0
3
5 . 1
1875 . 0
5 . 1
02
2
2
= + = + =

THE CORRESPONDING TRANSVERSE FORCE IS EQUAL TO
Q2 = 58.1 KN. THEN
815 . 0 . 195 . 1
810 80 75 . 0
58100
2
0
2
2
= > =

= =

bt
bh R
Q

,
AND, CONSEQUENTLY,
8 . 27
0 . 2 75 . 0
0 . 3 / 5 . 1 195 . 1
80 75 . 0
75 . 0
/ 5 . 1
02
2 2
2
==

b R q
bt sw N/MM.
ONE CAN TAKE THE MAXIMUM VALUE OF QSW = QSW1
=60.7. THE WELDING CONDITION GIVES US THE STIRRUPS
DIAMETER 8 MM (ASW = 50.3 MM
2
). THEN THE MAXIMUM
PERMISSIBLE STIRRUPS SPACING IN THE SECTION NEXT TO THE
SUPPORT IS EQUAL TO
SW1 =
9 . 140
7 . 60
3 . 50 170
1
=
=
sw
sw sw
q
A R
MM.
ONE CAN ASSUME SW1 = 100 MM. ONE CAN DESIGNATE THE
STIRRUPS SPACING WITHIN THE SPAN TO BE EQUAL TO SW2 =
300 MM. THEN THE STIRRUPS INTENSITY OF THE SECTION NEXT
TO THE SUPPORT IS
5 . 85
100
3 . 50 170
1
1
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q
N/MM,
AND WITHIN THE SPAN SECTION:
5 . 28
300
3 . 50 170
2
2
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q
N/MM
LET US ASSIGN THE LENGTH OF THE SECTION WITH A
STIRRUPS SPACING OF SW1 EQUAL TO THE DISTANCE FROM
THE SUPPORT TO THE FIRST LOAD L1 = 1350 MM, AND LET US
CHECK CONDITION (3.44) WITH A VALUE OF C EQUAL TO THE
DISTANCE FROM THE SUPPORT TO THE SECOND LOAD C = 2850
MM. HOWEVER, SINCE 3H0 = 3
.
810 = 2430 MM < C, ONE CAN
TAKE C = =2430MM. VALUE QSW IS DETERMINED ACCORDING
TO PARA 3.34.
SINCE 2H0 + L1 = 2
.
810 + 1350 = 2970 MM > C, VALUE QSW IS
DETERMINED USING FORMULA (3.56). THEREBY, SINCE C > 2H0,
C0 = 2H0 = 1620 MM.
QSW = 0.75[QSW10 (QSW1 - QSW2)( L1)] = 0.75[85.5
.
1620

(85.5 28.5)(2430 1350)] = 57712 N = 57.7 KN.
WITH C=3H0 QB = QB MIN = 0.5RBTBH0 = 0.5
.
0.75
.
80
.
810 =
24300 N = 24.3 KN.
THE TRANSVERSE FORCE AT A DISTANCE OF C = 2430 MM
FROM THE SUPPORT (DRAWING 3.22) IS EQUAL TO
Q =
5 . 59 ) 1 . 58 2 . 63 (
5 . 1
35 . 1 43 . 2
2 . 63 =
KN.
ONE CAN CHECK CONDITION (3.44)
QB + QSW = 24.3 + 57.7 = 82.0 KN > Q = 59.5 KN,
I.E. THE DURABILITY OF THIS INCLINED SECTION IS
ENSURED.
ONE CAN DO NOT CONSIDER A GREATER VALUE OF C,
SINCE THAT GREATLY REDUCES THE TRANSVERSE FORCE.
THUS, THE LENGTH OF SECTION WITH THE STIRRUPS
SPACING SW1 = 100 MM IS TAKEN EQUAL TO 1.35 M.
EXAMPLE 16. GIVEN: A DOUBLE SLOPE BEAM WITH A 8.8 M
SPAN (DRAWING 3.23,A); CONTINUOUS UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED LOAD ON THE BEAM Q = 46 KN/M; BEARING
SECTION DIMENSIONS ACCORDING TO DRAWING 3.23,B; V20
CLASS CONCRETE (RBT = 0.9 MPA); A400 CLASS
REINFORCEMENT STIRRUPS (RSW = 285 MPA) WITH A DIAMETER
OF 10 MM (ASW = 78.5 MM
2
) AND A SPACING OF SW = 100 MM.
IT IS REQUIRED TO CHECK THE INCLINED SECTION
DURABILITY TO A TRANSVERSE FORCE.
C A L C U L A T I O N . THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF THE
BEARING SECTION IS EQUAL TO H0 = 600 40 = 560 MM (SEE
DRAWING 3.23,B). LET US DETERMINE STIRRUPS INTENSITY
ACCORDING TO FORMULA (3.48)

c
8800
i=1:12
a)

6
0
0
100
4
0
1
5
0
1
0
0
300
)



7 . 223
100
5 . 78 285
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q
N/MM.
LET US DETERMINE THE PROJECTION OF THE LEAST
FAVORABLE INCLINED SECTION C ACCORDING TO PARA 3.37.
FROM DRAWING 3.23,A ONE CAN HAVE TG = 1/12, B = 100 MM,
RBTB = 0.9
.
100 = 90 N/MM; 1 2TG = 1 2/12 = 0.833.
SINCE QSW/(RBTB) = 223.7/90 = 2.485 > 2 (1 2TG)
2
= 2
.
0.8332
= 1.389, VALUE C IS CALCULATED ACCORDING TO FORMULA
(3.62).
mm. 444
12 / 5 . 1 90 / ) 46 7 . 223 75 . 0 (
5 , 1
560
tg 5 . 1 ) /( ) 75 . 0 (
5 , 1
2 2
01
=
=
+ +
=
+ +
=
b R q q
h c
b w

THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH OF THE CROSS SECTION H0 AT A
DISTANCE C = 444 MM FROM THE SUPPORT IS EQUAL TO
H0 = H01 +
.
TG = 560 + 444/12 = 597 MM.
SINCE C = 444 MM < 2H0, CO = C = 444 MM;
4 . 108 108370
444
597 90 5 . 1 5 . 1
2 2
0
= =

= =
c
bh R
Q
bt
b KN;
QSW = 0.75QSW0 = 0.75
.
223.7
.
444 = 74492 N = 74.5 KN.
LET US CHECK CONDITION (3.44) TAKING THE
TRANSVERSE FORCE AT THE END OF THE INCLINED SECTION
EQUAL TO
Q = QMAX QC =
0 . 182 444 . 0 46
2
8 . 8 46
=
KN:
QB + QSW = 108.4 + 74.5 = 182.9 KN > Q = 182 KN,
I.E. THE DURABILITY OF THE INCLINED SECTIONS TO A
TRANSVERSE FORCE IS ENSURED.
EXAMPLE 17. GIVEN: A CANTILEVER WITH DIMENSIONS
ACCORDING TO DRAWING 3.24, A CONCENTRATED FORCE
APPLIED TO THE CANTILEVER F = 130 KN LOCATED AT A
DISTANCE L1 = 0.8 M FROM THE SUPPORT; V15 CLASS
CONCRETE (RBT = 0.75 MPA); TWO-BRANCH STIRRUPS WITH A
DIAMETER OF 8 MM (ASW = 101 MM
2
) MADE OF A240 CLASS
REINFORCEMENT (RSW = 170 MPA) WITH A SPACING OF SW = 200
MM.


F=130kH
3
0
0
800
950
C
6
5
0
5
0
400
1-1
1
1


IT IS REQUIRED TO CHECK THE DURABILITY OF INCLINED
SECTIONS TO A TRANSVERSE FORCE.
C A L C U L A T I O N . ONE CAN CHECK THE LEAST
FAVORABLE INCLINED SECTION USING CONDITION (3.44)
ACCORDING TO PARA 3.38, WHICH STARTS AT THE
APPLICATION POINT OF THE CONCENTRATED FORCE, WITH A
VALUE OF C DETERMINED ACCORDING TO FORMULA (3.62)
WITH Q1 = 0 AND TG =
. 369 . 0
950
300 650
=

THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH AT THE APPLICATION POINT OF
THE CONCENTRATED FORCE IS EQUAL TO H01 = 650 (650 300)
305 50
950
800
= MM (SEE DRAWING 3.24); RBTB = 0,75. 200 = 150 N/MM.
VALUE QSW IS EQUAL TO

N 8 . 85
200
101 170
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q
/MM;
mm. 800 mm 4 . 469
369 . 0 5 . 1 150 / 8 . 85 75 . 0
5 , 1
305
tg 5 . 1 ) /( 75 . 0
5 . 1
1
2 2
01
= < =
=
+
=
+
=
l
b R q
h c
bt sw

SINCE
c
tg
h
> =

=
mm 1164
369 . 0 2 1
305 2
2 1
2
01
, ONE CAN LEAVE C =

469.4 MM.
LET US DETERMINE THE EFFECTIVE DEPTH H0 AT THE END

OF THE INCLINED SECTION
H0 = H01 + TG = 305 + 469
.
0.369 = 478 MM.
SINCE C = 469.4 > 2H0, C0 = C = 469 MM.
6 . 109 N 109614
469
478 150 5 . 1 5 . 1
2 2
0
= =

= =
c
bh R
Q
bt
b
KN;
QSW = 0.75 QSW0 = 0.75
.
85.8
.
469 = 30180 N = 30.18 KN;
QB + QSW = 109.6 + 30.2 = 139.8 KN > F = 130 KN.
I.E. THE DURABILITY OF INCLINED SECTIONS TO A
TRANSVERSE FORCE IS ENSURED.

Example 18. Given: a solid slab of the tank bottom without crosswise
reinforcement with dimensions 36 m and thickness h = 160 mm,
monolithically connected throughout the perimeter with beams; complete
uniform load 50 kN/m
2
; concrete of class 15 (R
bt
= 0.75 MPa).
It is required to check slab durability regarding transverse force.
0
= 160 20 = 140 mm. Calculation is carried out
for a strip with width b=1.0 = 1000 mm, span l = 3 . Thereafter, q =
501.0 = 50 kN/m and transverse force on the support is equal to
75
2
3 50
2
max
=
= =
ql
Q kN.
Let us check condition (3.64)
2.5R
bt
bh
0
= 2.5
.
0.75
.
1000
.
140 = 262500 N > Q
max
= 75 kN.
Let us check condition (3.66) assuming q
1
= q = 50 kN/m (N/mm).
Since side edges of the slab are monolithically connected with beams,
condition (3.66) is written in the form
50 mm / N 195
64 . 0 6
1000 75 . 0
64 . 0 6
1
= > =
q
b R
bt
N/mm,
Consequently, slab durability is checked using condition (3.67a)
0.625R
bt
bh
0
+ 2.4h
0
q
1
= 0.625
.
0.75
.
1000
.
140 + 2.4
.
140
.
50 =
82425 H = 82.4 kN > Q
max
= 75 kN,
i.. durability of the slab regarding transverse force is ensured.
Example 19. Given: a tank wall panel of cantilevered type with
graduated thickness from 262 (in embedment) up to 120 mm (at the loose
end) with overhanging length 4.25 m; lateral earth pressure taking into
account traffic load on the ground surface linearly decreases from q
0
= 55
kN/m
2
in embedment to q = 6 KN/m
2
at the loose end; =22 mm; concrete
of class 15 (R
bt
= 0.75 MPa) .
It is required to check panel durability regarding transverse force.
C a l c u l a t i o n. Effective depth of panel cross section in

embedment is equal to h
01
= 262 22 = 240 mm.
Let us determine tg ( - angle between compressed and tensile
faces):
. 0334 . 0
4250
120 262
=
= tg
Let us check the conditions from para 3.41. Transverse force in
embedment is equal to
6 . 129 25 . 4
2
6 55
max
=
+
= Q kN.
Calculation is carried out for a strip with width b = 1,0 = 1000 mm.
Let us check condition (3.64) assuming h
0
= h
01
= 240 mm.
2.5R
bt
bh
0
= 2.5
.
0.75
.
1000
.
240 = 450000 H = 450 kN > Q
max,

i.. the condition is fulfilled.
Since panels are interconnected and tank wall width is admittedly
more than 5h, value
max
554
0334 . 0 2 . 1 1
240 4 . 2
tg 2 . 1 1
4 . 2
01
max
=
+

=
+
=
h
c mm.
Medium intensity of the load directed to the area near the support with
length
max
=554 mm is equal to
8 . 51
2 4250
554
) 6 55 ( 55
1
=
= q N/mm.
Since
mm, 554 1115
) 1000 75 . 0 5 . 1 /( 8 . 51 4 / 0334 . 0
1
240
) 5 , 1 /( 4 /
1
max
2
1
2
0
= > =
=
+
=
+
=
c
b R q tg
h c
bt

one can assume =
max
= 554 mm.
Let us determine effective depth of the cross-section at the distance of
/2 from the support (i.. average value h
0
within length ):
h
0
= h
01
- 231 334 . 0
2
554
240 tg
2
= =
c
mm.
Transverse force at the distance of = 554 mm from the support is
equal to:
Q = Q
max
q
1
= 129.6 51.8
.
0.554 = 100.9 kN.
Let us condition (3.65):
9 . 100 kN 4 . 108 N 108360
554
231 1000 75 . 0 5 . 1 5 , 1
2 2
0
= > = =

= Q
c
bh R
bt
kN,
i.. durability of the plane regarding transverse force is ensured.

C a l c u l a t i o n o f i n c l i n e d s e c t i o n s f o r t h e
i m p a c t o f t h e m o m e n t o f f l e c t i o n

Example 20. Given: a freely supported beam with span l = 5.5 m,
uniform load q = 29 kN/m; near support area structure of the beam is
assumed in accordance with Diagram 3.25; concrete of class 15 (R
b
= 8.5
MPa); longitudinal reinforcement without foundation bolts of class 400
(R
s
= 355 MPa) with cross-section area
s
= 982 mm
2
(225); stirrups made
of reinforcement of class 240 (R
sw
= 170 MPa) 8 mm in diameter with
spacing s
w
= 150 mm are welded to longitudinal rods.
It is required to check durability of inclined sections regarding the
impact of moment of flection.
0
= h - a = 400 40 = 360 mm. Since tensile
reinforcement does not have foundation bolts, calculation of the flection
moment impact for sloping cross-sections is necessary.
Let us determine the force in tensile reinforcement using formula
(3.73).
One can assume beginning of the slopping section at the support face.
Thereafter,
l
s
= l
sup
- 10 mm = 280 10 = 270 mm (see Drawing 3.25).
Beam reaction is equal to
80
2
5 , 5 29
2
sup
=
= =
ql
F kN,
and beam bearing area is A
sup
= bl
sup
= 200
.
280 = 56000 mm
2
,
from which , 25 . 0 168 . 0
5 . 8
43 . 1
MPa, 43 . 1
56000
80000
sup
sup
< = = = = =
b
b
b
R A
F

consequently, = 1.0. From Table 3.3 with concrete of class 15,
reinforcement class 400 and = 1/0 one can find
n
= 47. Thereafter,
anchorage length is equal to l
=
n
d
s
= 47
.
25 = 1175 mm.
. H 80106
1175
270
982 355 = = =
an
s
s s s
l
l
A R N


l=5500
C=557,5
l =280
93
1
10
1
4
0
0
200
4
0
2 25
3
5
1-1
2 12
sup
F
sup

Drawing 3.25. For calculation example 20

Since 4 vertical and 2 horizontal transverse rods are welded to tensile
rods within the length (see Drawing 3.25), one can increase force N
s
by
value N
w
.
Assuming d
w
= 8 mm, n
w
= 6,
w
= 150 (see table. 3.4), one can obtain

N
w
= 0.7 n
w

w
d
w
2
R
bt
= 0.7
.
6
.
150
.

2

.
0.75 = 3024
.
10
3
N.
Therefore N
s
= 80106 + 30240 = 110346 N.
Let us determine maximum permissible value N
s
. From Table 3.3 with
=0.7 one can find
n
= 33; thereafter,
=
= =
25 33
270
982 355
max ,
d
l
A R N
an
s
s s s

s
N > = H 114040 , i.e. one can keep N
s
=
110346 N.
Let us determine lever arm
325 35 360 ' mm 5 . 327
200 5 . 8 2
110346
360
2
0 0
= = > =

= = h
b R
N
h z
b
s
s
mm.
Thereafter, moment applied to longitudinal reinforcement is equal to
M
s
= N
s
z
s
= 110346
.
327.5 = 36.1
.
10
6
N
.
mm.
One can calculate q
sw
using formula (3.48)
5 , 114
150
101 170
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q N
.
mm.
One can determine projected contact length of the least favorable
inclined section using formula (3.76), assuming value Q
max
equal to beam
reaction, i.e. Q
max
= F
sup
= 80 kN.
5 . 557
29 5 . 114
10 80
3
max
=
+
=
+
=
q q
Q
c
sw
mm <2h
0
.
Thereafter, moment applied to crosswise reinforcement is equal to
M
sw
=0.5q
sw
2
= 0.5
.
114.5
.
557.5
2
= 17.8
.
10
6
N
.
mm.
Moment in a inclined section is determined as moment in a normal

cross-section located at the end of the inclined section, i.. at the distance
from point of application of beam reaction equal to = l
sup
/3 + = 280/3 +
557.5 = 650.8 mm
6
2
3
2
10 9 . 45
2
8 . 650 29
8 . 650 10 80
2
=
= =
qx
Qx M N
.
mm = 45.9 kN
.
m.
Let us check condition (3.69)

s
+ M
sw
= 36.1 + 17.8 = 53.9 kN
.
m > M = 45.9 kN
.
m,
i.. durability of inclined sections regarding moment of flection is
ensured.
Example 21. Given: a cross-beam of the multistoried frame with
diagrams of moments and transverse forces from uniform load q = 228
kN/m in accordance with Drawing 3.26; concrete of class 25; transverse
and longitudinal reinforcement of class 400 (R
s
= 355 MPa, R
sw
= 285
MPa); transverse cross-section of the near support area is in accordance
with Drawing 3.26; three-branch stirrups 10 mm in diameter (A
sw
= 236
mm
2
) with spacing s
w
equal to 150 mm.
It is required to determine distance from the left support to the spot of
breaking off of the first rod of the upper reinforcement.
C a l c u l a t i o n. From Drawing 3.26 one can have: h
0
= h - a = 800
60 = 740 mm; a= 50 mm; area of the upper tensile reinforcement without
taking into account one broken-off rod 32 A
s
= 1609 mm
2
(232);
'
s
A =
2413 mm
2
(332). One can determine critical moment corresponding to
this reinforcement using formula (3.19). Since A
s
< A
'
s
, i.. < 0:
M
ult
= R
s
A
s
(h
0
- ) = 355
.
1609(740 50) = 394.1
.
10
6
N
.
mm =
394.1 kN
.
m.
In accordance with diagram of moments one can determine distance
from the support to the spot of possible breaking off using equation

,
2
'
sup sup
sup
2 2
ult
M x
q
x
ql
x
l
M M
M M = +
=
from which ;
2
Z where , 2
'
sup sup ult sup
2
ql
M M
l
q
M M
Z Z x

+ =
=
355 . 0
228
1 . 394 600
2 719 . 2 719 . 2 m; 719 . 2
9 . 4 228
300 600
2
9 . 4
2
=
= =
+ = x Z m.
Transverse force in the spot of possible breaking off is equal to
Q = Q
max
qx = 620 228
.
0.355 = 539 kN.
Let us determine value q
sw

4 . 448
150
236 285
=
= =
w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q N/mm.

w=761
1116
1
1
l=4,9 M
M,kHM
394
M =600 M' =300
sup sup
539
620
488
Q ,kH
300
1-1
3 32A400
6
0
5
0
8
0
0
3 32A400
x=0,355 M


Since 74 , 0 601 . 0
4 . 448 2
539
2
0
= < =
= h
q
Q
sw
m, length w, for which a broken-
off rod is carried under behind the point of the possible breaking off is
determined using formula (3.79)
761 32 5 601 5
2
= + = + =
s
sw
d
q
Q
w mm.
Consequently, distance from the support to the spot of rod breaking
off might be assumed equal to x + w = 355 + 761 = 1116 mm.
Let us determine necessary length l
an
from the spot of the rod breaking
off to the support cross-section assuming complete use of this rod in the

support cross-section. For this purpose using Table 3.3 with = 1.0
concrete of class 25, reinforcement class 400 one can find = 34.
Thereafter l
an
=
an
d = 34
.
32 = 1088 mm < 1116 mm.
Consequently, the rod is broken off at the distance 1116 mm from the
support.

ECCENTRICALLY COMPRESSED ELEMENTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

3.49. When calculation is carried out for concrete reinforcement
elements regarding effect of compressed normal force, accidental
eccentricity
shall be taken into account assumed no less than:

1/600 of element length or distance between its cross-sections fixed
against displacement;
1/30 of section depth;
10 mm.
For elements of statically indeterminate structures (including columns
of framed buildings) value of normal force eccentricity in respect with
gravity center of transformed section
0
is assumed equal to eccentricity
value obtained using static analysis, however, no less than
.
For elements of statically determinate structures (for example, framed
structures, power line posts, etc.) eccentricity
0
is assumed equal to sum of
accidental eccentricity and eccentricity of construction static analysis .
3.50. Calculation for normal cross-sections of eccentrically
compressed elements is carried out in the plane of normal force (in the
plane of flection) eccentricity and separately in the plane normal to it with
eccentricity
0
equal to accidental
(see para 3.49). Calculation in the plane

of flection is not strictly required in case if element flexibility l
0
/i (for
rectangular cross-sections l
0
/h) in the plane of flection exceed flexibility
in plane normal to the plane of flection.
Calculation of element with allowance for eccentricities in planes of
both main axes (biaxial eccentrical compression) shall be carried out in case
if both eccentricities exceed accidental
.
In all cases eccentricities
0
are determined with allowance for
element deflection influence (see paras 3.53-3.55).
3.51. Calculation for normal cross-sections of eccentrically
compressed elements in general case is carried out on the basis of non-
linear deformation model in accordance with paras 3.72-3.76.

It is permissible to carry out calculation for elements of rectangular,
T- and I-sections, with reinforcement located at element edges
perpendicular to the plane of flection and with eccentricity directed in plane
of cross section symmetry, in accordance with paras 3.56-3.61.
In addition, regarding critical forces calculation might be carried out:
- for element of annular and circular cross-section with reinforcement
uniformly distributed at the circumference with a number of rods
more than 6 in accordance with paras 3.62-3.65;
- for elements of rectangular cross-section with reinforcement in the
form of 4 similar corner rods regarding biaxial eccentrical
compression in accordance with para 3.66.

ANALYSIS OF TRANSVERSE FORCE ACTION
3.52. Calculation for eccentrically compressed elements regarding
action of transverse forces is carried out similarly to calculation of bending
elements in accordance with paras 3.29-3.35 and the following instructions:
) with N/N
b
> 0.5 the right part of condition (3.43) is multiplied by
coefficient

n1
= 2(1-N/N
b
), (3.83)
where N
b
= 1.3R
b
A, however, no less than N;
b) value of transverse force accepted by concrete in inclined section
Q
b
as well as the right part of condition (3.49) are multiplied by coefficient
; 4 3 1
2
2

+ =
b b
n
N
N
N
N
(3.84)
Value M
b
connected with Q
b
is also multiplied by coefficient
2
.

CONSIDERING EFFECTS OF ELEMENT DEFLECTION
3.53. Effect of element deflection on the moment of normal force (or its
eccentricity
0
) is taken into account as a rule by means of structure
calculation using deformational model and considering inelastic
deformations of concrete and reinforcement as well as presence of cracks.
It is permissible to carry out calculation using non-deformational
model and to take into account element flection by means of moment
multiplying by coefficients
v
and
h
in accordance with formula
=
v
v
+
h
h
+
t
, (3.85)
where
v
is moment of vertical loads which do not cause noticeable
horizontal end movements;
v
is a coefficient assumed equal to:

1.0 for cross-sections at element ends with pliable embedment;
value determined using formula (3.86) with stiff embedment;
value determined using formula (3.86) for cross-sections in
middle 1/3 of element length;
value determined using linear interpolation (3.86) for all other
cross-sections;
h
is moment of loads causing horizontal end movement (wind
loading, etc.)
h
is a coefficient determined using formula (3.86);
t
is moment of forced horizontal end movements (i.. movements
which do not depend on element stiffness, for example, thermal
deformation of floor structure, etc.).
It is permissible to determine moments used in this para with respect
to gravity center of concrete cross-section.
Note. In case if vertical loads cause noticeable horizontal movements (for
example with non-symmetric frames), moments
v
are determined with fictitious
horizontal fixed supports, and moments of horizontal forces which are equal to
reactions in these supports shall be referred to moments
h
, i.. added together with
moments of horizontal forces.

3.54. Value of coefficient
v(h)
with structural analysis in accordance
with non-deformation model is determined using formula

cr
h v
N
N
=
1
1
) (
, (3.86)
where N
r
is conditional critical force determined using formula

2
0
2
l
D
N
r

= ; (3.87)
l
0
design element length determined for coefficients
v

h
in
accordance with para 3.55,a and 3.55,b;
D stiffness of concrete reinforcement element in limit state is
determined using formulae:
for elements of any form of section

s s
e l
b
I E
I E
D 7 . 0
) 3 . 0 (
15 . 0
+
+
=

; (3.88)
for elements of rectangular cross section with reinforcement
located at the most compressed or tensile (less compressed)
element edge

.
'
175 , 0
) 3 . 0 (
0125 . 0
2
0 3

+
+
=
h
h
bh E D
e l
b

(3.89)
In formulae (3.88) and (3.89):
I and I
s
are moments of inertia of concrete cross-section and cross-section
of the entire reinforcement with respect to gravity center of
concrete cross-section, respectively;
l
is a coefficient taking into account long-term load effect on element
deflection and equal to
=1+M
ll
/
1
(3.90)
however, no more than 2;
M
1
and M
1l
are external moments with respect to an axis normal to the plane
of flection and crossing the center of the most tensile or the least
compressed rod (with completely compressed cross-section) of
effect of all loads and constant and permanently-acting loads,
respectively; for elements calculated in accordance with paras
3.56-3.61 it is permissible to determine M
1
and M
1l
with respect to
an axis crossing the gravity center of the entire reinforcement S;
is a coefficient assumed to be equal to

0
/h, however, no less than
0.15 (for annular and circular cross-sections value h is substituted
with D
cir
);
.
'
b
s s s
E
E
bh
A A
+
=
Stiffness D when coefficients
v
and
h
are determined taking into
account all loads. In case if it is required coefficient
v
might be reduced
calculating stiffness D without regard to loads causing end movement.
With element flexibility l
0
/i < 14 (with l
0
/h < 4 for rectangular cross-
sections) one can might assume
v(h)
= 1.0.
When N > N
cr
, it is required to increase cross-section dimensions.
3.55. Design length l
0
is assumed equal to the following values:
a) when coefficient
v
is calculated and also calculation is performed
regarding action of normal force with accidental eccentricity for elements:
with hinge support at both ends l
0
=1.0 l ;
with hinge support at one end and at other end:
with stiff embedment l
0
=0.7l
with pliable embedment l
0
=0.9l;
with embedment at both ends: with stiff embedment l
0
=;0.5l
0
=0.8l;
with pliable embedment at one end and stiff embedment at the other

l
0
=0.7l;
b) when coefficient
h
is calculated for elements:
with hinge support at one end and at the other end:
0
= 1,5 l;
0
= 2,0 l;
with embedment at both ends: with stiff embedment l
0
= 0,8 l;
0
=1,2 l;
with pliable embedment at one end and stiff embedment at the other
l
0
= l;
with stiff embedment at one end and the other loose end (cantilever)
l
0
= 2 l.
l is distance between element ends.
Some other values of l
0
might be assumed for specific structures and
constructers.

CALCULATION FOR NORMAL CROSS-SECTIONS REGARDING
CRITICAL FORCES

Rectangular cross-sections with symmetrical reinforcement

3.56 Durability of rectangular cross-sections with symmetrical
reinforcement (when R
s
A
s
= R
sc
A
'
s
) is checked using condition
M R
b
bx(h
0
0,5x) + (R
sc
A
'
s
N/2)(h
0
' ), (3.91)
where is moment with respect to gravity center of cross-section
determined taking into account element deflection in accordance
with paras 3.53-3.55;
is height of compressed area assumed to be equal to
) x =
n
h
0
when
R
b
bh R
N
=
0
(Drawing 3.27) ;
) x = h
0
when
n
>
R
,
where is determined using formula

Drawing 3.27. Schematic of forces in transverse rectangular cross-sections of an
eccentrically compressed element

s R
R s R n

2 1
2 ) 1 (
+
+
= ; (3.92)
where
s
= ;
0
bh R
A R
b
s s

for
R
see Table 3.2.
3.57. Required amount of symmetrical reinforcement is determined in
the following way depending on relative value of normal force :
0
bh R
N
b
n
=
a) with
n

R

= =
1
) 2 / 1 (
1 0 ' n n m
s
b
s s
R
bh R
A A , (3.93)
b) with
n
>
R

= =
1
) 2 / 1 (
1 0 ' m
s
b
s s
R
bh R
A A , (3.94)
where is relative height of compressed area determined using formula
(3.92) where it is permissible to assume value
s
to be equal to

=
1
) 2 / 1 (
1 1 1 m
s
(3.95)
with
1
= (
n
+
R
)/2, however, no more than 1.0.
In formulae (3.93 3.95):

; ,
2 / ) ' (
0
2
0
0
1
h
a'
bh R
h N M
b
m
=
+
=
for see paras 3.53 3.55.
If value does not exceed 0.15h
0
, required amount of reinforcement
might be determined by means of the graph of Drawing 3.28 using formula
,
0 '
s
b
s s s
R
bh R
A A = = (3.96)
where
s
is determined using the graph of Drawing 3.28 depending on
values
.
2
0
o b
n
b
m
bh R
N
bh R
M
= =

Drawing 3.28. Graphs of load carrying capacity of eccentrically compressed
elements of rectangular cross-sections with symmetrical reinforcement
0
bh R
N
b
n
= ;
2
0
bh R
M
b
m
= ;
0
bh R
A R
b
s s
s
=

3.58. Calculation of compressed elements made of concrete class 15-
35 regarding action of normal force applied with eccentricity assumed in
accordance with para 3.49 which is equal to accidental eccentricity
0
=
h/30, with l
0
20h might be carried out using condition
N (R
b
A + R
sc
A
s,tt
), (3.97)
Where is a coefficient determined using formula

=
b
+2(
sb
-
b
)
s
, (3.98)
however, assumed no more than
sb
.
b
and
sb
are coefficients assumed in accordance with Tables 3.5 and
3.6.

Table 3.5

N
N
l

Coefficient
b
with l
0
/h
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
0
0,5
1,0
0.93
0.92
0.92
0.92
0.91
0.91
0.91
0.90
0.89
0.90
0.89
0.87
0.89
0.86
0.83
0.88
0.82
0.76
0.86
0.77
0.68
0.84
0.71
0.60

Table 3.6.

N
N
l

Coefficient
sb
with l
0
/h
6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
A. When h 15 . 0 ' < = and there are no intermediate rods (see Sketch) or sectional
area of these rods is less than A
s,tt.
/3
0
0.5
1.0
0.93
0.92
0.92
0.92
0.91
0.91
0.91
0.91
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.90
0.89
0.88
0.88
0.88
0.87
0.85
0.86
0.83
0.80
0.83
0.79
0.74
B. When h h 15 . 0 ' 25 . 0 = > or area of intermediate rods is equal or more than A
s,tt
/3
regardless (see Sketch)
0
0,5
1,0
0,92
0,92
0,92
0,92
0,91
0,91
0,91
0,90
0,89
0,89
0,88
0,87
0,87
0,85
0,83
0,85
0,81
0,77
0,82
0,76
0,70
0,79
0,71
0,62

a
a
h
-
2
a
>
h
-
2
a

4
1
h
-
2
a
1

4
>

1
1
1

Designations used in Tables 3.5 and 3.6:
N
l
normal force due to constant and long
term loads.
N normal force due to all loads.
;
,
A R
A R
b
tot s s
s
= (3.99)
A
s,tot
is area of the entire reinforcement in cross-section;
When
s
>

0.5, =
sb
might be assumed without using formula
(3.98).


Rectangular cross-sections with non-symmetrical reinforcement

3.59. Durability of rectangular cross-sections with non-symmetrical
reinforcement is checked using conditions (3.91) from para 3.56 defining
height of compressed area using formula
;
'
b R
A R A R N
x
b
s sc s s
+
= (3.100)
hereby, if
R
h
x
>
0
(see Table 3.2), height of compressed area is
corrected by means of calculation using the formula
.
) 1 (
2
1
1
0
'
R
s s
b
s sc
R
R
s s
h
A R
b R
A R A R N
x
+
+
= (3.101)
3.60. Areas of compressed and tensile reinforcement corresponding to
minimum of their sum are determined using formulae:
;
) ' (
0
2
0 '
a h R
bh R Ne
A
sc
b R
s
=

(3.102)
,
' 0
s
s
b R
s
A
R
N bh R
A +
=

(3.103)
where
R
and
R
are determined using Table 3.2 and assumed to be no
more than 0.4 and 0.55, respectively;
= /N + (h
0

'
)/2.
With negative value A
s
calculated using formula (3.103) area of
reinforcement S is taken equal to the minimum in accordance with
structural requirements, however, no less than value

) ' (
) ' 2 / ( ) ' (
0
0
min
a h R
a h bh R e a h N
A
sc
b
s,

= , (3.104)
and area of reinforcement S is determined:
with negative value A
s,min
using formula
; / ] ) 2 2 ( ) ' ( ) ' [(
0
2 '
sc b b b b s
R be R bh R N N ba R N ba R N A + = (3.105)
with positive value A
s,min
using formula

min ,
'
s
sc
b
s
A
R
bh R N
A
= . (3.106)
If assumed area of compressed reinforcement A
s,fact
, sufficiently
exceeds its value calculated using formula (3.102) (for example, with its
negative value), sectional area of tensile reinforcement might be reduced

using formula

s
fact s sc b
s
R
A R N bh R
A
'
, 0
+
=

, (3.107)

.
) ' (
, 2 1 1
2
0
0
'
,
bh R
h A R Ne
b
fact s sc
m
m

=
=

If there is no compressed reinforcement or it is not taken into account
in calculation, sectional area of tensile reinforcement is always determined
only using formula (3.107), hereby, condition
m
<
R
shall be fulfilled
.
.

I-sections with symmetric reinforcement

3.60. Durability of I-sections with symmetric reinforcement
concentrated in flanges (Drawing 3.29) is checked in the following way.
If condition

' '
f f b
h b R N (3.108) is met
(i.. boundary of compressed area is in a flange), calculation is carried
out in the same way as for rectangular cross-sections with width
'
f
b in
accordance with para 3.56.

R
e
e
0
h
h

-
a
'
h
A
f
h
A
a
s
R
s
b
f
s
s
A'
b'
R b
f
h
'
0
0
sc
a
'
x
f
A'
s
b

Drawing 3.29. Schematic of forces in transverse I-section of an eccentrically
compressed element

If condition (3.108) is not fulfilled (i.. boundary of compressed area
is in the jack-rib), cross-section durability is checked using condition

), ' )( 2 / ( ) 2 / ( ) 2 / (
0
' '
0 0
h N A R h h A R x h bx R M
s sc f ov b b
+ + (3.109)
where height of compressed area is assumed to be equal to:
a) with
0
0
h x
bh R
A R N
R
b
ov b
=
= ;
b) with >
R

s R
R s R ov n
h x

2 1
2 ) 1 )( (
0
+
+
= , (3.110)
where ; ; ;
0 0 0
bh
A
bh R
N
bh R
A R
ov
ov
b
n
b
s s
s
= = =
A
ov
is area of compressed flange overhangs equal to ( )
' '
f f ov
h - b b A = ;
for
R
see Table 3.2.
Note. With varying height of flange overhangs value
'
f
h is assumed to be equal
to average overhang height.
3.61. Required amount of reinforcement of I-sections is determined in
the following way.
When condition (3.108) is met, reinforcement is selected in the same
way as for a rectangular cross-section with width
'
f
b in accordance with
para 3.57.
If condition (3.108) is not met, reinforcement is selected depending on
relative height of compressed area which is equal to
=
n
-
ov
: (3.111)
a) with
R

;
1
) 2 / 1 (

,
1 0 '

= =
ov m m
s
b
s s
R
bh R
A A (3.112)
b) >
R

= =
1
) 2 / 1 (

, 1 1 1
0 ' ov m m
s
b
s s
R
bh R
A A , (3.113)
where relative height of compressed area
1
= x/h
0
is determined using
formula (3.110) calculating
s
from formula
,
1
) 2 / 1 (
, 1

=
ov m m
s
(3.114)
hereby, is assumed no more than 1.0.
In formulae (3.111) (3.114):
for
,,
ov
see para 3.60;
. 5 . 0 1 ;
'
;
2 / ) ' (
0
'
,
0
2
0
0
1

= =
+
=
h
h
h
a
bh R
a h N M
f
ov ov m
b
m


Annular cross-sections

3.62. Durability of annular cross-sections (Drawing 3.30) with ratio
of inner and outer radiuses r
1
/r
2
0.5 and reinforcement uniformly
distributed at the circumference (with longitudinal rods no less than 7) in
the following way depending on relative area of concrete compressed area

( )
;
7 , 1
,
,
tot s s sc b
tot s s
cir
A R R A R
A R N
+ +
+
= (3.115)
a) with 0.15 <
cir
< 0.6 using condition
) 3 , 1 2 , 0 )( 7 , 1 1 (
sin
) (
, , cir cir s tot s s
cir
s tot s sc m b
r A R r A R Ar R M
+ + + ; (3.116)
b) with
cir
0.15 using condition

s tot s s
cir
s tot s sc m b
r A R r A R Ar R M
,
1
,
295 . 0
sin
) ( + +
(3.117)

Drawing 3.30. Schematic taken for calculation for annular cross section of
compressed element

where ;
75 . 0
,
,
1
tot s sc b
tot s s
ir
A R A R
A R N
+
+
= (3.118)
c) with
cir
0.6 using condition
;
sin
) (
2
,
cir
s tot s sc m b
r A R Ar R M + (3.119)
where .
,
2
tot s sc b
cir
A R A R
N
+
= (3.120)
in formulae (3.115) (3.120):
A
s,tt
is sectional area of the entire longitudinal reinforcement;
;
2
2 1
r r
r
m
+
=

r
s
is circle radius crossing gravity centers of the rods of longitudinal
reinforcement;
Moment is determined with allowance for element flection in
accordance with paras 3.53 3.55.
3.63. It is permissible to check durability as well as to determine
amount of longitudinal reinforcement for annular cross-sections specified in
para 3.62 with r
s
r
m
and reinforcement class not higher than 400 by
means of graphs of Drawing 3.31 using formulae:
M
m
R
b
r
m
A; (3.121)

s
b
s tot s
R
A R
A =
,
, (3.122)
where values
and
s
are determined using a graph depending on values
m b
m
b
tot s s
s
Ar R
M
A R
A R
= =
,
,respectively, also .
A R
N
b
n
= Hereby, moment is
determined with allowance for element flection in accordance with paras
3.53-3.55.

Drawing 3.31. Graphs of load carrying capacity of eccentrically compressed

elements of annular cross-section
A R
N
b
n
= ;
m b
m
Ar R
Ne
0
= ;
A R
A R
b
tot s s
s
,
=

Circular cross-sections

3.64. Durability of circular cross-sections (Drawing 3.32) with
reinforcement uniformly distributed at the circumference (with a number of
longitudinal rods no less than 7), with reinforcement class no higher than
400 is checked using condition
,
sin sin
3
2
,
3
s
cir
tot s s
cir
b
r A R Ar R M

+ +
(3.123)
where r is radius of cross-section;
cir
is relative area of concrete compressed area determined in the
following way:

Drw.3.32. Schematic assumed for calculation for circular cross-sections of
eccentrically compressed elements

with fulfillment of the condition
N 0.77R
b
A + 0.645R
s
A
s,tot
(3.124)
from calculation of the equation

tot s s b
cir
b tot s s
cir
A R A R
A R A R N
,
,
55 , 2
2
2 sin
+
+ +
=

; (3.125)
in case of failure to meet condition (3.124) from calculation of the
equation

;
2
2 sin
,tot s s b
cir
b
ir
A R A R
A R N
+
+
=

(3.126)

is a coefficient taking into account tensile reinforcement work and
assumed to be equal to: = 1.6(1 1.55
cir
)
cir
, however, no more than 1.0
when condition (3.124) is fulfilled; = 0 when there is a failure of
condition (3.124);
A
s,tot
is sectional area of the entire longitudinal reinforcement;
r
s
is circle radius going through gravity center of the rods of
longitudinal reinforcement.
Moment is determined with allowance element deflection in
accordance with paras 3.53-3.55.
3.65. It is permissible to check durability as well as necessary to
determine amount of longitudinal reinforcement for annular cross-sections
specified in para 3.64 by means of graphs in Drawing 3.33, using formulae
M
m
R
rod
; (3.127)

Graphical symbols:

with /D
cir
=0,05
with /D
cir
=0,10
Drawing 3.33. Graphs of load carrying capacity of eccentrically
compressed elements of an annular cross-section
A R
N
b
n
= ;
Ar R
Ne
b
m
0
= ;
A R
A R
b
tot s s
s
,
=

s
b
s tot s
R
A R
A =
,
, (3.128)
where values
s
and
m
are determined using graphs depending on
values ,
,
Ar R
M
A R
A R
b
m
b
tot s s
s
= = respectively, and also on value .
A R
N
b
n
=
Hereby, moment is determined with allowance for element deflection in
accordance with paras 3.53-3.55.

Calculation of elements regarding biaxial eccentrical compression

3.66. For elements of a rectangular cross-section with symmetrical
reinforcement in the form of four corner rods calculation regarding biaxial
eccentrical compression might be carried out using condition
, 1
0 0

k
y
y
k
x
x
M
M
M
M
(3.129)
where M
x
and M
are external moments with respect to gravity center of

the cross-section in planes of mirror symmetry and y;
0 0

y x
M M are critical moments in planes of mirror and y with respect to
gravity center of cross-section equal to the right part of
condition (3.91) from para 3.56.
Values
0 0

y x
M M might be also determined by means of the graph in
Drawing 3.28 using formula
, ) (
2
0
0 0
bh R M M
b m y x
= (3.130)
where
m
is determined using the graph in Drawing 3.28 depending
on ;
0 0
bh R
N
bh R
A R
b
n
b
s s
s
= =
b and h
0
width and effective depth of the cross-section as
applied to direction of the considered moment;
hereby, condition a 0,15h
0
shall be performed for the considered
direction.
Index of power k in condition (3.129) is determined using formulae:

if
0.4, ; ) 4 , 0 (
254 . 0
023 . 0 44 . 3
0
2
k k
n
s
s
+
+

(3.131)
if
> 0.4,
0
2
2
) 16 . 0 ( 1775 . 0
4
) 7 . 1 (
k k
n
s
+
, (3.132)
however, no more than 1.6,
where
s
s
b
tot s s
s
b
n
k
bh R
A R
bh R
N

+
+
= = =
16 . 0
275 . 0
; ;
0
,
.


Rectangular cross-sections with symmetrical reinforcement

Example 22. Given: a column of the middle floor of a framework
with cross-section dimensions b = 400 mm, h = 500 mm; = = 40 mm;
concrete of class 25 (
b
= 300000 MPa, R
b
= 14.5 MPa); reinforcement
class 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa); its area
s
= A
'
s
= 1232 mm
2
(228);
normal force and moments of flection in a support cross-section due to
vertical loads: due to all loads N
v
= 650 kN, M
v
= 140 kN
.
m, constant and
permanently-acting N
l
= 620 kN, M
l
= 130 kN
.
m.; due to wind loading N
h
=
50 kN, M
h
= 73 kN
.
m; storey height is l = 6 m.
It is required to check durability of the column supporting cross-
section.
0
= 500 40 = 460 mm. Calculation is carried out
taking into account deflection effect in accordance with para 3.53. Since the
considered cross section is supporting and the column of the support has
pliable embedment, one can assume
v
= 1.0. In order to calculate
coefficient
h
one can assume design length of the column to be equal to l
0

= 1.2
.
6 = 7.2 m in accordance with para 3.55,b. Hereby, l
0
/ h =7,2/0,5 =
14,4 > 4, i.. deflection shall be taken into account.
Forces from all loads are equal to = M
v
+ M
h
= 140 + 73 = 213 kN
.

m, N =N
v
+ N
h
= 650 + 50 = 700 kN. Hereby 304 , 0
700
213
0
= = =
N
M
e > e
a
=
h/30, i.. in accordance with para 3.49 value of moment is not corrected.
One can determine moment
1
and
1l
with respect to tensile
reinforcement from all loads and from constant and long-term loads,
respectively.
360
2
04 . 0 46 . 0
700 213
2
'
0
1
=
+ =
+ =
h
N M M kN
.
m;

2 . 260
2
04 . 0 46 . 0
620 130
2
'
0
1
=
+ =
+ =
h
N M M
l l l
kN
.
m.
Thereafter
l
= 1 + M
1l
/M
1
= 1 + 260.2/360 = 1.72.
Since , 15 . 0 608 . 0
500
304
0
> = =
h
e
one can assume
= 0.608.
. 0821 , 0
10 3 500 400
10 2 1232 2
4
5 '
=

=
+
=
b
s s s
E
E
bh
A A

One can determine stiffness D (3.89)
. N 10 721 . 2
500
40 460
0821 . 0 175 . 0
) 608 . 0 3 . 0 ( 72 . 1
0125 , 0
500 400 10 3
'
175 . 0
) 3 , 0 (
0125 . 0

2 13
2
3 4
2
0 3
mm
h
h
bh E D
l
b
=
=

+
+
=
=

+
+
=

Therefore, 5180830
7200
10 721 . 2 14 . 3
2
13 2
2
0
2
=

= =
l
D
N
cr

N = 5181 kN.
156 . 1
5181
700
1
1
1
1
=
=
cr
h
N
N
.
Design moment with allowance for deflection is calculated using
formula (3.85) assuming M
t
= 0.0.
M = M
v
v
+ M
h
h
= 140 + 73
.
1.156 = 224.4 kN
.
m.
Let us check cross-section durability in accordance with para 3.56.
531 . 0 262 . 0
460 400 5 . 14
700000
0
= < =

= =
R
b
n
bh R
N
(see Table 3.2).
Consequently, x =
n
h
0
= 0.262
.
460 = 120.5 mm.
R
b
bx(h
0
x/2) + (R
sc
A
'
s
- N/2)(h
0
-
'
) = 14.5
.
400
.
120.5 (460
- 120.5 /2) +(355
.
1232 700000/2)(460 40) = 316.07
.
10
6
N
.
mm =
=316.1 kN
.
m > M = 224.4 kN
.
m,
Example 23. Given: column cross-section of the middle floor of the
framework with dimensions b = 400 mm, h = 400 mm; = = 50 mm;
concrete of class 25 (R
b
= 14,5 MPa, E
b
= 3
.
10
5
MPa); symmetrical
reinforcement of class 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa); normal force and
moments of deflection in the support cross-section due to vertical loads: due
to all loads - N
v
= 900 kN, M
v
= 160 kN
.
m; due to constant and long-term
loads - N
l
= 800 kN, M
l
= 150 kN.m; due to wind load N
h

= 100 kN
.
m,
M
h
= 110 kN
.
m; storey height is 4.8 m.
It is required to determine area of reinforcement cross-section.

0
= 400 50 = 350 mm. In accordance with para
3.53 one can assume
v
= 1.0, and in accordance with para 3.55,b column
design length is assumed equal to l
0
= 1,2
.
4.8 = 5.76

m.
Hereby, l
0
/h = 5.76/0.4 = 14.4 > 4, i.. column deflection is taken into
account.
Forces from all loads are equal to M = M
v
+ M
h
= 160 + 110 = 270
kN
.
m; N =N
v
+ N
h
= 900 + 100 = 1000 kN. Hereby, 27 , 0
1000
270
0
= = =
N
M
e
30 /
0
h e = > , i.. value is not corrected.
Coefficient
h
is determined in accordance with para 3.54.
420
2
05 , 0 35 , 0
1000 270
2
'
0
1
=
+ =
+ =
h
N M M kN
.
m;
270
2
05 , 0 35 , 0
800 150
2
'
0
1
=
+ =
+ =
h
N M M
l l l
kN
.
m;
l
= 1 + M
1l
/M
1
= 1 + 270 /420 = 1,64.
Since , 15 , 0 675 , 0
400
270
0
> = =
h
e
one can assume . 675 , 0
0
= =
h
e
e

In first approximation one can assume that = 0,01,
067 , 0
10 3
10 20
01 , 0
4
4
=
= .
One can determine stiffness D using formula (3.89):
. 10 107 , 1
4 , 0
3 , 0
067 , 0 175 , 0
) 675 , 0 3 , 0 ( 64 , 1
0125 , 0
400 10 3
'
175 , 0
) 3 , 0 (
0125 , 0

2 13
2
4 4
2
0
3
=
+
+
=
=

+
+
=
h
h
bh E D
l
b

Therefore, ; 3293 3293000
5760
10 107 , 1 14 , 3
2
13 2
2
0
2
= =

= =
l
D
N
cr

. 318 436 , 1 110 0 , 1 160
; 436 , 1
3293
1000
1
1
1
1
= + = + =
=
=
h h v v
cr
h
M M M
N
N

Required area of reinforcement cross-section is determined in
accordance with para 3.57. For this purpose one can calculate the value:

. 143 . 0
350
50 '
; 659 . 0
350 400 5 . 14
2 / ) 50 350 ( 1000000 10 318 2 / ) ' (
493 . 0
350 400 5 . 14
1000000
0
2
6
2
0
0
1
0
= = =
=

+
=
+
=
=

= =
h
a
bh R
a h N M
bh R
N
b
m
b
n

One can find
R
= 0.531 from Table 3.2. Since
<
R
,, A
s =
A
'
s
one
can determine using formula (3.93)
2
1 0 `
mm 1918
143 . 0 1
) 2 / 493 . 0 1 ( 493 . 0 659 . 0

355
350 400 5 . 14
1
) 2 / 1 (

=
=

= =

n n m
s
b
s s
R
bh R
A A

Thereafter . 01 . 0 024 . 0
400 400
1918 2
'
> =
=
+
=
bh
A A
s s

Since obtained additional reinforcement exceeds reinforcement which
has been assumed for calculation of D, and moment M
h
= 110 kN
.
m which
is a high percentage of total moment = 270 kN
.
m, value A
s
= 1918 mm
2
is
determined with certain margin, which might be reduced by recalculation
taking value = 0,024 in formula (3.89) :
. mm 1700
857 . 0
) 2 / 493 . 0 1 ( 493 . 0 6263 . 0

355
350 400 5 . 14
; 6263 . 0
350 400 5 . 14
150 1000000 10 295
; m kN 295 228 , 1 110 160
; 228 . 1
5379 / 1000 1
1
/ 1
1
kN; 5379 N 5379000
5760
10 81 . 1 14 . 3
; mm N 10 81 . 1 75 . 0
3
20
024 , 0 175 . 0
975 , 0 64 , 1
0125 . 0
400 10 3
2 '
2
6
1
2
13 2
2 13 2 4 4
=

= =
=

+
=
= + =
=
=
= =

=
=
=
s s
m
cr
h
cr
A A
M
N N
N
D

Taking value
'
s s
A A = =1847 mm
2
(328) which is close to value A
s
used for calculation of D.
Example 24. Given: a column of the lower floor of the multistoried
framework with cross-section dimensions b= 400 mm, h = 500 mm; =
= 50 mm; concrete of class 25 (E
b
= 3
.
10
4
MPa, R
b
= 14,5 MPa);
reinforcement class 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa) with area

A
s
= A
'
s
= 1847
mm
2
(328); normal forces and moments of flection in the lower support
cross-section: from vertical loads: all loads N
v
= 2200 kN, M
v
= 250 kN
.
m,
from constant and long-term loads N
l
= 2100 kN, M
l
= =230 kN
.
m; from
wind loading N
h
= 0.0, M
h
= 53 kNm; storey height is 6 m.

It is required to check durability of the column support cross-section.
0
= h - = 500 50 = 450 mm. Calculation is
carried out taking into account column deflection in accordance with para
3.53. Since the column is fixed with stiff embedment at the considered
cross-section, coefficient
v
is calculated using formula (3.86) assuming
that column design length is equal to l
0
= 0.7
.
6 = 4.2 m in accordance with
para 3.55.
When either coefficient
v
or coefficient
h
are determined, stiffness
D is calculated using formula (3.89) with allowance for all loads. Forces
from all loads are equal to =
v
+ M
h
= 250 + 53 = 303 kN, N = N
v
=
2200 kN. Hereby, . 30 / m 137 . 0
2200
303
0
h e
N
M
e
= > = = =
. mm N 10 81 . 3
500
50 450
1231 . 0 175 . 0
) 274 . 0 3 . 0 ( 875 . 1
0125 , 0
500 400 10 3
'
175 . 0
) 3 , 0 (
0125 . 0
. 1231 . 0
10 3
10 2
500 400
1847 2

2
. 274 . 0 assuming , 15 . 0 274 . 0
500
137
Since
. 875 , 1 743 / 650 1 / 1
m; kN 650
2
05 . 0 45 . 0
2100 230
2
'
m; kN 743
2
05 . 0 45 . 0
2200 303
2
'
2 13
2
3 4
2
0 3
4
5
0 0
1 1 1
0
1
0
1
=
=

+
+
=
=

+
+
=
=
= =
= = > = =
= + = + =
+ =
+ =
=
+ =
+ =
h
a h
bh E D
E
E
bh
A
h
e
h
e
M M
h
N M M
h
N M M
e l
b
b
s s
e
l l
l l l

Thereafter, kN 21318 N 21318000
4200
10 81 . 3 14 . 3
2
13 2
2
0
2
= =

= =
l
D
N
cr

;
. 115 . 1
21318
2200
1
1
1
1
=
=
cr
v
N
N

Coefficient
h
is calculated similarly assuming that design length is
equal to l
0
= 1.0
.
6 = 6 m in accordance with para 3.55,b. Therefore
10446 H 10 10446
6000
10 81 . 3 14 . 3
3
2
13 2
2
0
2
= =

= =
l
D
N
cr

kN.
. 267 . 1
10446
2200
1
1
1
1
=
=
cr
h
N
N

Design moment with allowance for deflection is equal to
M=M
v
v
+ M
h
h
= 250
.
1.115 + 53
.
1.267 = 345.9 kN
.
m.

One can check cross-section durability in accordance with para 3.56.
531 . 0 843 . 0
450 400 5 . 14
2200000
0
= > =

= =
R
b
n
bh R
N
(see Table 3.2).
Consequently, compressed area height is calculated using formula
(3.92). For this purpose one can calculate

m, kN 9 . 345 m kN 350
mm N 10 5 . 3 ) 50 450 )( 2 / 2200000 1847 355 (
) 2 7 . 306 450 ( 7 . 306 400 5 . 14 ) ' )( 2 / ( ) 2 / (
. cm 7 . 306 682 , 0 450
; 682 . 0
251 . 0 2 469 . 0
531 . 0 251 . 0 2 469 . 0 843 . 0
2 1
2 ) 1 (
; 251 . 0
450 400 5 . 14
1847 355
8
0
'
0
0
0
= > =
= = +
+ = +
= = =
=
+
+
=
+
+
=
=

= =
M
h N A R x h bx R
h x
bh R
A R
s sc b
s R
R s R n
b
s s
s



Example 25. Given: a lower storey column of supported framework
with cross-sectional dimensions 400400 mm; = = 50 mm; concrete of
class 40 (E
b
= 36
.
10
3
MPa, R
b
= 22 MPa); longitudinal reinforcement of
class 500 (R
s
= 435 MPa, R
sc
= 400 MPa); normal forces and moments of
flection in lower support section from vertical loads N
v
= 6000 kN, M
v
=
120 kN
.
m, from constant and long-term loads N
l
= 5800 kN, M
l
= 100 kN
.
m;
forces from wind load are neglected; storey height l = 3,6 m.
It is required to determine the cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement.
0
with consideration of the column deflection according to para 3.53. As the
column of the section in view is fully fixed into the footing, coefficient
v
is
determined from formula (3.85), taking the design length according to para
3.55,a, being equal to l
0
= 0,7
.
3,6 = 2,52 m.
At that l
0
/h = 2,52/0,4 = 6,3 > 4, i.. consideration of deflection is
necessary. Stiffness D is determined from formula (3.89), considering all
loads, i.. M = M
v
= 120 kN
.
m and N = N
v
= 6000 kN. Eccentricity
0
=
02 , 0
6000
120
= =
N
M
m = 20mm > e
0
= h/30 = 400/30 = 13,3 mm, therefore, the
moment does not have to be adjusted.
1020
2
05 , 0 35 , 0
6000 120
2
'
0
1
=
+ =
+ =
h
N M M kN
.
m;
970 15 , 0 5800 100
2
'
0
1
= + =
+ =
h
N M M
l l l
kN
.
m;
951 , 1 1020 / 970 1 / 1
1 1
= + = + = M M
l l

As 15 , 0 05 , 0
400
20
0
< = =
h
e
, taking
= 0,15.
In the first approximation, taking = 0,02, then =
1111 , 0
10 6 , 3
10 20
02 , 0
4
4
=
= .

; 2 , 1
36057
6000
1
1
1
1
; 36057 H 10 36057
2520
10 32 , 2 14 , 3

. 10 32 , 2
400
300
1111 , 0 175 , 0
) 15 , 0 3 , 0 ( 951 , 1
0125 , 0
400 36000
'
175 , 0
) 3 , 0 (
0125 , 0
3
2
13 2
2
0
2
2 13
2
4
2
0 3
=
=
= =

= =
=
+
+
=
=

+
+
=
cr
v
cr
e l
b
N
N
l
D
N
h
a h
bh E D

M= M
v
v
= 120
.
1,2 = 144 kN
.
m.
The required cross-sectional area of the reinforcement can be
determined according to para 3.57. To do that, one can determine the
values:
. 143 , 0
350
50
; 9685 , 0
350 400 22
2 / 300 10 6000 10 144 2 / ) ' (
; 948 , 1
350 400 22
10 6000
0
1
2
3 6
2
0
0
1
3
0
= = =
=

+
=
+
=
=

= =
h
bh R
h N M
bh R
N
b
m
b
n

From Table 3.2 one can find
R
= 0,493. As
n
>
R
, value A
s
= =A
'
s

can be determined from formula (3.94). At that, as compressed
reinforcement determines the durability here, one takes R
s
= R
sc
= 400
MPa. Value is determined from formula (3.92), calculating
s
according
to formula (3.95) at
, 1 22 , 1
2
493 , 0 948 , 1
2
1
> =
+
=
+
=
R n

i.. at
1
= 1,0,
; 954 , 0
547 , 0 2 507 , 0
493 , 0 547 , 0 2 507 , 0 948 , 1
2 1
2 ) 1 (
; 547 , 0
143 , 0 1
) 2 / 0 , 1 1 ( 0 , 1 9685 , 0
1
) 2 / 1 (
1 1 1
=
+
+
=
+
+
=
=

=
s R
R s R n
m
s

. 3 , 4219
857 , 0
) 2 / 954 , 0 1 ( 954 , 0 9685 , 0

400
350 400 22
1
) 2 / 1 (

2
1 0
'
=

=
=

= =

m
s
b
s s
R
bh R
A A


Taking A
s
= A
'
s
= 4539 mm
2
(240 + 236).
Example 26. Given: a middle storey column of supported framework
with cross-sectional dimensions 400400 mm; concrete of class 25 (R
b
=
14,5 MPa), longitudinal reinforcement of class 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa):
normal forces moments of flection from vertical loads in support section:
from all loads N
v
= 2200 kN, M
v
=20 kN
.
m, from constant and long-term
loads N
l
= 1980 kN, M
l
= 0,0; storey height = 6 m.
It is required to determine cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement.
C a l c u l a t i o n. As the column is fixed at both ends with hinged
cross-beams, the design length of the column is taken according to para
3.59, being equal to l
0
= H = 6 m. Then l
0
/h = 6/0,4 = 15>4, i..
consideration of the column deflection is necessary.
Eccentricity of the normal force from all loads equals
9 009 , 0
2200
20
0
= = = =
v
v
N
M
e mm. As h/30 = 400/30 = 13,3 mm > >l
0
/600
=6000/600 = 10 mm, according to para 3.49 accidental eccentricity is taken
equal to
= 13,3 mm >
0
. Therefore, calculation of the column is carried
out for the impact of normal force with eccentricity
0
=
according to
para 3.58.
From Tables 3.5 and 3.6 with N
l
/N = 1980/2200 = 0,9, suggesting
absence of intermediate rods at = < 0,15 h one can find
b
= 0,804 and
sb
= 0,867.
Taking in the first approximation =
sb
= 0,867, from condition
(3.97) one can find
H. 10 5 , 217
10 232 10 5 , 2537 400 400 5 , 14
867 , 0
10 2200
3
4 3
3
,
=
= =
= = A R
N
A R
b tot s s
.
Hence 094 , 0
10 232
10 5 , 217
4
3
,
=
= =
A R
A R
b
tot s s
s
.
Since
s
< 0,5, one can revise value by calculating it from formula
(3.98):
=
b
+ 2(
sb
-
b
)
s
= 0,804 + 2(0,867 0,804)0,094 = 0,816.
Similarly one can determine
H. 10 1 , 376 10 232
816 , 0
10 2200
3 4
3
,
=
=
tot s s
A R
The obtained value R
s
A
s,tot
significantly exceeds the one taken in the

first approximation, so one should revise again:
162 , 0
10 232
10 1 , 376
4
3
=
=
s
;
= 0,804 + 2(0,867 0,804)0,162 = 0,824;
H. 10 5 , 348 10 232
824 , 0
10 2200
3 4
3
,
=
=
tot s s
A R
As the obtained value R
s
A
s,tot
is close to the one taken in the second
approximation, the total cross-sectional area of the reinforcement is taken
equal to
982
355
10 5 , 348
3
,
=
=
tot s
A mm
2
.
Finally, taking A
s,tot
= 1018 mm
2
(418).

Rectangular sections with asymmetrical reinforcement

Example 27. Given: a column with semirigid attachments at both
ends of the section with dimensions b = 400 mm, h = 500 mm; = = 40
mm; concrete of class 25 (R
b
= 14,5 MPa), reinforcement of class 400
(R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa); forces in support section from vertical loads: normal
force N = 800 kN
.
m; moment M = 400 kN
.
m; forces from wind loads are
not applied.
It is required to determine the cross-sectional area of the
reinforcement S and S.
0
= 500 40 = 460 mm. At the moment from
wind load is not applied and according to para 3.53
v
= 1,0, there is no
impact of the element deflection to the moment. Then =
+ =
2
'
0
h
N
M
e
= 710
2
40 460
10 800
10 400
3
6
=
mm.
The required cross-sectional area of reinforcement S and S can be
determined from formulae (3.102) and (3.103), taking from Table 3.2
R
=
0,39,
R
= 0,531:
0, 3 , 599
) 40 460 ( 355
460 400 5 , 14 39 , 0 710 10 800
) ' (
2
2 3
0
2
0
'
> =
=
h R
bh R N
A
sc
b R
s
. 0 5 , 2336 3 , 599
355
10 800 460 400 5 , 14 531 , 0
2
3
'
0
> = +

= +
=
s
s
b R
s
A
R
N bh R
A

As both values are greater than zero, they do not have to be revised.

Taking
'
s
A = 628 mm
2
(220), A
s
= 2413 mm
2
(332).

I-sections

Example 28. Given: a column of a single-storey industrial building:
section dimensions and reinforcement location as per Drawing 3.34;
concrete of class 30 (E
b
= 32500 MPa, R
b
= 17,0 MPa); reinforcement of
class 400 (R
s
= R
sc
= 355 MPa), cross-sectional area A
s
=A
'
s
=5630 mm
2
(732); normal forces and moments of flection in lower support section
from vertical loads: all N
v
= 6000 kN,

M
v
= 1000 kN
.
m, from constant and
long-term loads N
l
= 5000 kN, M
l
= 750 kN
.
m; from wind loads N
h
= 0,0,
M
h
= 2000 kN
.
m; column height H = 15 m.
It is required to check the section durability.

Drawing 3.34. For calculation examples 28 and 29

C a l c u l a t i o n i n t h e p l a n e o f f l e c t i o n. Calculation is
performed with consideration of the column deflection according to para
3.53. AS the column of the section is fully fixed to the footing, coefficient
v
is determined from formula (3.86), taking the design length of the
column according to para 3.55, being equal to l
0
= 0,7 = 0,7
.
15=10,5 m.
Now one can define stiffness D from formula (3.88), taking all loads
into consideration.
Taking the design thickness of the flange equal to average height of
overhangs h h
f
=
'
f
= 200 + 30/2 = 215 mm.
The area and the moment of inertia of concrete section can be
calculated:
= 200
.
1500 + 2
.
400
.
215 = 472
.
10
3
mm
2
;

8
2
3 3
10 1279
2
215
2
1500
215 400 2
12
215 400
2
12
1500 200
=
= I mm
4
.
Radius of inertia for the section 520
10 472
10 1279
3
8
=
= =
A
I
i mm.
As l
0
/i = 10500/520 = 20,2 > 14, it is necessary to consider the column
deflection.
Forces from all loads:
M = M
v
+

M
h
= 1000 + 2000 = 3000 kN
.
m;
500 5 , 0
6000
3000
; 6000
0
= = = = = =
N
M
N N
v
.
Now one can determine the moment of inertia for the section of all
reinforcement. The reinforcement gravity center A
s
and
'
s
A is located at the
distance of 79
2 5
150 2 50 5
' =
+
+
= = mm from the nearest face, therefore h
0

= h - = 1500 79 = 1421 mm.
0,5h - = 750 79 = 671 mm.
I
s
= 2A
s
(0,5h - )
2
= 2
.
5630
.
671
2
= 5,07
.
10
9
mm
4
.
Determining coefficient
l
:
; 4105
2
079 , 0 421 , 1
5000 750
2
'
; 7026
2
079 , 0 421 , 1
6000 3000
2
'
0
1
0
1
=
+ =
+ =
=
+ =
+ =
a h
N M M
a h
N M M
l l l

. 584 , 1
7026
4105
1 1
1
1
= + = + =
M
M
l
l

As , 15 , 0 333 , 0
1500
500
0
> = =
h
e
taking 333 , 0
0
= =
h
e
e
.
. 10 331 , 1
10 07 , 5 10 2 7 , 0
) 333 , 0 3 , 0 ( 584 , 1
10 1279 10 5 , 32 15 , 0
7 , 0
) 3 , 0 (
15 , 0
2 15
9 5
8 3
=
= +
+

= +
+
=
s s
e l
b
I E
I E
D

Hence,
8
2
15 2
2
0
2
10 192 , 1
10500
10 331 , 1 14 , 3
=

= =
l
D
N
cr

N;
. 053 , 1
10 2 , 119
10 0 , 6
1
1
1
1
6
6
=
=
cr
v
N
N

Similarly, one can determine coefficient
h
, taking, according to para
3.55,, the design length being equal to l
0
= 1,5H = 1,5
.
15 = 22,5 m:

. 30 , 1
10 95 , 25
10 6
1
1
, H 10 595 , 2
22500
10 331 , 1 14 , 3
6
6
7
2
15 2
=
= =

=
h cr
N
Design moment with consideration of deflection equals
M=M
v
v
+

M
h
h
= 1000
.
1,05 + 2000
.
1,3 = 3653 kN
.
m.
Verifying condition (3.108):
R
b
2193 H 10 2193 215 600 17
3 ' '
= = =
f f
h b kN < N = 6000 kN,
i.. calculation shall be carried out as for an I-section.
The area of compressed overhangs equals:
A
v
= (b
'
f
- b)
'
f
h = (600 200)215 = 86000 mm
2
.
Calculating the height of compressed zone .
As 531 , 0 939 , 0
1421 200 17
86000 17 10 6000
3
0
= > =

=
=
R
b
v b
bh R
A R N
(see Table
3.2), value is determined from formula (3.110).
To do that, calculating
R
b
bh
0
= 17
.
200
.
1421 = 4831400 N;
. 964
414 , 0 2 531 , 0 1
531 , 0 414 , 0 2 ) 531 , 0 1 )( 303 , 0 242 , 1 (
1421
2 1
2 ) 1 )( (
; 303 , 0
1421 200
86000
; 242 , 1
4831400
10 6
; 414 , 0
4831400
5630 355
0
0
6
0 0
=
=
+
+
=
+
+
=
=
= =
=
= = =
= =
s R
R s R ov n
ov
ov
b
n
b
s s
s
h x
bh
A
bh R
N
bh R
A R

The durability is checked based on condition (3.109):
R
b
bx(h
0
- x/2)+R
b
A
ov
(h
0
- h
f
/2)+(R
sc
A
s
N/2)(h
0
- a) = 17
.
200

964
.
(1421 - 964/2) + 17
.
86000(1421 215/2)+(355
.
5630 6
10
6
/2)(1421 79) = 3,654
.
10
9
N
.
mm

= 3654 kN
.
m > M = 3653 kN
.
m,
i.. durability of the section in the plane of flection is ensured.
C a l c u l a t i o n o u t o f t h e p l a n e o f f l e c t i o n. First one
shall determine the radius of inertia for the section out of the plane of
flection:
7
3 3
10 845
12
200 1070
12
600 215 2
=
+

= I mm
4
;
134
10 472
10 845
3
7
=
= =
A
I
i mm.
As the flexibility out of the plane of flection l
0
/i

= 10500/134 =78,4

noticeably exceeds the flexibility in the plane of flection l
0
/i = 20,2,
according to para 3.50 one should check the section durability out of the
plane of flection taking the eccentricity
0
being equal to accidental
eccentricity
. The depth of section at that equals h = 600 mm.

Determining value
according to para 3.49.

As 5 , 17
600
10500
600
20
30
600
30
0
= = > = =
l h
mm and 10
30
>
h
mm, taking
,
30
h
e
a
= which at 20 5 , 17
600
10500
0
< = =
h
l
allows to carry out the calculation
according to para 3.58; at that, coefficient is determined as for the one for
rectangular section not considering in reserve the rib section, i.. at b = 2
.

215 = 430 mm.
As the number of intermediate rods 32 located along both flanges
being equal 6 exceeds 1/3 of the number of all rods 32 14/3 = 4,67, Table
3.6 (section ) is used in the calculation. From this table at N
l
/N =
5000/6000= 0,833 and l
0
/h =17,5 one can find
sb
= 0,736.
A
s,tot
= 11260 mm
2
(1432). value =

= =
600 430 17
11260 355
,
bh R
A R
b
tot s s
s

911 , 0 = >0,5.
Therefore, =
sb
= 0,736.
(R
b
A + R
sc
A
s,tot
) = 0,736(17
.
472
.
10
3
+ 355
.
11260) = 8848
.
10
3
N
> N = 6000 kN,
i.. durability out of the plane of flection is ensured.
Example 29. Given: a column with semirigid attachments at both
ends; section and reinforcement location as per Drawing 3.34; concrete of
class 30 (R
b
= 17,0 MPa); symmetrical reinforcement of class 400 (R
s
=
R
sc
= 355 MPa); normal force and moment if support section from vertical
loads N = 6000 kN, m = 3000 kN
.
m, forces from wind loads are not applied
(M
h
= 0,0, N
h
= 0).
It is required to determine the cross-sectional area of the
reinforcement for support section of the column.
C a l c u l a t i o n i n t h e p l a n e o f f l e c t i o n. According to
para 3.53 coefficient
v
=1,0, and as M
h
= 0, coefficient
h
is not calculated.
Therefore, the element deflection in the plane of flection will not be
considered.
From example 28 one has:
'
f
h = 215 mm, h
0
= 1421 mm, = 79 mm.

R
b
b
' '
f f
h = 17
.
600
.
215 = 2193
.
10
3
H =

2193 kN < N = 6000 kN,

i.. calculation is parried out as for an I-section according to para 3.61.
The area of compressed overhangs of the flange equals:
86000 215 ) 200 600 ( ) (
' '
= = =
f f ov
h b b A mm
2
.
Determining values
n
,
m1
,
ov
,
m,ov
, .
R
b
bh
0
= 17
.
200
.
1421 = 4831400 N.
. 055 , 0
1421
79 '
; 279 , 0
1421 2
215
1 302 , 0
2
1 ; 302 , 0
1421 200
86000
; 023 , 1
1421 4831400
2 / ) 79 1421 ( 10 6000 10 3000 2 / ) ' (
; 242 , 1
4831400
10 6000
0
0
'
,
0
3 6
2
0
0
1
3
0
= = =
=
=
= =
= =
=
+
=
+
=
=
= =
h
h
h
bh
A
bh R
a h N M
bh R
N
f
ov ov m
ov
ov
b
m
b
n

From Table 3.2 one can find
R
= 0,531.
As =
n
-
ov
= 1,242 0,302 = 0,94 >
R
= 0,531, the cross-
sectional area of the reinforcement is determined from formula (3.113). To
do that, using formulae (3.114) and (3.110) one can calculate values
s
and
1
= x/h
0
.
. 725 , 0
26 , 0 2 531 , 0 1
531 , 0 26 , 0 2 ) 531 , 0 1 ( 94 , 0
2 1
2 ) 1 )( (
; 26 , 0
055 , 0 1
279 , 0 ) 2 / 94 , 0 1 ( 94 , 0 023 , 1
1
) 2 / 1 (
1
, 1
=
+
+
=
+
+
=
=

=
s R
R s R ov n
ov m m
s

Hence
. 6 , 4058
055 , 0 1
0,279 - 0,725/2) - 0,725(1 - 1,023

355
4831400
1
) 2 / 1 (

2
, 1 1 1
0 '
==
=
=

= =

ov m m
s
b
s s
R
bh R
A A

Taking A
s
= A
'
s
= 4310 mm
2
(728).
Calculation out of the ;plane of flection is carried out using procedure
similar to the one in example 28.

Annular sections


EXAMPLE 30. GIVEN: CANTILEVER COLUMN WITH HEIGHT H
= 6 M, SECTION WITH INTERNAL RADIUS R1 = 150 MM,
EXTERNAL RADIUS R2 = 250 MM; CONCRETE OF CLASS B25 (EB
= 310
4
MPA, RB= 14,5 MPA); LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT OF
CLASS A400 (RS= RSC = 355 MPA) IS LOCATED IN THE MIDDLE OF
THE ANNULAR WALL, ITS CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA IS AS,TOT =
1470 MM
2
(1312); NORMAL FORCE AND MOMENT IN THE
FOOTING: FROM VERTICAL LOADS: NV = 120 KN, MV =40 KN.M;
FROM WIND LOADS: NH = 0, MH = 70 KN.M.
IT IS REQUIRED TO CHECK THE SECTION DURABILITY.
C A L C U L A T I O N. INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL DIAMETERS
EQUAL D1=2R1=300MM, D2=DCIR=2R2=500MM. AS FOR A
CANTILEVER COLUMN AN ECCENTRICALLY APPLIED VERTICAL
FORCE CAUSES DISPLACEMENT OF THE UPPER PART,
ACCORDING TO PARA 3.53 ONE TAKES ML = 0 AND MH = 40 + 70
=110KN
.
M. COEFFICIENT H IS DETERMINED FROM FORMULA
(3.85), TAKING UP ACCORDING TO PARA 3.55, THE DESIGN
LENGTH OF THE COLUMN BEING EQUAL TO L0 = 2H = 36 = 12 M.
LOADS FROM ALL FORCES EQUAL: N = 120 KN, M = MH =
110 KN.M;
e
0
=
N
M
=
120
110
= 0,917 m = 917 mm.
DETERMINING STIFFNESS D FROM FORMULA (3.88);
RS = RM=
2
2 1
r r +
=
2
250 150 +
= 200 MM;
M1 = M +
s
r N = 2 , 0 120 110 + = 134 KN.M;
M1L = MV + NVRS = 2 , 0 120 40 + = 64 KN.M;
L = 1 + M1L/M1 = 1+ 64/134 = 1,478.
AS
cir
D
e
0
=
500
917
= 1,834 > 0,15, TAKING E =
cir
D
e
0
= 1,834.
Moments of inertia for the concrete section and all reinforcement
respectively equal
I =
( )
64
4
1
4
2
D D
=
( )
64
300 500 14 , 3
4 4

=
9
10 67 , 2 MM
4
;
IS =
2
2
, s tot s
r A
=
2
200 1470
2
=
7
10 94 , 2 MM
4
.

D =
( )
e l
b
I E
+ 3 , 0
15 , 0
+ 0,7ESIS=
( ) 834 , 1 3 , 0 478 , 1
10 67 , 2 10 3 15 , 0
9 4
+

+
7 5
10 94 , 2 10 2 7 , 0 =
12
10 925 , 7 N.MM
2
.
HENCE NCR =
2
0
2
l
D
=
2
12 2
12000
10 925 , 7 14 , 3
=
3
10 2 , 543 = 543,2 KN.
H =
cr
N
N
1
1
=
2 , 543
120
1
1
= 1,284.
THE MOMENT WITH CONSIDERATION OF DEFLECTION EQUALS
M = 284 , 1 110 = 141,2 KN
.
M,
THE CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA EQUALS
A = ( )
2
1
2
2
r r = 3,14(250
2
150
2
) = 125600 MM
2
.
Calculating relative area of the compressed zone of the concrete from
formula (3.115):
cir
=
tot s s b
tot s s
A R A R
A R N
,
,
7 , 2 +
+
=
1470 355 7 , 2 125600 5 , 14
1470 355 10 120
3
+
+
= 0,274.
AS 0,15 <
cir
< 0,6, THE SECTION DURABILITY IS CHECKED
BASED ON CONDITION (3.116):
(RB ARM + RSC AS,TOT RS)
cir
sin
+ RSAS,TOTRS(1 1,7
cir
)(0,2 +
1,3
cir
) = =( 200 1470 355 200 125600 5 , 14 + )
( )
14 , 3
274 , 0 180 sin
o
+
+ ( ) 274 , 0 7 , 1 1 200 1470 355 X( ) 274 , 0 3 , 1 2 , 0 + =
6
10 1 , 144 N
.
MM > M =
=141,2KN
.
M,
i.. durability of the section is ensured.

Circular sections

EXAMPLE 31. GIVEN: A LOWER STOREY COLUMN OF
SUPPORTED FRAMEWORK 4,8 M LONG; SECTION WITH
DIAMETER DCIR = 400 MM; A = 35 MM; CONCRETE OF CLASS B25
(EB =
4
10 3 MPA, RB = 14,5 MPA); LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT OF CLASS A400 (RS= RSC= 355MPA); ITS
CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA AS,TOT = 3140MM
2
(1020); NORMAL
FORCES AND MOMENTS IN UPPER SUPPORT SECTION: FROM
VERTICAL LOADS NV = 1700 KN; MV = 60 KN
.
M; FROM WIND

LOADS NH = 100 KN, MH = 45 KN
.
M, SHORT-TERM VERTICAL
LOADS ARE NOT APPLIED.
IT IS REQUIRED TO CHECK THE DURABILITY OF UPPER
SUPPORT SECTION.
C A L C U L A T I O N. AS THE SECTION IN VIEW IS LOCATED
AT THE SEMIRIGID ATTACHMENT, ACCORDING TO PARA 5.53 V
= 1,0. DETERMINING COEFFICIENT H ACCORDING TO PARA
5.54. AT THAT, THE DESIGN LENGTH IS TAKEN ACCORDING TO
PARA 5.55, BEING EQUAL TO L0 = H = 4,8 M. FORCES FROM ALL
LOADS EQUAL: M = MV + MH = 60 + 45 = 105 KN
.
M, N = NV + NH =
=1700 + 100 = 1800 KN; E0 =
N
M
=
1800
105
= 0,0583 M= 58,3 MM.
DETERMINING STIFFNESS D FROM FORMULA (3.88). FOR THAT
PURPOSE, CALCULATING: R = DCIR /2 = 400/2= 200 MM, RS = R A
= 200 35 = 165 MM;
M1 = M + NRS = 105 + 165 , 0 1800 = 402 KN.M;
DUE TO ABSENCE OF SHORT-TERM VERTICAL LOADS ML = MV =
80 KN
.
M N = NV = 1700 KN; THEN
M1l = Ml + Nlrs = 80 + 165 , 0 1700 = 360,5 kN.M;
l = 1 +
1
1
M
M
l
= 1 +
402
5 , 360
= 1,897.
AS
cir
D
e
0
=
400
3 , 58
= 0,146 < 0,15, TAKING e = 0,15.
MOMENT OF INERTIA OF THE concrete section AND ALL
reinforcement RESPECTIVELY EQUAL:
I =
64
4
cir
D
=
64
400 14 , 3
4
=
6
10 1256 mm
4
.
Is =
2
2
, s tot s
r A
=
2
165 3140
2
=
6
10 74 , 42 mm
4
.
THEN
D =
( )
e l
b
I E
+ 3 , 0
15 , 0
+ 0,7Es Is =
) 15 , 0 3 , 0 ( 897 , 1
10 1256 10 3 15 , 0
6 4
+

+
6 5
10 74 , 42 10 2 7 , 0 =
=
13
10 26 , 1 n
.
mm
2
.
Ncr =
2
0
2
l
D
=
2
13 2
4800
10 26 , 1 14 , 3
=
3
10 5397 n = 5397 kN;

h =
cr
N
N
1
1
=
5397
1800
1
1
= 1,5;
DESIGN MOMENT WITH CONSIDERATION OF DFLECTION
EQUALS
M = Mv + Mhh = 60 + 5 , 1 45 = 127,5 kN
.
.
The section durability is checked based on condition (3.127) using the graph shown in
Drawing 3.33. Determining the area of concrete section
A =
4
2
cir
D
=
4
400 14 , 3
2
= 125600 mm
2
.
using values
n
=
A R
N
b
=
125600 5 , 14
10 1800
3

= 0,988,
s
=
A R
A R
b
tot s s ,
=
125600 5 , 14
3140 355
= 0,612 and =
cir
D
a
=
400
35
= 0,0875 in the
graph one can find
m
= 0,375.
m
RbAr = 200 125600 5 , 14 375 , 0 =
6
10 6 , 136 N
.
mm > M = 127,5 kN
.
,
I..durability of the section isensured.

Elements in oblique eccentrical compression

Example 33. Given: RECTANGULAR SECTION OF A column
WITH DIMENSIONS b = 400 mm, h = 500 mm; concrete OF class B25
(Rb = 14,5 MPa); longitudinal reinforcement OF class A400 (Rs = Rsc =
355 MPa) IS LOCATED IN THE SECTION AS PER DRAWING 3.35;
THE section IS EXPOSED TO SIMULTANEOUS IMPACTS OF FORCE
N = 2600 kN AND MOMENTS OF FLECTION IN THE PLANE
PARALLEL TO DIMENSION h, Mx = 150 kN
.
; IN THE PLANE
PARALLEL TO DIMENSION b, My = 100 kN
.
; MOMENTS Mx AND
My ARE GIVEN WITH CONSIDERATION OF THE COLUMN
DEFLECTION.

x
x
b=400
5
0
2 32
2 32
y y
h
=
5
0
0
5
0
50 50


It is required to check the section durability.
C a l c u l a t i o n. as the reinforcement is presented in the form of 4
corner rods, The section durability is checked according to para 3.66. Axes
of symmetry parallel to dimensions h and b shall be denoted x and y. Now
one can determine limit moments
0
x
M and
0
y
M .
when the moment acts in the plane of axis x one can take b = 400 mm,
h0 = 500 50 = 450 mm. As =
'
s
A = 1609 mm
2
(232). as a = 50mm <
0,15h0 = 450 15 , 0 = 67,5mm, calculation can be performed using the graph
shown in drawing 3.28. for that purpose determining
s
=
0
bh R
A R
b
s s
=
450 400 5 , 14
1609 355

= = 0,219 and
n
=
0
bh R
N
b
=
450 400 5 , 14
10 2600
3

= 0,996.
in the graph,
m
= 0,24 corresponds to these values. Therefore,
0
x
M =
m
b
R b
2
0
h =
2
450 400 5 , 14 24 , 0 =
6
10 9 , 281 n
.
mm = 281,9 kN
.
.
when the moment acts in the plane of axis y one can take b = 500 mm,
h0 = 400 50 = 350 mm. as a = 50 mm < 0,15h0 = 350 15 , 0 = 52,5 mm,
moment
0
y
M can also be determined using the graph shown in drawing 3.28.
in the graph,
m
= 0,23. corresponds to values
s
=
0
bh R
A R
b
s s
=
350 500 5 , 14
1609 355

=0,225 and
n
=
0
bh R
N
b
=
350 500 5 , 14
10 2600
3

= =1.
therefore,
0
y
M =
2
0
bh R
b m
=
2
350 500 5 , 14 23 , 0 =
6
10 3 , 204
.
mm = 204,3
kN
.
.

now one can determine index of power k. as
n
=
bh R
N
b
=
500 400 5 , 14
10 2600
3

=
0,8965 > 0,4, one can use formula (3.132), calculating values
s
=
=
bh R
A R
b
tot s s ,
=
500 400 5 , 14
1609 2 355

= 0,394 and k0 =
s
s
+
+
16 , 0
275 , 0
=
394 , 0 16 , 0
394 , 0 275 , 0
+
+
=
1,21.
k =
( )
( )
0
2
2
16 , 0 1775 , 0
4
7 , 1
k
n
s
+
=
( )
1775 , 0
4
394 , 0 7 , 1
2

( ) 21 , 1 16 , 0 8965 , 0
2
+ = 1,484.
verifying condition (3.129):
k
y
y
k
x
x
M
M
M
M
0 0
=
484 , 1 484 , 1
3 , 204
100
9 , 281
150
= 0,738 < 1,
.. the section durability is ensured.

Calculation of inclined sections

Example 34. Given: a column of multi-storeyed supported framework
with section dimensions b = 400 mm, h = 600 mm; = = 50 mm;
concrete of class B25 (Rb = 14,5 MPa, Rbt = 1,05 MPa); stirrups located at
column faces, made of reinforcement of class A240 (Rsw= 170 MPa) with
diameter 12 mm (Asw = 226 mm
2
) and spacing sw = 400 mm; moments of
flection in upper and lower support sections equal Msup = 350 kN
.
, Minf
= 250 kN
.
and tension the left and the right column faces respectively;
normal force N = 572 kN; column length (distance between the support
sections) l = 3,3 .
It is required to check the column durability to the impact of
transverse force.
C a l c u l a t i o n. h0 = h a = 600 50 = 550 mm. Calculation is
carried out according to para 3.30-3.32 with consideration of
recommendations of para 3.52.
Transverse force in the column equals
Q =
l
M M
inf sup
+
=
3 , 3
250 350 +
= 181,8 kN.
as the transverse force is constant along the coumn length,
theprojection length of the inclined section is takenas the maximum
possible one, i.. equal to max = 3h0 = 550 3 = 1650 mm < l = 2800 mm.

from formula (3.84) one can determine coefficient n2, taking Nb =
bh R
b
3 , 1 = 600 400 5 , 14 3 , 1 =
3
10 4524 N = 4524 kN > N = 572 kN,
n2 = 1 + 3
2
4524
572
4
4524
572
= 1,0625.
as = max, Qb = Qb,min = 0,5Rbtbh0 = 550 400 05 , 1 5 , 0 = =115500 N,
and after multiplying by n2 Qb = 0625 , 1 5 , 111 = 122,7 kN.
value qsw is determined from formula (3.48)
qsw =
w
sw sw
s
A R
=
400
226 170
= 96 N/mm.
now one can determine the force in stirrups Qsw, taking 0 = 2h0 =
550 2 = 1100 mm,
Qsw = 0,75 qsw 0 = 1100 96 75 , 0 = 79200 N = 79,2 kN.
verifying condition (3.49) by multiplying its right part by n2:
2
25 , 0
n bt
b R = 0625 , 1 400 05 , 1 25 , 0 = 111,6 n/ > qsw = 96 n/mm.
as condition (3.49) is not satisfied, one can take Rbtbn2 = 4qsw = 96 4 =
384 n/mm, nd therefore, Qb =
2 0
5 , 0
n bt
b R h = 384 550 5 , 0 = 105600 n =
105,6 kN
Qb + Qsw = 105,6 + 79,2 = 184,8 > Q = 181,8 kN,
i.. durability of the inclined section to the impact of transverse force
is ensured.

CENTRALLY AND ECCENTRICALLY TENSIONED ELEMENTS

CENTRALLY TENSIONED ELEMENTS

3.67. Calculation OF CENTRALLY TENSIONED ELEMENTS
DURABILITY SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT BASED ON CONDITION
N Rs As, (3.133)
where As cross-sectional area of all longitudinal reinforcement.

ECCENTRICALLY TENSIONED ELEMENTS

3.68. Calculation OF NORMAL SECTIONS OF ECCENTRICALLY
TENSIONED ELEMENTS IN GENERAL CASE IS PERFORMED
BASED ON NON-LINEAR DEFORMATIONAL MODEL ACCORDING
TO PARAS 3.72-3.76.

Calculation OF RECTANGULAR sectionS OF ECCENTRICALLY
TENSIONED ELEMENTS WITH reinforcement BEING LOCATED AT
ELEMENT FACES PERNEDICULAR TO THE PLANE OF FLECTION,
AT ECCENTRICITY DIRECTION IN THE SECTION PLANE OF
SYMMETRY IS PERMITTED TO CARRY OUT BY LIMIT FORCES
ACCORDING TO PARAS 3.69 AND 3.70.
3.69. DURABILITY CHECKUP OF RECTANGULAR SECTIONS
OF ECCENTRICALLY TENSIONED ELEMENTS SHOLD BE
PERFORMED DEPENDING ON LOCATION OF NORMAL FORCE N:
) IF NORMAL FORCE N IS APPLIED BETWEEN THE
RESULTANTS OF FORCES IN reinforcement S AND S
'
(DRAWING
3.36,), I.. AT e
'

h0 a
'
, BASED ON CONDITIONS
N e
'
Rs As(h0 a
'
); (3.134)
N e Rs A
'
s(h0 a); (3.135)
R
A
e
e
'
a)
a
'
a
h
h
R
s s
A'
s s
A
s
A'
s
0

b
A
R A
sc
h
e
'
e
)
h
a
0
R
s
a
'
R
A
b
s
b
A
b
s
A'
s
A'
s
x

Drawing3.36. Schematic representation of forces and stress diagram in
section normal to longitudinal axis of eccentrically tensioned reinforced
concrete element, at its durability calculation

) if normal force N is applied beyond the distance between the
resultants if firces in reinforcement S and S
'
(drawing 3.36,), i.. at e
'
> h0
a
'
based on condition
N e Rbbx(h0 0,5x) + RscA
'
s(h0 a) (3.136)
at that, the compressed zone height x is determined from formula

b R
N A R A R
x
b
s sc s s

=
'
. (3.137)
if the obtained from calculation from formula (3.137) value x > Rh0,
then x =Rh0 is plugged into condition (3.136) where R is found form
table 3.2.
at < 0 section durav=bility is checked based on condition (3.134).

at symmetrical reinforcement the durability ireespective of value e is
checled based on condition (3.134).
note. if at e
'
> h0 - a
'
height of compressed zone determined without
consideration of compressed reinforcement,
b R
N A R
x
b
s s

= is less than 2
'
, the design
carrying capacity can be increased to some extent by performing calulation using
formulae (3.136) and (3.137) without consideration of compressed reinforcement.

3.70. required amount of longitudinal reinforcement elements is
determined in the following way:
) at e
'
h0 -
'
one determines the cross-sectional area of
reinforcement and S and S
'
respectively from formulae:
;
) (
0
a h R
e N
A
s
s

= (3.138)
;
) (
0
a h R
Ne
A
s
s

=
(3.139)
) at e
'
> h0 - a
'
one determines the cross-sectional area of
reinforcement s from formula:
;
0
s
sc
s
s
b
s
R
R
A
R
N R bh
A +
+
=

(3.140)
where is found using formula
= , 2 1 1
m
(3.141)
here .
) (
2
0
0
bh R
a h A R Ne
b
s sc
m

= (3.142)
At that, condition m R (see table 3.2) shall be satisfied. otherwise
the cross-section of compressed reinforcements
'
s
A shall be increased, a
higher class concrete shall be used of the section dimensions increased.
if m<0, the cross-sectional area of tensioned reinforcement
s
A is
found from formula (3.138).
the area of symmetrical reinforcement irrespective of value
'
e is
selected using formula (3.138).
not. at e
'
> h0 a
'
the required amount of reinforcement elements determined
from formula (3.138) can be decreased if value , determined from formula (3.141) at
,
2
0
bh R
Ne
b
m
= turns less than
0
2 h a /
'
.in this case the cross-sectional area of tensioned
reinforcements As is determined from formula (3.140), using the said value at
S
A =
0.

3.71. Calculation of inclined sections of tensioned elements at the
impact of transverse forces is carried out in similar way to calculation of
flexural elements in accordance with paras 3.30 - 3.35. at that value of
transverse force supported by concrete in the inclined section Qb as well as
the right part of condition (3.49) is divided by coefficient

A R
N
bt
nt
5 , 1
1+ = . (3.143)
value Mb related to Qb is divided by the same coefficient nt.



Example 35. Given: tensioned stanchion of a two-stanchioned column
with cross-section with dimensions b = 500 mm, h=200 mm; a = a'= 40
mm; longitudinal reinforcement of class 400 (Rs= Rs=355 MPa); its
cross-sectional area As=A's=982 mm
2
(225); concrete of class 25 (Rb =
14,5 MPa); longitudinal tensile force N = 44 kN; maximum moment of
flection m = 43 kN.
It is required to check the durability of normal section
C a l c u l a t i o n. h0 = 200 40 = 160 mm.
977
10 44
10 43
3
6
0
=
= =
N
M
e mm;
1037 40
2
200
977
2
0
= + = + = a
h
e e mm;
917 40
2
200
977
2
0
= + = + = a
h
e e mm.
as the reinforcement is symmetrical, the durability will be checked
using condition (3.134):
RsAs(h0 a
'
) = 40) - 982(160 355 = H 10 41,8
6
<Ne'

= 1037 10 44
3
=
= 10 45,6
6
N
.
mm, i.. condition (3.134) is not satisfied.
as e'=1037>h0-a'=120 mm, and the hieght of compressed zone
determined without consideration of compressed reinforcement i.. equal to
=
=
b R
N A R
x
b
s s
42
500 5 . 14
10 44 982 355
3
=

= , is less than 2'

= 40 2 = 80 mm,
according to the note to para 3.69 one should check the durability based on
condition (3.136), taking = 42 mm and
s
A =0:
6
0
10 3 , 42 ) 42 5 , 0 160 ( 42 500 5 , 14 ) 5 , 0 ( = = x h bx R
b
n.mm > Ne=
= 10 40,4 917 10 44
6 3
= n.mm,
i.. the durability is ensured.
Example 36. Given: rectangular section with dimensions b = 1000
mm, h = 200 mm; a = a' = 35 mm; concrete of class 15 (Rb = 8,5 MPa);
longitudinal reinforcement of class 400 (Rs= Rsc = 355 MPa); cross-
sectional area of reinforcement
s
A = 1005 mm
2
(516); tensile force N =
=160 kN; moment of flection m = 116 kN..
It is required to determine the cross-setional area of reinforcement S.
C a l c u l a t i o n. h0 = 200 35 = 165 mm;

; 725
10 160
10 116
3
6
0
=
= =
N
M
e
660 35
2
200
725
2
0
= + = + = a
h
e e mm;
790 35
2
200
725
2
0
= + = + = a
h
e e mm.
as e' = 790 mm > h0 - a' =165 - 35 = 130 mm, one can determine the
required cross-sectional area of tensioned reinforcement according to para
3.70,.
Calculating value
256 , 0
165 1000 5 , 8
130 1005 355 660 10 160 ) (
2
3
2
0
0
=

=

=
bh R
a h A R Ne
b
s sc
m
.
as 0 < m < R = 0,39 (see table 3.2), value As is determined from formula
(3.140). for that purpose, one shoual calculate = 1 -
= = 256 , 0 2 1 1 2 1
m
301 , 0 = .
2645 1005
355
10 160 5 , 8 165 1000 301 , 0
3
0
= +
+
=
+
+
=
s
sc
s
s
b
s
R
R
A
R
N R bh
A

mm
2
.
taking As = 3079 mm
2
(528).
Example 37. Given: tensioned stanchion of a two-stachined column
with sectional dimensions b = 500 mm, h = 200 mm; a =a' = 40 mm;
concrete of class 25 (Rbt = 1,05 MPa); stirrups located at ee\lement faces,
made of reinforcement of class 400 (Rsw = 285 MPa); normla tensile
force N = 44 kN; transverse force Q = 130 kN; clearance between the
bulkheads of two-stanchioned column l = 600 mm.
It is required to determine diameter and spacing ot stirrups.
C a l c u l a t i o n. h0 = 200 - 40 =160 mm. Calculation is carried out
according to para 3.33, with cosideration of recommendations of para 3.71.
using formula (3.143) one can determine coefficient nt , taking =
= bh = 200 500 =100000 mm
2
:
nt = . 279 , 1
100000 05 , 1 5 , 1
44000
1
5 , 1
1 =

+ = +
A R
N
bt

As within the bulkheads the transverse force is constant, the projection length on the
inclined section is taken equal to the maximum possible one, i..
= max = 3h0 = 160 3 = 480 mm < l = 600 mm.
at = /h0 = 3 and 0 = 2 < 3 calculating
= 548 , 1
160 500 05 , 1
130000
875 , 0 2 1875 , 0
3
5 , 1
1875 , 0
5 , 1
0
0
=

= = < = + = +
bh R
Q
a
bt
.

therefore, the required intensity of stirrups can be determined from formula
(3.48),at that the value 1,5 characterising value Qb is divided by nt =
1,279:
405
2 75 , 0
279 , 1 3
5 , 1
548 , 1
500 05 , 1
75 , 0
5 . 1
0
=
nt
bt sw
b R q n/mm.
maximum allowable spacing, according to para 3.35 equals
4 , 103
130000
160 500 05 , 1
2 2
0
max ,
=

= =
Q
bh R
s
bt
w
mm.
taking he stirrups spacing sw = 100 mm < sw,max, and then
1 , 142
285
100 405
=
= =
sw
w sw
sw
R
s q
A mm
2
.
taking two stirrups with diameter 10 mm (Asw=157 mm
2
).

CALCULATION OF NORMAL SECTIONS BASED ON
NON-LINEAR DEFORMATIONAL MODEL

3.72. At carrying out durability calculation, forces and deformations
in normal section are determined based on non-linear deformational model
which uses equations of equilibrium of external forces and internal stresses
in element section as well as the following stipulations:
- distribution of relative deformations of concrete and reinforcement
along the element section is taken linear (Bernoulli hypothesis, see Drawing
3.39);
- relation between axial compressing stresses of concrete
b
and its
relative deformations
b
is taken in the form of a bilinear diagram (Drawing
3.37), according to which stresses
b
are determined in the following way:
at 0
b

b1,red

b
= E
b,red

b
;
at
b1,red
<
b

b2

b
= R
b
;
where E
b,red
transformed modulus of deformation of the concrete equal to
E
b,red
= R
b
/
b1,red
;
b1,red
= 0,0015;
b2
= 0,0035;

R
b
see Table 2.2;
- concrete resistance in the tensioned zone is not considered (i.. one
takes
b
= 0) except for calculation of concrete elements specified in para
1.4, as well as those concrete elements in which no cracks are permitted;

in these elements, relation between axial tensile stresses of concrete
bt
and
its relative deformations are also taken in the form of bilinear diagram with

b,red

b
b
R
arctg E
b1,red b2
b

Drawing 3.37. Bilinear diagram of the state of compressed concrete

b1,red
being substituted with
bt1,red
= 0,0008;
b2
with

bt2
= 0,00015; E
b,red

with E
bt,red
= R
bt
/
bt1,red
, where R
bt
see Table 2.2;
- relation between reinforcement stresses
s
and its relative
deformations
s
is taken in the form of a bilinear diagram (Drawing 3.38)
according to which stresses
s
are taken equal to:
at 0 <
s
<
s0

s
=
s
E
s
;
at
s0

s
<
s2

s
= R
s
,
where
s0
= R
s
/E
s
;
R
s
see Table 2.6;
E
s
= 2
.
10
5
MPa;
s2
= 0,025.
s
s
s2
arctg E
s
R
s0

Drawing 3.38. State diagram of tensioned reinforcement


3.73. Transition from stress diagram in the concrete to generalized
internal stresses is recommended to be carried out using the procedure of
numerical integration for normal section. For this purpose, in the direction
of the plane of flection (normal neutral axis), a normal section is divided
into segments of small width, and stresses in them are taken to be uniformly
distributed and corresponding to deformations at the level of the middle of
the segment.
In general case, the position of neutral axis and maximum
deformations (Drawing 3.39) are determined from equations of equilibrium
of internal and external forces:
M
x
=
bi
A
bi
Z
bxi
+
sj
A
sj
Z
sxj
; (3.144)
M
y
=
bi
A
bi
Z
byi
+
sj
A
sj
Z
syj;
(3.145)
N =
bi
A
bi
+
sj
A
sj ;
(3.146)
where M
x
and M
y
moments of external forces in relation to the chosen
axes of reference, acting in the planes of axes and y
respectively;
m
a
x
m
a
x
h
b
i
y
1
x
2
b
1
,
r
e
d
b
i

R
b

s
j
Z
Z
y
b
x
i
bi
A
)
x
byi
x
y
A
x
sj
b
i
s
j
b
1
,
r
e
d
s
E

/
R
s
s
bi
a)
b

/
2
Z
Z
b
x
i
y
b

/
2
i
A
x
byi
y

b
i
b
s
R

i
s
j
b
i

concrete stress diagram
strain diagram
strain diagram
concrete stress diagram
conventional neutral axis
reinforcement
stress diagram

Drawing 3.39. Strain and stress diagrams of a section normal to longitudinal axis
of a reinforced concrete element in general case of durability calculation
) two-valued strain diagram
) one-valued strain diagram

A
bi,
Z
bi
, Z
byi
,
bi
area, coordinates of the gravity center of the i
th
segment
of concrete and stress at the level of its gravity center.
A
sj,
, Z
sx,j
,

Z
syj
,

sj
area, coordinates of the gravity center of the i
th
reinforcement rod and stress in it.
Stresses
bi
and
sj
are determined in accordance with diagrams
shown in Drawings 3.37 and 3.38.
Tensile stresses of reinforcement
sj
and of concrete
bi
as well as
longitudinal tensile force N are recommended to consider in equations
(3.144) - (3.146) with the minus sign.
Axes of reference and y are recommended to be drawn through the
gravity center of the concrete section.
3.74. Durability calculation of normal sections of reinforced concrete
elements is carried out based on the following conditions

b,max

b,ult
; (3.147)
|
s,max
|
s,ult ,
(3.148)
where
b,max
and
s,max
relate deformations of the most compressed
concrete fiber and the most tensioned rod of
reinforcement respectively from the impact of
external loads determined form solutions of equations
(3.144) (3.146);
b,ult
and
s,ult
limit values of relative deformations of compressed
concrete and tensioned reinforcement respectively,
taken according to para 3.75.
For flexural and eccentrically compressed concrete elements in which
no cracks are permitted, the calculation is performed with consideration of
tensioned concrete behavior in the element cross-section based on condition
|
bt,max
|
bt,ult
(3.149)
where
bt,max
relative deformation of the most tensioned concrete fiber
determined from the solution of equations (3.144) (3.146);
bt,ult
limit value of relative deformation of tensioned concrete taken
according to para 3.75.

3.75. The limit values of relative deformations of concrete
b,ult
(
bt,ult
)
are taken according to the two-valued strain diagram (compression and
tension) in the element cross-section being equal to
b2
(
bt2
) (see para 3.72).
At eccentrical compression or tension and distribution concrete
deformation of the same sign in the element cross-section, the limit values
of relative deformations of concrete
b,ult
(
bt,ult
) are determined depending
on the relation of relative deformations of concrete on the opposite sides of
the section 1
2
1
<
from formulae ; 10 15 35
4
2
1
,

ult b
(3.150)

5
2
1
,
10 5 15

ult bl
. (3.151)
The limit value of relative deformation of tensioned reinforcement
s
,
ult
is taken equal to 0,025.
3.76. Calculation based on non-linear deformational model is carried
out in a computer-assisted way.
If two moments m
and m
act along both axes of reference and y in

normal section and there is a compressing normal force, the computer
software shall be developed on the basis of the following algorithm:
1. the direction of neutral axis is set: in the first approximation, this
direction is determined as for elastic material, i.. the inclination angle of
the neutral axis to reference axis y is taken equal to . arctg
x
y
y
x
M
M
I
I
=
2. the character of strain diagram is determined by comparing external
normal force N and internal stress N, determined from formula (3.146) at
values
b
in extreme points being equal to
b2
and 0. At N > N
c
the
diagram is one-valued, at N < N
c
the diagram is two-valued.
3. At two-valued strain diagram, one should use step-by-step
approximations to choose the height of compressed zone x so that
congruence (3.146) is fulfilled; at that, in the extreme compressed point
b
=
b2
, is taken, deformations of compressed concrete of each i
th
segment are
taken equal to
bi =
b2
y
bi
/x, and deformations of each j
th
reinforcement rod -
si
=
b2
y
sj
/x, where y
bi
and y
sj
- distances from the neutral axis to the gravity
center of the i
th
concrete segment and the j
th
reinforcement rod, respectively.
In case
s,max
> 0,025, one takes
s,max
=0,025, and then
bi
=
s,max
y
bi
/(h
0
x),
s,j
=
s,max
y
si
/(h
0
x), where h
0
distance between the most tensioned
reinforcement rod and the most compressed point of concrete in the

direction normal to the neutral axis. Deformations of tensioned
reinforcement are taken with the minus sign.
4. At one-valued strain diagram, one should use step-by-step
approximations to choose the ratio of deformations in extreme points
=
1
/
2
< 1 so that congruence (3.146) is fulfilled; at that, in the extreme
compressed point, deformation
b,ult
is taken as determined from formula
(3.150), compressed concrete deformations of every i
th
segment are taken
equal to )] 1 ( [
,
+ =
h
y
i
ult b bi
, and deformation of every j
th
rod -
)] 1 ( [
,
+ =
h
y
si
ult b sj
, where y
i
and y
si
distances from the least
compressed point to the gravity centers of the i
th
concrete segment and the
j
th
reinforcement rod in direction normal to the neutral axis, h see Drawing
3.39,.
5. Formulae (3.144) and (3.145) are used to determine internal forces
M
x.ult
and M
y,ult
. If these two moments turn to be greater or smaller than the
corresponding external moments m
and m
in relation to the same axes,

then the section durability is deemed to be ensured or not ensured.
If one of the moments (for instance, M
y,ult
) is less than the
corresponding external moment (i.. M
y,ult
< m
) and the other one is greater

(i.. M
x,ult
> M
x
), another inclination angle of the neutral axis is set
(greater than the one taken previously), and a similar calculation is carried
out again.
AT the impact of tensile force or its absence, calculation can be
carried out in a similar way. At calculation of concrete elements with
consideration of tensioned concrete behavior, values
b2
are replaced with
bt2
,
b,ult
with
bt,ult
(see paras 3.72 and 3.75).

ELEMENTS EXPOSED TO BENDING WITH TORSION

RECTANGULAR SECTION ELEMENTS

Calculation OF COMBINED IMPACT OF TORqUE MOMENT
AND
MOMENT OF FLECTION
3.77. Calculation OF THE ELEMENT durability between spatial
sections for the impact of torque moment T is carried out based on
condition

T 0,1R
b
b
2
h, (3.152)
where b and h smaller and greater dimensions of the element cross-
section, respectively
3.78. at combined action of torque and bending moments, one
analyzes a spatial section with a compressed side at the element face
perpendicular ti the plane of moments of flection (drawing 3.40).
Calculation of this section is performed based ont condition

2
0
0
1

M
M
T T , (3.153)
AS1
ASW1
b
h
R

A
S
SW1
S
1
q C
SW
C
C/2
C/2
CSW 2
SW C 2
SW C = C
1

drawing 3.40. schematic representation of forces in spatial sections at
calculation of the impact of torque and bending moments; tensioned
reinforcement at he lower boundary of the element

where M0 -the limit moment of flection supported by the normal section
and determined according to para 3.14;
T0 - the limit torque moment supported by the spatial section and
determined from formula
T0 = Tsw1 + Ts1 , (3.154)

Tsw1 - torque moment supported by crosswise reinforcement located
at the tensioned face within the spatial section, equal to
Tsw1= 0,9qsw11ch, (3.155)
Ts1 - torque moment supported by longitudinal tensioned
reinforcement of the spatial section, equal to
Ts1 = 0,9RsAs1
c
b
h. (3.156)
in formulae (3.155) and (3.156):
c projection length of the compressed side of the spatial section to
the longitudinal axis of the element;
1 =
b h
b
+ 2
; (3.157)
b h - width of the face tensioned from the bending and the face
perpendicular to it, respectively (see drawing 3.40);
qsw1 =
w
sw
sw
s
A
R
1
; (3.158)
Asw1 and sw cross-sectional area if one crosswise rod at the tensioned
from the bending face with width b and spacing of these rods;
As1 cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement AT the face
tensioned from bending, with width b.
value RsAs1 in formula (3.156) is takenno greater than value 2qsw1b,
and value qsw1 in formula (3.155) is takenno greater than value 1,5RsAs1/b.
torque moment T and moment of flection M in condition(3.153) are
takenin cross-section located in the middle of projection length c along the
longitudinal axis of the element.
in general case, Calculation is performed for spatial sections with
various values c, takenno greater than 2h + b and no greater than
1
2
b .
spatial sections are recommended to locate in the following way:
) for whole beams or beams built into supports (cross beams) as well
as for cantilevers, the spatil section is located at the support;
) for any elements loaded with spot loads and torque moments, the
spatial sections are located at the force application points from the
side of the area with large torque moments (drawing 3.41).
For these cases, at calculation of the limit torque moment T0, in
formulae (3.155) and (3.156) it is recommended to use the projection length
value c=c0 corresponding t the minimum value T0, but at that, moments T
and M are determined based on the projection length being equal to c=(1,2

-0,4Mmax/M0)c0 but no greater than c0, where Mmax maximum moment
of flection in the beginning of the spation section.
value c0 is determined from formula
c0 =
( )
1
1
2
sw
s s
q
b h A R +
, (3.159)
with fulfillment of the said constraints on values consideration RsAs1 and
qsw1.
Q
1
1
T
1
C/2
1
M
T
C
F
1
T
2
Q
2 Q
T
2
T
C/2
M
2
C
F
2
M

Drawing 3.41. location of design spatial sections in a beam loaded with spot loads
1, 2 dsign spatial section;
M1,T1, Q1 design forces for spatial section 1;
M2, T2, Q2 same for spatial section 2

in particular:
- at RsAs1 2qsw1b formula (3.159) takes the form c0=b
1
2
, and then
T0 =1,8qsw1bh
1
2 ; (3.160)
- at RsAs1<2qsw1b<3RsAs value T0 after substituting c = c0 equals
T0 =1,8bh
b h
q A R
sw s s
+ 2
1 1
; (3.161)
) for elements loaded with uniformly distributed load, if there si a
torque moment in a span section with the largest moment of
flection, the middle of projection c is located in the said cross-

section; in this case, the most unfavorable value c is takenequal to
c0.

Calculation of combined impact of moment of flection and transverse force

3.79. durability Calculation of an element between spatioal section to
the impact of a torque moment T and a transverse force Q is carried out
based on condition
T T01

01
1
Q
Q
, (3.162)
where T01 limit torque moment supported bu the element between spatial
sections and takenequal to the right part of condition (3.152);
Q01- limit transverse force supported by the concrete between inclined
sections and takenequal to the right part of condition (3.43) para
3.30.
forces T and Q are takenin normal section at distance 2b + h from the
support where b and h see drawing 3.40.
3.80. at combined action of a torque moment and a transverse force
one shall analyze a spatial section with a compressed side at the element
face which is parallel to the plane of bending moment (i.. with a width h,
drawing 3.42)
Calculation of such section is carried out based on condition
T T0

0
1
Q
Q
, (3.163)
where Q0 limit transverse force supported by inclined section and
takenequal to the right part of condition (3.44) para 3.31;
T0 - limit torque moment supported by spatial section and determnied
from formula
T0 = Tsw2 + Ts2; (3.164)
Tsw2 torque moment supported by crosswise tensioned reinforcement
located at one of the faces with width h within the spatial
section, equal to
Tsw2 = 0,9qsw22cb; (3.165)
Ts2 torque moment supported by longitudinal reinforcementlocated
at one of the faces with width h, equal
Ts2 = 0,9 b
c
h
A R
s s 2
. (3.166)
in formulae (3.165) and (3.166):

c projection length of a compressed side of the psatial section to the
longitudinal axis of the element
2 =
h b
h
+ 2
; (3.167)
qsw2 =
w
sw sw
s
A R
2
; (3.168)
Asw2 and sw cross-sectional area of one crosswise rod at the face
h
b
A
SW2
A
S2
q

c
SW
S
W
2
S
W
R A
s
s2
C/2
C/2
C
C / 2
SW
C / 2
SW
2
C = C

Drawing 3.42.Shcematic representation of forces in spatial sections at
calculation of the impact of torque moment and transverse force; tensioned
reinforcement and lateral face of the element

with width h , and spacing of these rods;
As2 - cross-sectional area of longitudinal tensioned reinforcement
located at one of the faces with width h.
value RsAs2 in formula (3.166) is takenno greater than value 2qsw2h,
and value qsw2 in formula (3.165) is takenno greater than value 1,5RsAs2/h.
torque moment T and transverse force Q in condiition (3.163) is
determined in normal section located in the middle of projection length c
along the longitudinal axis of the element.
In general case, Calculation is performed for spatial sections with
various values of c takenno greater than 2b + h and no greater than h
2
2
.

value c in formulae (3.165) and (3.166) is permitted to be calculated
from formula
c =
( )
2
2
2
sw
s s
q
h b A R +
(3.169)
with fulfillment of the said constraints on consideration of values RsAs2 and
qsw2; at that, values Q and Q0 are determined according to para 3.31 with
account for values c takenaccording to para 3.32, and force T is takenas
maximum one at the isegment in view.
At using value c orresponding to formula (3.169), value T0 can be
calculated from formulae:
at RsAs2 2qsw2h T0 = 1,8qsw2 bh
2
2 ;
at RsAs2 < 2qsw2h 3RsAs2 T0 = 1,8bh
h b
q A R
sw s s
+ 2
2 2
;
at 2qsw2>3RsAs2 T0=1,8Rs As2b
2
5 , 1 .


Example 38. Given: an end frame flooring joist of a multistoreyed
industrial building loaded with uniformly distributed load q = 154,4 kN/
and uniformly distributed torque moments t = 34,28 kN./; cross-section
of the fllooring joist at the support see drawing 3.43,a; torque moments
diagram from vertical loads see drawing 3.43,; bending moments and
transverse forces diagrams from the most unfavorable combination of
vertical loads and wind load for the support section see drawing 3.43,
and ; bending moments diagram from the most unfavorable combination of
vertical loads for the span section see drawing 3.43,; concrete of class
B25 (Rb=14,5 MP, Rbt=1,05 MP), longitudinal and crosswise
reinforcement of class A400 (Rs=355 MPa, Rsw=285 MPa).

20
50
2
5
0
3
0
0
5
0
4
5
155
8
0
0
2 20
6
8
300
50
20
50 50
6
0
a)
300
1
0
0
2,71
245
2 22
460
M = 321 max
49
M ,kH
Q ,kH
2,71
2,45
2,98
100
3 32
490
14
84
2,45
M
max
M,kH
T ,kH
T
84
)
)
)
)

Drawing 3.43. To example 38
It is required to check the element durability to the impact of torque
and bending moments as well as to combined impact of torque moments
and transverse forces.
C a l c u l a t i o n. the section is viewed as a rectangular one, not
considering the flooring joist flane in reserve. dimensions of this section
are taken equal to b= 300 mm, h= 800 mm.
Calculations are performed according to paras 3.77-3.80.
verifying condition (3.152) for the impact of maximum torque
moment T = 84 kN
.
.
0,1Rbb
2
h =
6 2
10 4 , 104 800 300 5 , 14 1 , 0 =
.
mm = 104,4 kN
.
> T = 84
kN
.
,
i.. condition is met.
now one should check the spatial section with a compressed side at the
lower face located ta the support section to the cobimned impact of torque
and bending moments based on condition (3.153).
determining according to para 3.19 the limit bending moment.
from drawing 3.43, one can find: As1 = 2413 mm
2
(332),
1
'
s
A =
1388 mm
2
(220+222), a' = 68 mm; h0 = 800 60 = 740 mm. from
formula (3.16) one has
x=
b R
A R A R
b
s sc s s 1 1
'
=
300 5 , 14
) 1388 2413 ( 355

=83,6mm < Rh0 = 720 531 , 0 =
382,3mm.

Then
M0 = Rbbx(h0 - 0,5x) + ( ) '
0
'
a h A R
s sc
= ( ) + 6 , 83 5 , 0 740 6 , 83 300 5 , 14
+ ( )
6
10 585 68 740 1388 355 = .mm.
Now one can determine the limit torque moment T0.
horizontal crosswise rods according to drawing 3.43,a 14 and
spaced at sw = 100 mm. then
qsw1 =
w
sw sw
s
A R
1
=
100
154 285
= 439 H/mm.
1 =
b h
b
+ 2
=
300 800 2
300
+
= 0,158.
as RsAs1 = 2413 355 = 856620 n > 2qsw1b = 300 439 2 = =263400 n,
value T0 is determined from formula (3.160)
T0 = 1,8qsw1bh
1
2 = 158 , 0 2 800 300 439 8 , 1 =
6
10 6 , 106 n.mm =
=106,6 kN.,
nd moments M and T are determined at =
0
0
max
4 , 0 2 , 1 c
M
M
=
=
1 0
2
4 , 0 2 , 1
=
158 , 0
2
300
585
490
4 , 0 2 , 1

= 923 mm = 0,923 m,
i.e. m = M Q/2 +
8
2
qc
= 490 - 460
2
923 , 0
+
8
923 , 0 4 , 154
2
= 294,2
kN.,
T = T - t
2
c
= 84 34,3
2
923 , 0
= 68,2 kN..
T0
2
0
1

M
M
= 106,6
2
585
2 , 294
1

= 92,1 kN. > T = 68,2 kN.,

i.e. durability with regard to the combined impact of bending and torque
moments at the support is ensured.
now one can check the durability of spatial section with a compressed
side at a lateral face, locating this section at the support. first one can verify
condiiton (3.162), taking, according to the aforesaid, T01 = 104,4 kN. and,
having calculated from condition (3.43) Q01 = 0,3Rbbh0 = 740 300 5 , 14 3 , 0
= 965700 = 965,7 kN.
values T and Q are determined in the section at distance a = 2b + h =
300 2 + 800 = 1400 mm = 1,4 m from the support, i.e
T = T ta = 84 4 , 1 3 , 34 = 36 kN.;

Q = Q qa = 460 4 , 1 4 , 154 = 243,8 kN..
hen
T01

01
1
Q
Q
= 104,4

7 , 965
8 , 243
1 = 78 kN. > T = 36,0 kN.,
i.e condition (3.162) is met.
from drawing 3.43, one can find As2 = 804 + 314 +380 = 1498 mm
2

(32 + 20 + 22).
spacing and diameter of vertical stirrups are the same as for horizontal
rods, so qsw2 = qsw1 = 439 n/mm.
as RsAs2 = 1498 355 = 531790 n < 2qsw2h = 800 439 2 = 702400 n,
value T0 equals
T0 = 1,8bh
h b
q A R
sw s s
+ 2
2 2
=
800 300 2
439 531790
800 300 8 , 1
+

=
6
10 4 , 176 n.mm
= 176,4 kN..
determining acording to para 3.31 value Q and value Q0 as the right
part of condition (3.44).
Mb = 1,5Rbtbh0
2
=
2
740 300 05 , 1 5 , 1 =
6
10 7 , 258 n.mm.
with two-part stirrups qsw = 2 qsw2 = 439 2 = 878 n/mm.
one can determine the most unfavorable value c according to para
3.32, taking q1 = 100 kN/. as
b R
q
bt
sw
=
300 05 , 1
878
= 2,787 > 2, value equals

=
1
75 , 0 q q
M
sw
b
+
=
100 878 75 , 0
10 7 , 258
6
+

= 584 mm.
taking 0 = = 584 mm < 2h0, one has
Q0 =
c
M
b
+ 0,75qsw0 =
584
10 7 , 258
6
+ 584 878 75 , 0 = 827550 n;

Q = Q q1/2 = 460 - 2 / 584 , 0 100 = 430,8 kN;
T = T t/2 = 2 / 584 , 0 3 , 34 84 = 0 , 74 kN
.
.
verifying condition (3.163)
T0

0
1
Q
Q
= 176,4

5 , 827
8 , 430
1 = 90,8 kN
.
> T = 74 kN
.
,
i.e. durability at combined impact of bending moments and transverse
forces is ensured.
As one can see from drawings 3.43, and , in normal section with
the largest span bending moment there is a torque moment, so one should
check the spatial section which has the middle of its projection located in

this normal section, to the impact of moments M = 321 kN
.
and T =
=84
45 , 2
45 , 2 71 , 2
= 8,9 kN
.

At that, the tensioned side of the spatial section is located at the lower
face.
now one can determine the limit bending moment M0. for this part of
the flooring joist the intermediate upper rod 32 is broken off, therefore
according to drawing 3.43,a one has
1 s
A = 1609 mm
2
(232); a = 60 mm;
As1 = 1388 mm
2
(220+222); a = 68 mm; h0 = 800 68 =732 mm.
height of the compressed zone equals
x=
b R
A R A R
b
s sc s s
'
1 1

=
( )
300 5 , 14
1609 1388 355

< 0,
therefore, value m0 is determined from formula (3.19):
0 = ( ) '
0 1
a h A R
s s
= ( ) 60 732 1388 355 =
6
10 1 , 331 n
.
mm = 331,1 kN
.

horizontal crosswise rods 14 in this part of the flooring joist have the
spacing \ sw = 200 mm; hence
qsw1 =
w
sw sw
s
A R
1
=
200
154 285
= 219,5 n/mm.
as Rs As1= 1388 355 = 492740 n > 2qsw1b = 300 5 , 219 2 =
=131700 n,
value T0 is determined from formula (3.160):
T0 = 1,8qsw1bh
1
2 = 158 , 0 2 800 300 5 , 219 8 , 1 =
6
10 3 , 53 n
.
mm =
=53,3 kN
.
.
verifying condition (3.153)
T0
2
0
1

M
M
= 53,3
2
1 , 331
321
1
= 13,06 kN
.
> T = 8,9 kN
.
,
i.e. durability of this section is ensured.

CALCULATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
ELEMENTS FOR THE LOCAL IMPACT OF LOADS

CALCULATION OF LOCAL COMPRESSION

3.81. Calculation of local compression (bearing) for elements in the
absence of lateral reinforcement is carried out based on condition
N Rb,locAb,loc, (3.170)

where N local compressing force from an external load;
Ab,loc area of application of compressing force (bearing area);
coefficient taken equal to:
at unifromaly distributed local load over the bearing area 1,0;
at non-uniformly distributed local load ver the bearing area (under
the ends of beams, girders, joists etc,) 0,75;
Rb,loc design compression strength of concrete at the local load impact
Rb,loc =bRb (3.171)
where b = 0,8
loc b
b
A
A
,
max ,
, (3.172)
but no less than 2,5 and no less than 1,0;
Ab,max maximum design area set according to the following rules:
- gravity centers of areas Ab,loc and Ab,max coincide;
- boundaries of design area Ab,max are removed from each oh the
area Ab,loc sides to the distance equal to the dimension of these
sides (drawing 3.44);

- if there are several loads, design areas are limited with lines
passing through the center
l<a+2a
)
a
1
a
1
2
)
a
a
a
5
a
a
)
a a
2
1
1
2
3
4
2
a
2
a
1
1
a
2
3
2
2
1
a)
3
1
4
2
a
2
1
2
4
l<a+2a
1
a
1 2 2 1
1
a
2
3
2
2
a
a
c
a
2
a
a
a
a
a
1 2
4
2
a
2 1
a
2
3
a
2 1
a
5
2
e)
3
2
)
4
2
1
)
a
4
1
c
<
a
2
2
3
4
2
l /2 l /2
1 2
2

drawing 3.44. schematic for calculation of local compresseion for elements, at
location of the local load
far from the element edges; over the whole width of the element; at the edge
(abutment) of the element over the whole of its width; at the corner of the element;
at one edge of the element;
e close to one edge of the element; if there are several loads
1 element exposed to the local load; 2 bearing area Ab,loc; 3 maximum
designarea Ab,max; 4 gravity center of areas Ab,loc and Ab,max; 5 minimum zone
of reinforcement with meshes, with lateral reinforcement being considered in
calculation

- of distances between the application points of two adjacent loads
(drawing 3.44, ).

note. at local loads from beams, girders and other elements exposed to bending,
the support depth taken into account during the calculation at determining Ab,loc and
Ab,max is taken no greater than 20 .


3.82. Calculation of local compression for elements with lateral
reinforcement in the form of welded meshes is carried out based on
condition
N Rbs,loc Ab,loc, (3.173)
where Rbs,loc transformed with consideration of lateral reinforcement in
the local compression zone design compression strength of the
concrete determined from formula
Rbs,loc = Rb,loc + 2s,xyRs,xys,xy. (3.174)
here: s,xy =
loc b
ef loc b
A
A
,
, .
; (3.175)
Ab,loc,ef area enclosed by the contour of the meshes of lateral
reinforcement counting by their extreme rods and taken in
formula (3.175) no greater than Ab,max;
Rs,xy - design tensile strength of lateral reinforcement;
s,xy reinforcement factor determined from formula
s,xy =
s A
l A n l A n
ef loc b
y sy y x sx x
, ,
+
; (3.176)
nx , Asx , lx number of rods, cross-sectional area and rod length, counting
in the axes of extreme rods in direction x;
ny, Asy, ly same in direction y:
s spacing of meshes of lateral reinforcement.
values Rb,loc, Ab,loc, and N are taken accoridng to para 3.81.
values of local compressing force supported by the element with
lateral reinforcement (right part of condition 3.173) is taken no greater than
double value of local compressing force supported by the element wihtout
lateral reinforcement (right part of condition 3.170).
meshes of lateral reinforcement are located within design area Ab,max.
at that, for schematics of drawings 3.44 and meshes of lateral
reinforcement are located over the area with dimensions in each direction
no less than the total of two mutually perpendicular sides.
If the loading area is located at the edge of the element (see drawing
3.44,-,), at determining values Ab,loc and Ab,loc,ef the area occupied
by the protective layer of concrete for the extreme rods of meshes is not
taken into consideration.
The meshes are located:
- at the element thickness being greater than the double greater
dimension of the leadng area within the double dimension of the
loading area;

- at the element thickness being less than the double greater
dimension of the loading area within the element thickness.
- meshes of lateral reinforcement shall meet structual requirements
specified in para 5.27.


Example 39. Given: steel stanchion supported by the footing and
centrally loadedwith force N=1000 kN (drawing 3.45); footing made of
concrete of class B10 (Rb = 6,0 MPa).
b 2
N =1000 kH
C1
1
C
1
1
1-1
1
0
0
6
=
6
0
0
b

=
8
0
0
b
200 200 300
c

=
2
0
0
2
0
0
c
=
2
0
0
1
l =1007=700
l

=
1
0
0
6
=
6
0
0
y
x

Drawing 3.45. To calculation example 39

It is required to check the concrete durability under the stanchion for
the local compression.
C a l c u l a t i o n is carried out in accordance with paras 3.81 and
3.82.
design area Ab,max is determined in accordance with drawing 3.44,
e. According to drawing 3.45, one has = 200mm < a1 = 300 mm; b1 =
200 2 200 + = 600 mm; b2 = 300 2 200 + = 700mm; Ab,max = b1b2 =
700 600 = =420000mm
2
:
bearing surface equals Ab,loc = 200 300 = 60000 mm
2
.
Coefficient b equals
b = 0,8
loc b
b
A
A
,
max ,
= 0,8
60000
420000
= 2,12.

then Rb,loc = bRb = 0 , 6 12 , 2 = 12,72 MPa.
verifying condition (3.170), taking = 1,0 as with uniform
distribution of local load:
Rb,loc Ab,loc = 60000 72 , 12 1 = 763200 N = 763,2 kN < N =1000 kN,
i.. local compression strength of the concrete is not provided for, so it
is necessary to apply lateral reinforcement in the form of meshes made of
reinforcement of class B500 with diameter 4 mm, cells 100 100 mm and
height spacing s = 100 mm (Rs,xy = 415 MPa).
checking the durability according to para 3.82. determining coefficient
of lateral reinforcement from formula (3.176). from drawing 3.45 one has:
nx=8, lx = 600 mm; ny = 7; ly = 700 mm; Asx = Asy = 12,6 mm
2
(4);
Ab,loc,ef = 700 600 = 420000 mm
2
; then
s,xy =
s A
l A n l A n
ef loc b
y sy y x sx x
, ,
+
=
100 420000
700 6 , 12 7 600 6 , 12 8
+
= 0,00291.
Coefficient
s,xy
equals
s,xy =
loc b
ef loc b
A
A
,
, ,
=
60000
420000
= 2,65.
transformed design strength of concrete Rbs,loc is determined from
formula (3.174)
Rbs,loc = Rb,loc +2s,xyRs,xys,xy = 12,72 + 00291 , 0 415 65 , 2 2 =
19,12 MPa.
verifying condiiton ( 3.173)
Rbs,locAb,loc = 60000 12 , 19 0 , 1 = 1147200 n = 1147,2 kN > N = 1000
kN,
i.. durability of the concrete is ensured.
the meshes are installed into the depth of 300 2 = 600mm.

CALCULATION OF THE ELEMENTS FOR PUSHING

General provisions

3.83. Calculation OF PUSHING OF THE ELEMENTS IS CARRIED
OUT FOR FLAT REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS (SLABS) AT
THE IMPACT (NORMAL TO THE ELEMENT PLANE) OF LOCAL
FOCUS-APPLIED FORCES A CONCENTRATED FORCE AND A
MOMENT OF FLECTION.

AT PERFORMING calculation OF PUSHING ONE ANALYZES A
DESIGN CROSS-SECTION LOCATED AROUND THE AREA OF
FORCE TRANSMISSION TO THE ELEMENT AT DISTANCE h0 /2
NORMAL TO ITS longitudinal AXIS, WITH TANGENT SHEARING
FORCES FROM THE CONCENTRATED FORCE AND THE MOMENT
OF FLECTION ACTING ON ITS SURFACE.
THE ACTING TANGENT SHEARING FORCES OVER THE
AREA OF THE DESIGN CROSS-SECTION SHALL BE SUPPORTED
BY THE CONCRETE WITH TENSILE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE Rbt
AND THE CROSSWISE REINFORCEMENT LOCATED AT BOTH
SIDES FROM THE DESIGN CROSS-SECTION AT DISTANCE h0 /2
WITH TENSILE STRENGTH OF REINFORCEMENT Rsw.
Design contour of the cross-section is taken: at location of the load
transmission zone inside the flat element a closed one and located around
the load transmission area (Drawing 3.46,), at location of the load
transmission zone at a free edge or a corner of the flat element in the form
of two options: a closed one and located around the load transmission area
and a non-closed one, going from an edge of the flat element (Drawing
3.46,,), in this case one should take into account the least carrying
capacity out of two location options of the design contour if the cross-
section.
e
L
L
e
)
Y
x
2'
x
(X )
1
0
h

/
2
0
1
4
1
1
X
X
h

/
2
x
0x 0
x
0
4
)
5 Y
1
Y
3
L
0
h /2
0
y
Lx
h

/
2
(Y )
3
4
y
L
3
e
h /2
0
0
y
y
h /2
0
Y
1
0
2
)
Y
L
1
0
X y
1
1
5
2'
X
(X )

Drawing 3.46. Schematic representation of design contours of the cross-section at
pushing:

load application zone inside the flat element; , -same,at the edge of a flat
element;
1 load application area; 2 design contour of the cross-section; 2'-second option of
design contour location; 3 gravity center of design contour ( intersection point of
axes X1 and Y1); 4 gravity center of the load application zone (intersection point of
axes X and Y); 5 -boundary (edge) of the flat element.

With moment m
loc
in the application zone of the concentrated load, a
half of this moment is taken into account at calculation of pushing, and the
other one is taken into account while calculating of normal sections with
width including the width of the load transmission zone and depth of
section of the flat element to the both sides of the load transmission zone.
While concentrated moments and force act under strength conditions,
the ratio between the acting concentrated moments m considered at pushing
and the limit ones M
ult
is taken no greater than the ratio between the acting
concentrated force F and the limit ones F
ult
.

Calculation of pushing for elements without crosswise reinforcement

3.84. Calculation of pushing for elements without crosswise
reinforcement exposed to a concentrated force is carried out based on
condition
F R
bt
uh
0
, (3.177)
where F concentrated force from external load;
u perimeter of the design cross-section contour located at distance
0,5h
0
from the boundary of the concentrated force F bearing
surface(Drawing 3.47);
h
0
- effective depth of the element equal to normal value of effective
depths for longitudinal reinforcement in directions of axes x and
y.
At dimensions of rectangular bearing surface ab u=2(a+b+2h
0
).
If the bearing surface is located close to a free end of the slab, in
addition to the said calculation (if the cross-sectional contour does not fall
beyond the free end of the slab) one shall check durability of the non-closed
design cross-section (see Drawing 3.46, ) to the impact of eccentrically
applied concentrated force in relation to the gravity center of the cross-
sectional contour based on condition

I
y e
u
h R
F
bt
0
0
1
+
, (3.178)
u length of the non-closed design section contour, equal to

y x
L L u + = 2 , (3.179)
I moment of inertia of the design section, equal to

( )
;
2
3
2
2
3
u
L L L L
L
I
y x y x x
+ +
= (3.180)
y distance from the gravity center of the design section contour to
the fiber in view, equal to
( )
u
L L L
y
y x x
+
= - for a fiber at a free edge of the slab;
u
L
y
x
2
= - for a fiber at the opposite edge of the slab;
e
0
- eccentricity of the concentrated force as related to the gravity
center of the design section contour, equal to
;
) (
0 0
x
u
L L L
e
y x x
+
= (3.181)
0
distance of the concentrated force application point from a free
edge of the slab;
L
x
L
y
design cross-section contour dimensions, L
y
dimension
parallel to a free edge of the slab.
2
b
h

/
2
a
Y
3
0
F
h /2
0
h
h

/
2
X
0
1
h /2
0
0
M
loc

Drawing 3.47. Schematic for calculation of pushing for reinforced concrete
elements without crosswise reinforcement
1 design cross-section; 2 contour of the design cross-section;
3 contour of the load application zone.

Concentrated force F is taken less loads applied to the opposite edge
of the slab within the area with dimensions exceeding those of bearing
surface by h
0
in all directions.
3.85. Calculation of pushing for elements without crosswise
reinforcement at combined impact of concentrated forces and a moment of
flection is performed based on condition
;
0
h R
W
M
u
F
bt
b
+ (3.182)
where ratio M/W
b
is taken no greater than F/u;
W
b
stiffness moment of contour of the design cross-section;
F, u, h
0
see para 3.84.
Concentrated moment m taken into account in condition (3.182)
equals to a half of the concentrated moment from external load m
loc
.
In a reinforced concrete building frame with flat flooring slabs the
moment m
loc
equals to the total moment of flection in sections of upper and
lower columns abutting the slab in the node in view, and force F is directed
upward.
If the bearing surface is located close to a free edge of the slab, when
the concentrated force is applied eccentrically in relation to the contour of a
non-closed design cross-section, a moment from eccentrical force
application (with its own sign) shall be added to the moment m in condition
(3.182), being equal to Fe
0
, where e
0
see formula (3.181).
With a rectangular bearing surface and closed contour of design
cross-section, value W
b
is determined from formula
;
3
) (
0
0
0

+ +
+
+ = h b
h a
h a W
b
(3.183)
where and b dimensions of bearing surface in the direction of the
moment impact and the direction normal to the moment impact,
respectively.
With a non-closed contour of the design cross-section (see Drawing
3.46,) value W
b
is taken equal to W
b
= I/y, where I and y see para 3.84.
At additional moment M
y
in the direction normal to the direction of
moment M, the left part of condition (3.182) increases by
y b
y
W
M
,
where W
b,y

stiffness moment of the contour of design section in the direction of
moment M
y
; at that, the total
y b
y
b
W
M
W
M
,
+ is also taken no greater than F/u.

Calculation of pushing for elements with crosswise reinforcement

3.86. Calculation of pushing for elements with crosswise
reinforcement at the impact of a concentrated force (Drawing 3.48) is
performed based on condition

ult sw ult b
F F F
, ,
+ , (3.184)
where F
b,ult
right part of condition (3.177);
F
sw,ult
limit force supported by crosswise reinforcement at pushing and
equal to
u q F
sw ult sw
8 , 0
,
= , (3.185)
but taken no greater than F
b,ult,
,
where q
sw
force in crosswise reinforcement per unit of length of the
contour of design cross-section, at uniform distribution of
crosswise reinforcement equal to

w
sw sw
sw
s
A R
q = , (3.186)
A
sw
section area of crosswise reinforcement with spacing s
w
located
within distance 0,5h
0
at both sides from the contour of the design
cross-section (see Drawing 3.48)
s
w
spacing of crosswise rods in the direction of the contour of cross-
section
With uniform distribution of crosswise reinforcement along the
contour of the design cross-section, value u is taken as for concrete design
cross-section according to para 3.84.
With crosswise reinforcement being concentrated at the axes of
bearing surface (cruciform location of crosswise reinforcement, Drawing
3.49), the contour perimeter u for crosswise reinforcement is taken
according to actual lengths of the crosswise reinforcement location area
L
sw,x
and L
sw,y
on design pushing contour [i.. u=2(L
sw,x
+L
sw,y
)].
Crosswise reinforcement is taken into account in calculation with
F
sw,ult
being no less than 0,25F
b,ult
.
Beyond the location of crosswise reinforcement, the calculation of
pushing is carried out according to para 3.48, viewing the contour of design
cross-section at distance 0,5h
0
from the boundary of crosswise
reinforcement location.
At concentrated location of crosswise reinforcement at the axes of
bearing surface, in addition to this, the design contour of the concrete cross-

section is taken along diagonal lines going from the edge of crosswise
reinforcement location (see Drawing 3.49).
Crosswise reinforcement shall meet structural requirements specified
in para 5.26.
3.87. Calculation of pushing for elements with crosswise
reinforcement at combined impact of concentrated force and moment of
flection (see Drawing 3.48) is carried out based on condition
1
, , , ,

+
+
+
ult sw ult b ult sw ult bt
M M
M
F F
F
, (3.187)
where ratio M/(M
b,ult
+ M
sw,ult
) is taken no greater than F/(F
bt,ult
+ F
sw,ult
);


>h /3
>h /3
aa
Y
3
>
1
,
5
h
>1,5h
b
1
0
0
A
>
h

/
3
sw
h /2
0
0
1
0
5
0
1
b
S

<

a
/
4
w
>
h

/
3
sw
A
0
0
2
S < b/4
w
h /2 h /2
0 0
M
F
h

/
2
h

/
2
3
0
0
X
4
h

/
2
h /2
0
0
h
0
h /2 0
<
h

/
2
<h /2
0

Drawing 3.48 Schematic for calculation of pushing for reinforced concrete slabs
with vertical uniformly distributed crosswise reinforcement
1 design cross-section; 2 contour of the design cross-section

3 boundaries of the zone within which crosswise reinforcement is taken
into account during calculation; 4 contour of the design cross-section
without consideration of crosswise reinforcement in the calculation; 5
contour of the load application zone.
h /2
h

/
2
0
0
0
A
1
2
sw A
3
h /2
sw
0
SW,X
L = 2s
W
L
s
w
,
y
=
2
s
w
h

/
2
sW sW
W
s
s
W

Drawing 3.49. Schematic of the design contour of the cross-section during
pushing and with cruciform location of crosswise reinforcement
1 load application area; 2 contour of the design cross-section at consideration of
crosswise reinforcement A
sw
; 3 contour of the design cross-section without
consideration of crosswise reinforcement

F
bt,ult
and F
sw,ult
see para 3.86;
M
b,ult
limit concentrated moment supported by the concrete
in the design cross-section, equal to

0 ,
h W R M
b bt ult b
=
W
b
see para 3.85;
M see para 3.85;
M
sw,ult
limit concentrated moment supported by crosswise
reinforcement in the design cross-section, equal to
M
sw,ult
= 0,8q
sw
W
sw
;
but taken no greater than M
b,ult
;
q
sw
see para 3.86 ;
W
sw
stiffness moment of the contour of crosswise
reinforcement.

At uniform location of crosswise reinforcement along the contour of
design cross-section, value W
sw
is taken equal to W
b
.
At concentrated location of crosswise reinforcement at the axes of
bearing surface (Drawing 3.49), the stiffness moment W
sw
is determined
according to the same rules as for the stiffness moment W
b
, taking actual
lengths of crosswise reinforcement location areas L
sw,x
and L
sw,y
at the
design contour of pushing.
At uniform location of crosswise reinforcement around the bearing
surface, instead of condition (3.187) one can make use of condition (3.182)
with increasing the right part by value 0,8q
sw
taken no greater than R
bt
h
0
.
With additional moment M
y
in the direction normal to direction of
moment M, the left part of condition (3.187) is increased by
ult y sw ult by
y
y
M M
M
m
, , ,
+
= , where M
by,ult
and M
sw,y,ult
limit concentrated
moments supported by the concrete and the crosswise reinforcement
respectively in the design cross-section and in the direction of moment M
y
;
at that, the total
y
ult sw ult b
m
M M
M
+
+
, ,
is also taken no greater
ult y sw ult bt
F F
F
, , ,
+
,
and M
sw,y,ult
no greater than M
by,ult
.


Example 40. Given: a flat monolithic flooring slab 220 mm thick;
columns abutting the flooring at the top and at the bottom, with section
800 500 mm; a load transferred from the flooring to the column N = 800
kN; moments in column sections at the upper and the lower faces of the slab
are equal: in the direction of the column dimension
500 mm M
x,sup
= 70 kN.m, M
x,inf
= 60 kN.m, in the direction of the column
dimension 800 mm M
y,sup
= 30 kN.m, M
y,inf
= 27 kN.m; concrete of class
B30 (R
bt
= 1,15 MPa).
It is required to check the flooring slab for pushing.
C a l c u l a t i o n. Averaged effective depth of the slab is taken equal
to h
0
= 190 mm.
The load of the flooring is taken as the concentrated pushing force F
= N =800 kN; column section b a = 800 500 mm is taken as the bearing
area of this force.
Now one can determine geometrical characteristics of the contour of
design cross-section according to paras 3.84 and 3.85:

perimeter u = ( )
0
2 2 h b a + + = ( ) 190 2 800 500 2 + + = 3360 mm;
stiffness moment in the direction of moment M
x
(i.. at a = 500 mm,
b = 800 mm)
W
b,x
= ( )

+ +
+
+
0
0
0
3
h b
h a
h a = ( )

+ +
+
+ 190 800
3
190 500
190 500
= =841800 mm
2
;
stiffness moment in the direction of moment M
y
(i.. at a = 800 mm,
b= 500 mm)
W
b,y
= ( )

+ +
+
+ 190 500
3
190 800
190 800 = 1009800 mm
2
.
For the design concentrated moment in each direction, one can take a
half of the total of moments in the section at upper and lower faces of the
slab, i..
M
x
= ( ) 2 /
inf , sup , x x
M M + = ( ) 2 / 60 70 + = 65 kN
.
m;
M
y
= ( ) 2 /
inf , sup , y y
M M + = ( ) 2 / 27 30 + = 28,5 kN
.
m.
Verifying condition (3.182), taking M = M
x
= 65 kN.m, W
b
=W
b,x
= =
841800 mm
2
and adding to the left part
y b
y
W
M
,
=
1009800
10 5 , 28
6
= 28,2 N/mm.
At that =
= < = +
= +
3360
10 800
4 , 105 2 , 28
841800
10 65
3 5
, ,
u
F
W
M
W
M
y b
y
x b
x

1 , 238 = , therefore, the moment shall not be adjusted.
y b
y
x b
x
W
M
W
M
u
F
, ,
+ + = 238,1+105,4=343,5 N/mm > R
bt
h
0
= 190 15 , 1 =
218,5N/mm,
i.. condition (3.182) is not met and it is necessary to install
crosswise reinforcement into the slab.
According to requirements of para 5.26, the spacing of crosswise
rods is taken s
w
= 60 mm < h
0
/3 = 63,3 mm, 1
st
row of the rods shall be
placed at the distance of 75 mm from the column, as 75 mm < h
0
/2 and 75
mm> h
0
/3 (Drawing 3.50). Then within the limits at the distance of 0,5h
0
=
95 mm to both sides from the design cross-section contour, 2 rods can be
placed within one section. Rods made of reinforcement of class A240(R
sw
=
170 MPa) of minimum diameter 6 mm are taken. Then A
sw
= 57 mm
2
and
0,8q
sw
= 0,8
w
sw sw
s
A R
= 0,8
60
57 170
= 129,2 N/mm < R
bt
h
0
=218,5N/mm.

At that, according to para 3.86, the limit force supported by the
crosswise reinforcement and equal to 0,8q
sw
u = 129,2u shall be no less than



0,25F
b,ult
= 0,25R
bt
h
0
u = u 5 , 218 25 , 0 = 54,6u. As one can see, this
requirement is met.
Verifying condition (3.182), adding values 0,8q
s
to the right part.
y b
y
x b
x
W
M
W
M
u
F
, ,
+ + = 343,5 N/mm < R
bt
h
0
+ 0,8q
sw
= 218,5 + 129,2 =
=347,7 N/mm, i.. durability of the design section with consideration of
installed crosswise reinforcement is ensured.
Now one can check durability of the design section with contour at
distance 0,5h
0
beyond the boundary of crosswise reinforcement location.
According to requirements specified in 5.26, the last row of crosswise rods
is placed at a distance from the load zone (i.. from the column) equal to 75
+ 60 4 = 315 mm >1,5h
0
= 190 5 , 1 = 285 mm. Then the contour of a new
design section has the dimensions: a = 190 315 2 500 + + = 1330 mm; b =
190 315 2 800 + + = 1620 mm.
Its geometrical characteristics:
u = ( ) 190 2 1620 1320 2 + + = 6640 mm;
W
b,x
= ( )

+ +
+
+ 190 1620
3
190 1320
190 1320 =
6
10 49 , 3 mm
2
;
W
b,y
= ( )

+ +
+
+ 190 1320
3
190 1620
190 1620 =
6
10 825 , 3 mm
2
.
Verifying condition (3.182) with consideration of moment M
y
. At that, the
decrease of the pushing force F is neglected in reserve due to the load
located at an segment with dimensions ) ( ) (
0 0
h b h a + + around the column.
6
6
6
6 3
10 825 , 3
10 5 , 28
10 49 , 3
10 65
6640
10 800
= 146,5 N/mm < R

bt
h
0
= 218,5 N/mm,
i.. durability of this cross-section is ensured.
Example 41. Given: a flat monolithic flooring slab 230 mm thick;
columns abutting the flooring at the top and at the bottom, with section
500 400 mm; a load transferred from the flooring onto the column N = 150
kN; moments in column sections at the upper and the lower slab faces in the
direction of the column dimension 500 mm M
sup
= 80 kN
.
m, M
inf
= 90
kN
.
m; the column section center is located at distance x
0
= 500 mm from a
free edge of the slab (Drawing 3.51); concrete of class B25 (R
bt
= 1,05
MPa).

1-1
sup M 0
4
0
0
1
3
2
500
500
1
h

=
2
0
0
1
F
Mint

1 force F application point; 2 gravity center of a non-closed contour;
3 non-closed contour of a design section

It is required to check the flooring slab for pushing.
C a l c u l a t i o n. Averaged effective depth of the slab is taken equal
to h
0
= 200 mm.
The load of the flooring is taken as the concentrated pushing force F
= N =150 kN; column section b a = 4 mm is taken as the bearing area of
this force.
Now one can check durability of the design sections of the non-closed
contour. Dimensions of this contour are:
L
x
= x
0
+ (a+h
0
)/2 = 500+(500+200) / 2 = 850 mm;
L
y
= b+h
0
= 400+200=600 mm.
Perimeter and the moment of inertia of the contour are equal to
u = 2L
x
+ L
y
= 2 850+600 = 2300 mm;
( )
3 6
2
2 3
2
2
3
10 825 , 1
2300
850600 1450 2
3
850
2
3
=
+
=
+ +
=
u
L L L L
L
I
y x y x
x
.
Eccentricity of force F
( )
9 , 35 500
2300
1450 850
0 0
= =
+
= x
u
L L L
e
y x x
.
With the taken directions of moments M
sup
and M
int
(see Drawing
3.51), the most stressed fiber of the design section is located at the section
edge farthest removed from the free end of the slab. This fiber is situated at
the distance from the gravity center equal to
1 , 314 2300 850
2 2
= = = u L y
x
.
Then the stiffness moment is equal to :
2 6
581025 1 , 314 10 825 , 1 = = = y I W
b
.
Design moment from the column equals

M = M
loc
/2 = (M
sup
+ M
inf
)/2=(80+90)/2=85 kN
.
m.
The moment of eccentrical application of force F equals F
0
=
=1500,0359=5,4 kN
.
m. This moment is of the opposite sign to the moment
M
loc
, therefore
= 85-5,4=79,6 kN
.
m.
Checking the durability based on condition (3.182)
b
W
M
u
F
+ = 2 , 202
581025
9,610 7
2300
150000
6
= + N/mm < R
bt
h
0
= 1,05200=210
N/mm, i.. durability of the section with a non-closed contour is ensured.
Now one can check the section durability of a closed contour.
Determining its geometrical characteristics:
Perimeter u=2(a+b+2h
0
)=2(500+400+2200)=2600mm;
Stiffness moment ( ) =
+ +
+
+ =
0
0
0
3
h b
h a
h a W
b

2
58333 600
3
700
700 =
+ = ;
The moment equals M=M
loc
/ 2 = 85 kN
.
m.
b
W
M
u
F
+ = 4 , 203
583333
10 85
2600
150000
6
= + N/mm < R
bt
h
0
= 210 N/mm, i..
the slab durability against pushing is ensured in all sections.

4. CALCULATION OF LIMIT STATES OF THE
SECOND GROUP FOR ELEMENTS OF
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

CALCULATION OF CRACKS OPENING IN REINFORCED
CONCRETE ELEMENTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

4.1. Calculation of short-term and long-term cracks opening can be carried out
for reinforced concrete elements.
Short-term opening of cracks is determined as resulting from
combined impact of constant and temporary (long-term and short-term)
loads; long-term opening only from constant and temporary long-term
loads.

4.2. Calculation of cracks opening is carried out using condition
acre occult, (4.1)
where acre width of cracks opening due to the impact of external load
determined according to paras 4.10-4.14;
acr,ult maximum allowable width of cracks opening.
Values acr,ult are taken equal to:
a) from condition of reinforcement integrity (for any structures)
0,3 mm at long-term opening of cracks;
0,4 mm at short-term opening of cracks;
) from condition of limiting the permeability of structures exposed to
direct pressure of liquids, gases, granular material)
0,2 mm at long-term opening of cracks;
0,3 mm at short-term opening of cracks.
4.3. Calculation of cracks opening is not carried out if the following
condition is met
< Mcr , (4.2)
where moment from external load in relation to the axis normal to the
plane of the moment and passing through the gravity center of
transformed cross-section of the element; at that, all loads
(constant and temporary ones) are considered with safety factor f
= 1;
Mcr moment supported by normal section of the element during
cracks formation and determined according to paras 4.4-4.8.
For centrally tensioned elements condition (4.2) is transformed into
condition
N < Ncr, (4.3)
where Ncrc longitudinal tensile force supported by the element during
cracks formation and determined according to para 4.9

DETERMINING THE CRACKS FORMATION MOMENT

4.4. Moment of flection Mcr during cracks formation is determined
on the basis of deformational model with consideration of inelastic
deformation of tensioned concrete according to para 4.7 and 4.8.
It is permissible to determine the moment Mcr without considering
inelastic deformations of concrete according to paras 4.5 and 4.6. If at that
condition (4.1) is not met, then the moment of cracks formation should be
determined with consideration of inelastic deformations of concrete.

4.5. Moment of cracks formation without consideration of inelastic
deformations of concrete is determined as for a solid elastic body from
formula
Mcrc =
ser bt
Ne W R
,
, (4.4)
where W stiffness moment of transformed section for an extreme
tensioned fiber of concrete:
e distance form the gravity center of the transformed section of the
element to the core point farthest removed from the tensioned
area being checked for cracks formation.
Values W and e are determined according to para4.6.
In formula (4.4) the plus sing is taken at compressing normal force
N , the minus sign at tensile force.
4.6. Stiffness moment W and distance e are determined form
formulae:
W =
t
red
y
I
, (4.5)
e =
red
A
W
, (4.6)
where Ired moment of inertia of transformed section in relation to its
gravity center and determined from formula
Ired=I+Is+Is ; (4.7)
I, Is,
'
s
I moments of inertia of the section of concrete and , tensioned
and compressed reinforcement respectively;
Ared area of transformed section equal to
Ared = A + As +
s
A , (4.8)
=
b
s
E
E
modular ratio of reinforcement to concrete;
yt distance from the most tensioned fiber of concrete to the gravity
center of transformed section of the element.
At =
A
A
s
< 0,005 values W and e are permitted to be determined
without consideration of reinforcement.
4.7. Determining of crack opening moment using nonlinear
deformational model is performed using conditions specified in paras 3.72-
3.75 (Diagram 4.1). At that one considers behavior of concrete in
tensioned zone determined from a bilinear diagram according to para 3.72.
Transformed moduluses of deformations of compressed and tensioned
concrete in the bilinear diagram

h
b1,red
bt2
y
s
bt,ser
R
t
b
M
crc
a)

1
s
s
b
x

x
bt,ser
s
bt2
R
b1,red
y
t
s
N
crc
M
1
)

b
b
y
p
y
c

Diagram 4.1. Schematic of tensile-deformational state of an element
section for calculation of cracks formation at the impact of bending
moment (), bending moment and normal force ()
1 level of the gravity center of transformed section

are taken equal to, respectively Eb,red =
red b
ser b
R
, 1
,
and Ebt,red =
red bt
ser
bt
R
, 1
,
,
where b1,red =
4
10 15

and bt1,red =
5
10 8

.
Value Mcrc is determined by solving the system of equations (3.144)
-(3.146), taking relative deformation of concrete bt,max at the tensioned
face being equal to:
at a two-valued strain diagram in the cross-section bt2 =
5
10 15

;
at a single-value strain diagram bt,ult = (15 - 5
2
1
)
5
10
, where
1/2 < 1 ratio of concrete deformations at opposite sides of the section.
4.8. For rectangular, T- and I-sections at the impact of the moment in
the plane of axis of symmetry, the cracks formation moment with
consideration of inelastic deformations of tensioned concrete is permissible

to be determined from formula (4.4), replacing value W with Wpl = W,
where - see Table 4.1
ble 4.1
Section Factor
Shape of cross-
section
1. Rectangular 1,30
2.-section with a flange located in compressed
zone
1,30
3. -section with a flange (widening) located in
tensioned zone:
) at bf / b 2 irrespective of ratio hf /h
) at bf /b > 2 and hf /h 0,2
) at bf /b > 2 and hf /h < 0,2

1,25

1,25
1,20
4.Symmetrical I-section (box-section):
) at bf'

/b = bf /b 2 irrespective of ratio hf/h
= hf /h
) at 2 < bf
/b = bf /b 6 irrespective of ratio
hf
/h = hf /h
) at bf
/b = bf /b > 6 and hf/h = hf /h 0,2

) at 6< bf
/b = bf /b 15 and hf/h = hf /h < 0,2

) at bf
/b = bf /b 15 and hf/h = hf /h < 0,2

1,30

1,25

1,25
1,20
1,15
5.Asymmetrical I-section meeting condition
bf
/b 3:
) at bf /b 2 irrespective of ratio hf /h
) at 2< bf /b 6 irrespective of ratio hf /h
) at bf /b > 6 and hf /h > 0,1

1,30

1,25

1,25


Section Factor
Shape of cross-
section
6.Asymmetrical I-section meeting condition 3 <
bf
/b < 8:
) at bf /b 4 irrespective of ratio
hf /h
) at bf /b > 4 and hf /h 0,2
) at bf /b > 4 and hf /h < 0,2

1,25

1,25
1,20
7. Asymmetrical I-section meeting condition bf
/b
8:
) at hf /h > 0,3
) at hf /h 0,3

1,35
1,30

4.9. Force Ncrc during formation of cracks in centrally tensioned
elements is determined from formula
Ncrc = Rbt,serA + 20 As, (4.9)
where 20 (MPa) stress in all reinforcement before cracks are formed in
the concrete.

DETERMINING THE OPENING WIDTH OF CRACKS NORMAL TO
LONGITUDINAL AXIS OF THE ELEMENT

4.10. Width of normal cracks opening is determined from formula
acrc = 123s
s
s
s
l
E
, (4.10)
where s stress in longitudinal tensioned reinforcement in a section with a
crack from a corresponding external load, determined according to
para 4.11;
ls basic (without considering the impact of the reinforcement surface
type) distance between adjoining normal cracks, determined
according to para 4.12;
s factor taking into account the nonuniform distribution of relative
deformations of tensioned reinforcement between the cracks; it is
permitted to take s = 1; if at that condition (4.1) is not met, value
s should be determined according to para 4.13;

1 factor taking into account the long-term impact of the load and taken
equal to:
1,0 at short-term impact of the load;
1,4 at long-term impact of the load;
2 factor taking into account the profile of longitudinal reinforcement
and taken equal to:
0,5 for reinforcement of periodic profile (classes A300, A400,
A500, B500);
0,8 for plain reinforcement (class A240);
3 factor taking into account the loading condition and taken equal to:
1,0 for flexural and eccentrically compressed elements;
1,2 for tensioned elements.
4.11. Value of stress s in tensioned reinforcement of flexural elements
(Diagram 4.2,a) is determined from formula
s =
1
0
) (
s
red
I
x h M
(4.11)
N
z
s
= E
s s
s
= E
s s s
=
b b,red b
N = A + N
c s s b
b
=
b b,red
s
= E
s
s
s
= E
s s
=
b b b,red
= E
s s s
s
= E s
N
a)
M
s
A
s
A

s
1
s

b
s
A
s
A
1
b
)
s
A
A
s
1
s

b
s
h
h
h
0
0
0
x
x
e
e
a
'
e
x
)

Diagram 4.2. Schematics of stressed deformational state of elements with cracks
at the impact of: moment of flection (), compressing normal force (), tensile
normal force ()

where Ired and x moment of inertia and height of compressed zone of
transformed cross-section including the area of cross-section
only of compressed zone of concrete and cross-sectional
area of tensioned and compressed reinforcement multiplied
by modular ratio of reinforcement to concrete s1 =
red b
s
E
E
,
,
where Eb,red - see para 4.7.
Factor s1 can also be determined from formula
s1 =
ser b
R
,
300
.
Height of compressed zone is determined from solution of equation
Sb = s1(Ss Ss
), (4.12)
where Sb, Ss, Ss
static moments of compressed zone of concrete, areas of

tensioned and compressed reinforcement respectively in
relation to the neutral axis.
For rectangular, T- and I-sections, it is permissible to determine stress
s from formula
s =
s s
A z
M
, (4.13)
where zs lever arm equal to zs = h0, and factor is determined from the
graph in Diagram 4.3.

Diagram 4.3. Graph of factor =zs /h0 for determining the lever arm at
calculation of cracks opening in flexural elements
red b
s s
s s
E
E
bh
A
, 0
1
= ;
( )
0
'
1
' '
bh
A h b b
s s f f

+
=
0
'
h h
f
= , for sections without a compressed flange
0
'
2 h a =
Graphical symbols
at 0,2
at 0,3

Stress value s for eccentrically compressed element as well as for
eccentrically tensioned element at application of force N beyond the
distance between reinforcement S and S

(Diagram 4.2,, ) is determined
from formula
s =
1 0
) (
s
red
x h
S
N
, (4.14)
where Sred static moment in relation to the neutral axis; value Sred is
calculated from formula
Sred = Sb + s1(
'
s
S - Ss), (4.15)
and the height of compressed zone x is found from solutin of
equation

red
red
S
I
= e (h0 x), (4.16)
where Ired moment of inertia of transformed section in relation to the
neutral axis.
For eccentrically tensioned elements eccentricity e in formula (4.16) is
taken with the minus sign.
Value of stress s for eccentrically tensioned elements at application
of force N between the gravity centers of reinforcement S and S' (i.. at e' <
h0 a) is determined from formula
s =
( ) a h A
Ne
s

0
'
. (4.17)
For centrally tensioned elements
s =
s
A
N
. (4.18)
For eccentrically compressed element of rectangular section, stress s
is permitted to be determined from formula
s =
cr
s
h A
Ne
0
, (4.19)
where rc factor determined from Table4.2.
For eccentrically tensioned elements of rectangular section, stress s
is permitted to be determined from formulae:
a) at e'

> h0 a
'
and at
'
s
A = 0 s = ); 1 2 , 1 (
0
+
h
e
A
N
s
(4.20)
) at
'
s
A As irrespective of e' s =
) (
'
0
a h A
e N
s

. (4.21)

At 0 <
'
s
A < As, value s is determined by means of linear
interpolation between values s calculated from formulae (4.20) and (4.21).
In all cases, value s shall not exceed Rs,ser.

ble 4.2
e/h0
Factors cr
at
'
s
A As and values s1, equal to at
'
s
A = 0 and values 1, equal to
0,01 0,05 0,10 0,20
0,40
0,01 0,05 0,10 0,20
0,40
0,8
1,0
1,2
1,5
2,0
3,0
4,0
0,01
0,13
0,25
0,42
0,56
0,73
0,80
0,06
0,20
0,33
0,48
0,63
0,79
0,86
0,07
0,23
0,37
0,52
0,66
0,82
0,90
0,08
0,25
0,39
0,54
0,68
0,84
0,93
0,08
0,26
0,40
0,55
0,69
0,85
0,93
0,01
0,13
0,25
0,42
0,56
0,73
0,80
0,06
0,20
0,33
0,48
0,63
0,79
0,86
0,10
0,26
0,38
0,53
0,67
0,82
0,91
0,20
0,31
0,43
0,58
0,72
0,88
0,96
0,18
0,36
0,49
0,64
0,78
0,93
1,01
s1 =
0
bh
A
s
ser b
R
,
300

Note. At 0 <
'
s
A < As coefficients cr are determined by means of
linear interpolation.

4.12. Value of basic distance between the cracks ls is determined from
formula
ls = 0,5
s
s
bt
d
A
A
(4.22)
and taken no less than 10ds and 100 mm and no greater than 40ds and 400
mm (for elements with effective depth of cross-section no greater than 1 m).
Here Abt cross-sectional area of tensioned concrete determined in
general case according to provisions of para.4.7. At that the height of
tensioned zone is taken no less than 2a and no greater than 0,5h. For
rectangular, T- and I-sections it is permissible to determine the height of
tensioned zone of the concrete from formula (4.23) with consideration of
the said constraints:
y = ytk, (4.23)
where yt height of tensioned zone of the concrete determined as for elastic
material at modular ratio of reinforcement to concrete =
Es/Eb;

k correcting coefficient equal to:
for rectangular sections and T-sections with a flange in
compressed zone - 0,90;
for I-sections (box-shaped) and T-sections with a flange in
tensioned zone 0,95.
Value yt is taken equal to:
for flexural elements yt =
red
red
A
S
,
for eccentrically loaded elements
yt =
ser bt red
red
R N A
S
,
/
,
where Sred static moment of complete transformed section in relation to
the tensioned face;
Ared see formula (4.8);
the plus sign is taken at compressing normal force N,
the minus sign at tensile force N.
At various diameters of tensioned reinforcement rods value ds is taken
equal to
ds =
sk k s
sk k s
d n d n
d n d n
+ +
+ +
...
...
1 1
2 2
1 1
, (4.24)
where ds1,dsk diameters of tensioned reinforcement rods;
n1,n number of rods with diameters ds1,dsk respectively.
4.13. Value of coefficient s is determined from formula
s = 1 0,8
s
crc s
,
, (4.25)
where s,cr stress in longitudinal tensioned reinforcement in the section
immediately after normal cracks formation determined
according to provisions of para 4.11, taking in corresponding
formulae M = Mcrc, e =
p
crc
y
N
M
and e' =
c
crc
y
N
M
+ , where y
and y distances from the gravity center of tensioned and
compressed reinforcement respectively to the axis passing
through the gravity center of the transformed section taken at
determining Mcrc; at that, the plus sign is taken for
eccentrical compression, the minus sign for eccentrical
tension; Mcrc see paras 4.4-4.8; N normal force at the
impact of the load in view;

s stress in longitudinal tensioned reinforcement at the impact of
the load in view.
If s,crc > s,, s is taken equal to 0,2.
For flexural elements value of coefficient s is permitted to be
s = 1 0,8
M
M
crc
, (4.26)
and be taken no less than 0,2.
4.14. The width of cracks opening is taken equal to:
at long-term opening
acrc = acrc1; (4.27)
at short-term opening
acrc = acr,1 + acr,2 acr,3, (4.28)
where acrc,1 width of cracks opening determined according to para 4.10
at 1 = 1,4 and at the impact of constant and long-term loads;
acrc2 same, at 1 = 1,0 and the impact of all loads (i.e. including
short-term ones);
acrc3 same, at 1 = 1,0 at the impact of constant and long-term
loads.
The width of short-term cracks opening can also be determined from
formula
acrc = acrc2

+
crc s s
crc s sl
,
,
8 , 0
8 , 0
4 , 0 1

, (4.28a)
where values sl and s are determined according to para 4.11 at the impact
of the total of constant and long-term loads, and all loads, respectively;
s,crc see para 4.13.
In the absence of requirement to the structure in terms of limitation of
permeability and at meeting the following condition

crc s s
crc s sl
,
,
8 , 0
8 , 0

> 0,68, (4.29)

One can check only long-term opening of cracks, and if condition (4.29) is
not met only short-term opening.
For flexural element in formulae (4.28a) and (4.29) values s,crc, s
and sl can be replaced with Mcrc, M and Ml respectively moment from
the impact of constant and long-term loads.



Example 42. Given: reinforced concrete flooring slab with cross-
sectional dimensions (for half of the slab section) as per Diagram 4.4;
concrete of class B25 (Rbt,ser = 1,55 MPa, Rb,ser = 18,5 MPa, Eb = 30000
MPa); cross-sectional area of tensioned reinforcement of class A400 As =
760 mm
2
(222); total moment in the middle of the span M = 69 kN
.
m; all
loads are constant and long-term ones.

Diagram 4.4.For calculation example 42

It is required to carry out calculation of opening of normal cracks.
C a l c u l a t i o n. From Diagram 4.4 one has: b = 85 mm, h = 400
mm, a = 58 mm, bf' = 725 mm; hf' = 50 mm.
Let us determine moment of cracks formation Mcr according to para
4.5. To do that, one should determine geometrical characteristics of the
transformed section at =
b
s
E
E
=
4
5
10 3
10 2
= 6,67 and
'
s
A = 0:
Ared = A + As = bh + (bf' b)hf' + As = + + 50 ) 85 725 ( 400 85
760 67 , 6 + = 34000 + 32000 + 5069 = 71069 mm
2
;
yt = Sred/Ared =
[ 58 5069 ) 2 / 50 400 ( 32000 2 / 400 34000 + + ]/71069 = 268,7 mm;
Ired = + + +
2 ' ' 2
3
) 2 / . ( ) ( ) 2 / (
12
t f f f t
y h h h b b h y bh
bh

+ + 12 / ) (
3 ' '
f f
h b b = +
2
) ( a y A
t s
+ +
2
3
) 200 7 , 268 ( 34000
12
400 85
2 2
3
) 58 7 , 268 ( 5069 ) 7 , 268 375 ( 32000
12
50 640
+ +
+ =
9
10 207 , 1 mm
4
;
W =
t
red
y
I
=
7 , 268
10 207 , 1
9
=
6
10 49 , 4 mm
3
.

To consider inelastic deformations of tensioned concrete by
multiplying W by coefficient equal to, according to Table 4.1 1,30, i..
W= 3 , 1 10 49 , 4
6
=
6
10 84 , 5 mm
3
. hen
Mcrc = Rbt,serW =
6
10 84 , 5 55 , 1 =
6
10 052 , 9 N
.
mm = 9,05 kN
.
m <
M = =69 kN
.
m. i.. cracks are formed and the calculation of cracks opening
width is necessary.
One should determine stress in reinforcement s from formula (4.13).
Effective depth of section h0 = h a = 400 58 = 342 mm; modulus ratio
s1 =
ser b
R
,
300
=
5 , 18
300
= 16,2. Then at ss1 =
0
1
bh
A
s s
= =
342 85
2 , 16 760
= 0,424
and =
( )
0
' '
bh
h b b
f f

=
342 85
32000
= 1,1 > 0,80 from the graph in Diagram 4.2

one can find coefficient = 0,9 and the lever arm equals zs = h0 =
342 9 , 0 = 308 mm.
s =
s s
A z
M
=
760 308
10 69
6
= 294,8 MPa.
Now one can determine distance between cracks ls from formula
(4.22).
As the height of tensioned concrete equal to y = ytk = 9 , 0 7 , 268 = =
247,8 mm > h/2 = 200 mm, the cross-sectional area of tensioned concrete is
taken equal to
Abt = h b 5 , 0 = 200 85 = 17000 mm
2
.
hen
ls = 0,5
s
s
bt
d
A
A
= 22
760
17000
5 , 0 = 246 mm,
which is less than 40ds = 880 mm and less than 400 mm, therefore ls
is kept equal to 246 mm.
Value s should be determined from formula (4.26)
s = 1 0,8
M
M
crc
= 1 0,8
69
05 , 9
= 0,895.
Let us use formula (4.10) to determine the width of long-term opening
of cracks, taking 1 = 1,4, 2 = 0,5 and 3 = 1,0,
acrc = 123s
s
s
E
ls = 246
10 2
8 , 294
895 , 0 5 , 0 4 , 1
5

= 0,227 mm,

which is less than maximum allowable width of long-term opening of
cracks equal to, according to para 4.2, acrc,ult = 0,3 mm.
Example 43. Given: reinforced concrete foundation slab with cross-
sectional dimensions h = 300 mm, b = 1150 mm; a = 42 mm; concrete of
class B15 (Rbt,ser = 1,1 MPa, Rb,ser = 11 MPa); principal reinforcement of
class A400 with cross-sectional area As = 923 mm
2
(614); moment in
design section from constant and long-term loads Ml = 50kN., from short-
term loads Msh=10kN
.
m; foundation is operated in non-aggressive
environment (above the upper level of groundwater).
It is required to carry out calculation of opening of normal cracks.
C a l c u l a t i o n. Let us determine moment of cracks formation Mcrc
according to paras 4.5 4.8. As =
bh
A
s
=
300 1150
923
= 0,0027 < 0,005,

elastic section modulus W can be determined without consideration of
reinforcement , i..
W =
6
2
bh
=
6
300 1150
2
=
7
10 725 , 1 mm
3
.
Inelastic deformations can be taken into account by multiplying W by
coefficient equal to, according to Table 4.1, 1,30, i.e. W =
7
10 725 , 1 3 , 1 =
7
10 24 , 2 mm
3
. hen Mcrc = Rbt,serW =
7
10 24 , 2 1 , 1 =
6
10 67 , 24 N
.
mm
= 24,67 kN
.
m < M = Ml + Msh = 50 + 10 = 60 kN
.
m. i.e. under the impact
of full load cracks are formed and a calculation of cracks opening is
necessary.
One can check condition (4.29) with replacement of stresses s with
corresponding moments
crc
crc l
M M
M M
8 , 0
8 , 0
=
67 , 24 8 , 0 60
67 , 24 8 , 0 50

= 0,752 > 0,68,
therefore, only long-term opening of cracks should be checked. Stress in
reinforcement s is determined from formula (4.13), taking M = Ml.
Effective depth of section h0 = h a = 300 42 = 258 mm; modulus ratio
s1 =
ser b
R
,
300
=
11
300
= 27,27. hen at ss1 =
0
1
bh
A
s s
=
258 1150
27 , 27 923
= 0,085
and = 0,0 from the graph in Diagram 4.3 one can find
= 0,89. Lever arm equals zs = h0 = 258 89 , 0 = 229,6mm.
s =
s s
A z
M
=
923 6 , 229
10 50
6
= 235,9 MPa.

For a rectangular section, the height of tensioned zone with
consideration of inelastic deformations equals y = 0,5hk = 9 , 0 300 5 , 0 =
135 mm > 2a = 42 2 = 84 mm and, besides, y = 135 mm < 0,5h = 150 mm
therefore y is kept equal to 135 mm and then Abt = by = 135 1150 =
155250 mm
2
.
Distance between cracks can be determined from formula (4.22)
ls = 0,5
s
s
bt
d
A
A
= 0,5 14
923
155250
= 1177 mm, which is greater than 40ds =
14 40 = 560 mm and greater than 400 mm, so one can take ls = 400 mm.
Value s is determined from formula (4.26), taking M = Ml = =50
kN
.
m.
s = 1 0,8
M
M
crc
= 1 0,8
0 , 50
67 , 24
= 0,605.
The width of long-term opening of cracks can be determined from
formula (4.10), taking 1 = 1,4, 2 = 0,5 and 3 = 1,0:
acrc = 123s
s
s
E
ls = 400
10 2
9 , 235
605 , 0 5 , 0 4 , 1
5

= 0,2 mm,
which is less than the maximum allowable width of long-term cracks
opening being equal to acrc,ult = 0,3 mm.
Example 44. Given: reinforced concrete column of an industrial
building, with cross-sectional dimensions h = 500 mm, b = 400 mm;
a = a' = 50 mm; concrete of class B15 (Eb = 24000 MPa, Rb,ser = 11 MPa,
Rbt,ser = 1,1 MPa); principal reinforcement of class A400 with cross-
sectional area As =
'
s
A = 1232 mm
2
(228); forces from constant and long-
term loads Nl = 500 kN, Ml = 150 kN.m; forces from short-term (wind)
load: Nsh = 0,0; Msh = 90 kN.m.
It is required to calculate opening of cracks for the column.
C a l c u l a t i o n. Moment f cracks formation Mcrc can be
determined according to paras 4.5 4.8.
As =
bh
A
s
=
500 400
1232
= 0,0062 > 0,005, value W and e can be

determined with consideration of reinforcement at modulus ratio =
b
s
E
E
=
4
5
10 4 , 2
10 2
= 8,333. For a rectangular section with symmetrical reinforcement

yt = h/2 = 250 mm, and moment of inertia Ired equals

Ired=
2
3
2
3
) 50 250 ( 333 , 8 1232 2
12
500 400
) 5 , 0 ( 2
12
+
= + a h A
bh
s
=
=
9
10 988 , 4 mm
4
.
hen W =
t
red
y
I
=
250
10 988 , 4
9
=
6
10 95 , 19 mm
3
.
Area of transformed section equals
Ared = bh + 2As = 333 , 8 1232 2 500 400 + = 220533 mm
3
.
Then e =
red
A
W
=
220533
10 95 , 19
6
= 90,5 mm.
Inelastic deformations of tensioned concrete can be considered by
multiplying W by coefficient = 1,3 (see Table 4.1), i.e. W =
= 3 , 1 10 95 , 19
6
=
6
10 94 , 25 mm,
Moment Mcrc can be determined from formula (4.4), taking N = Nl =
500 kN,
Mcrc = Rbt,serW + Ne =
6
10 94 , 25 1 , 1 + 90,5 500000 =
6
10 76 , 73 N
.
mm = 73,76 kN
.
m < M = Ml + Msh = 150 + 90 = 240 kN
.
m,
i.e. under the impact of all loads cracks are formed and a calculation of
opening of cracks is necessary.
Stress in tensioned reinforcement under the impact of all loads can be
determined from formula (4.19).
h0 = h a = 500 50 = 450 mm = 0,45 m.
e =
2
0
a h
N
M

+ =
2
05 , 0 45 , 0
500
240
+ = 0,68 m.
At
0
h
e
=
45 , 0
68 , 0
= 1,51 and s1 =
ser b
s
R bh
A
, 0
300
=
11
300
450 400
1232
=
0,187 from Table .4.2 one can find rc = 0,54. Then s =
crc
s
h A
Ne
0
=
54 , 0
450 1232
680 10 500
3

= =331,2 MPa.
Similarly, one can determine stress s under the impact of constant and
long-term loads, i.e. taking M = Ml = 150 kN
.
m and N = Nl = 500 kN.
e=
2
0
a h
N
M

+ = 2 , 0
500
150
+ = 0,5 m.

At
0
h
e
=
45 , 0
5 , 0
= 1,111 and s1 = 0,187 from Table 4.2 one can find
rc=0,32.
s = sl = 32 , 0
450 1232
500 10 500
3

= 144,3 MPa.
One can also determine stress s under the impact of moment M =
Mcrc = 73,76 kN.m and force N = 500 kN.
e = 2 , 0
500
76 , 73
+ = 0,3475 m; from
0
h
=
45 , 0
3475 , 0
= 0,772 and s1 =
0,187 one can find rc = 0,08; s = s,crc = 08 , 0
450 1232
5 , 347 10 500
3

= 25
MPa.
To check condition (4.29)
crc s s
crc s sl
,
,
8 , 0
8 , 0

=
25 8 , 0 2 , 331
25 8 , 0 3 , 144

= 0,399 < 0,68,
i.e. condition (4.29) is not met, therefore, one should check only short-
term opening of cracks, determining acr from formula (4.28a). To do that,
one should determine acr,2 from formula (4.10) at 1 = 1,0 and s = 331,2
MPa. From formula (4.25) one has s = 1 0,8
s
crc s
,
= 1 0,8
2 , 331
25
=
0,94.
Distance between cracks ls can be determined according to para 4.12.
For this purpose, one should calculate the height of tensioned zone of
concrete from formula (4.23), taking k = 0,90, nd yt =
ser bt red
red
R N A
S
,
/ +
=
ser bt red
s
R N A
h A bh
,
2
/
2 / 2 2 /
+
+
=
1 , 1 / 10 500 220533
250 33 , 8 1232 2 2 / 500 400
3
2
+
+
= 81,7mm,
y= ytk = 9 , 0 7 , 81 = 73,5 mm < 2a = 50 2 = 100 mm.
One takes y= 100 mm and then the cross-sectional area of tensioned
concrete equals
Abt = yb = 400 100 = 40000 mm
2

and ls = 0,5
s
s
bt
d
A
A
= 0,5 28
1232
40000
= 454,5 mm > 400 mm.
One takes ls equal to 400 m.
acrc,2 = 123s
s
s
E
ls = 400
10 2
2 , 331
94 , 0 5 , 0
5
= 0,31 mm ;

acrc = acrc,2

+
crc s s
crc s sl
,
,
8 , 0
8 , 0
4 , 0 1

= 0,31(1 + ) 399 , 0 4 , 0 = 0,36 mm,
which is less than the maximum allowable width of cracks opening,
equal to 0,4 mm.

CALCULATION OF DEFORMATIONS FOR REINFORCED
CONCRETE STRUCTURES

GENERAL PROVISIONS

4.15. Calculation of deformations for elements of reinforced concrete
structures is carried out with consideration of operational requirements to be
met by the structure.
Calculation of deformations should be performed for the impact of
constant, temporary, long-term and short-term loads if there are
limitations for deformations imposed by technological or structural
requirements;
constant and temporary long-term loads if there are limitations for
deformation imposed by esthetic and psychological requirements.
4.16. Values of maximum allowable deformations of elements are
taken according to SNiP 2.01.07-85
*
and regulatory documents for certain
types of structures.

CALCULATION OF DEFLECTION FOR REINFORCED
CONCRETE ELEMENTS

4.17. Calculation of deflection for reinforced concrete elements is
carried out using condition
f fult, (4.30)
where f deflection of reinforced concrete element from the impact of
external load;
fult value of maximum allowable deflection of a reinforced concrete
element.
Deflections of reinforced concrete structures are determined according
to general rules and constructional mechanics depending on flexural,
shearing and axial deformational characteristics of reinforced concrete
elements in sections along its length (skewness, shearing angles, relative
longitudinal deformations).

In cases when deflections of reinforced concrete elements mainly
depend on flexural deformations, the value of deflections is determined
from skewness of the element according to paras 4.18 and 4.19.
4.18. Deflection of reinforced concrete element resulting from flexural
deformation is determined from formula
f= dx
r
M
x
l
x

0
1
, (4.31)
where
x
M
- moment of flection in section x from the impact of single force

applied to the section for which deflection is calculated, in the
direction of this deflection;
x
r

1
- total skewness of the element in section from external load at
which the deflection is calculated.
In general case, formula (4.31) can be used by dividing an element
into a number of segments, determining skewness at the boundaries of these
segments (with consideration of presence or absence of cracks and the sign
of skewness) and multiplying the areas of moments
x
M and skewness
x
r

1

along the element length, taking linear distribution of skewness within each
segment. In this case, at determining deflection in the middle of the span,
formula (4.31) takes the form
( )
=
1 2 /
1 sup, sup,
2
2
1
2 3
1 1
6
1 1
12
n
i c ir il r l
r
n
r r
i
r r
n
l
f , (4.32)
where
l
r
sup,
1
,
r
r
sup,
1
- skewness of the element on the left and the right

supports respectively;
il
r

1
,
ir
r

1
- skewness of the element in symmetrically located
sections i and i' (at i = i') to the left and to the right
from the axis of symmetry (of the middle of the
span, Diagram 4.5), respectively;
c
r

1
- skewness of the element in the middle of the span;
n even number of equal segments to which the span is
divided, no less than 6;
l element span.

In formulae (4.31) and (4.32) skewnesses
r
1
are determined according
to provisions of paras 4.21 4.27. At that, the sign of skewness is taken in
accordance with diagram of skewness distribution.

l/2
,,
(n/2-1)'
l/2
,,
l/n
,, ,,
(n/2-1)' i' 1' 0'
i' 1' 0'
,,
l/n
0 1
0 1
n/2-1
,,
i c
n/2-1
i c
1
r sup,r
(
r
)
1
1r
ir
r
1
c
r
1
r
il
1
1
r
il
sup,l
1
r

Diagram 4.5. Diagram of skewness distribution in a reinforced concrete
element in a general case of deflection calculation

4.19. For flexural elements of uniform section having cracks in each
segment where the sign of the moment of flection remains unchanged, it is
permitted to calculate akewness for the most stressed section and take
skewnesses for other sections of this segment to be changing in proportion
to values of the moment of flection (Diagram 4.6).


Diagram 4.6. Distribution diagram of moments of flection and skewness in a
reinforced concrete element of uniform section
schematic of load location; distribution of moments; distribution of
skewness

In this case for freely supported and cantilever elements the
maximum deflection is determined from formula
f=Sl
2
max
1
r
, (4.33)
where
max
1
r
- total skewness in the section with the largest moment of
flection from the impact of the load at which the deflection is
calculated;
S coefficient taken from Table 4.3.
If deflection determined from formula (4.33) exceeds the allowable
one, then for under0reinforced elements (s < 0,5%) its value is
recommended to be revised at the account of increased stiffness at segments
without cracks and consideration of variable stiffness at segments with
cracks; for freely supported beams loaded with uniformly distributed load,
it corresponds to formula
( )( )

+ + + +
=
el
r
m m k mk m
r
l
f
1
4 1 3 3 5
1
48
2
max
2
, (4.34)
where m = Mcrc/ Mmax;
k =
max
1
/
1
r r
crc
;
crc
r

1
- skewness under the impact of moment Mcrc with
consideration of the cracks;
el
r

1
- same, without consideration of cracks;

ble 4.3
i
a<l/2
i
i
1
8
2
a
6l
2

l
1
48
5
S
-
3
a
6l
i i i
max
)
r
(
1
(3 -
a
)
l
S
-
1
4
1
. S =S M / M,
S M - S M
.
M M
a
l
l

l
12
l/2 l/2
l
i

Mcrc moment of cracks formation determined according to paras
4.4-4.8.
For flexural elements with restrained ends, deflection in the middle of
the span can be determined from formula
f=
2
sup, sup, max
8
1 1 1
5 , 0
1
l S
r r
S
r
r l
, (4.35)
where
max
1
r
,
l
r
sup,
1
,
r
r
sup,
1
- skewness in the middle of the span at the

left and the right supports respectively;
S coefficient determined from Table 4.3 as for a freely supported
beam.
In all cases, deflection is taken no less than the deflection determined
from skewnesses without consideration of cracks.
4.20. For flexural elements at l/h < 10 it is necessary to consider the
impact of transverse forces to their deflection. In this case total deflection
Schematic of loading of a
freely supported beam
Coefficient
S
Schematic of cantilever
loading
Coefficient
S
Note. At loading an element simultaneously according to several schematics S=S
1
M
1
/M
1,
where S
1
and M
1
are coefficient S and moment M respectively in the middle of a beam span
or a cantilever embedment for each loading schematic. In this case the skewness (l/r)
max
is
determined at value M equal to M1.

equals to the total of deflections resulting from the flexural deformation
(see paras 4.18 and 4.19) and shearing deformation fq.
Deflection fq resulting from shearing deformation is determined from
formula
f =

l
x x
dx Q
0
, (4.36)
where
x
Q
transverse force in section x from the impact of a single force

applied in the section for which deflection is calculated, in the
direction of this deflection;
x shearing angle of the element in the section under the impact of
external load at which the deflection is calculated.
Value x is determined according to provisions of para 4.28.

DETERMINING OF SKEWNESS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
ELEMENTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

4.21.Skewness of reinforced concrete elements for calculation of their
deflections is determined:
) for elements or element parts where cracks normal to longitudinal
axis are not formed in tensioned zone -- according to para 4.23;
) for elements or element parts where there are cracks in tensioned
zone -- according to paras 4.24-4.26.
Elements or parts of elements are viewed without cracks, if the cracks
are not formed (i.. condition 4.2 is met) at the impact of all loads (i..
including short-term ones, too) with a safety factor f = 1
Skewness of reinforced concrete elements with cracks and without
cracks can be determined based on deformational model according to para
4.27.
4.22. Total skewness of flexural, eccentrically compressed and
eccentrically tensioned elements is determined from formula:
- for segments without cracks in tensioned zone

r
1
=
1
1
r
+
2
1
r
, (4.37)

where
1
1
r
and
2
1
r
- skewnesses from short-term impact of shot-term
loads and from long-term impact of constant and long-
term loads;
- for segments with cracks in tensioned zone

r
1
=
3 2 1
1 1 1
r r r
, (4.38)
where
1
1
r
- skewness from short-term impact of all loads included into the
calculation of deformation;
2
1
r
- skewness from short-term impact of constant and long-term
loads;
2
1
r
- skewness from long-term impact of constant and long-term loads.
Note. At using formula (4.37), a shot-term load which includes a reduced value
according to SNiP 2.01.07-85
*
, should be taken decreased by this value,
considered in this formula as a long-term load.

SKEWNESS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS IN SEGMENTS
WITHOUT CRACKS IN TENSIONED ZONE

4.23. Skewness of a reinforced concrete element in a segment without
cracks is determined from formula

r
1
=
red b
I E
M
1
, (4.39)
where M moment of flection from external load (including the moment
from normal force N in relation to the axis passing through the
gravity center of transformed section);
Ired moment of inertia of transformed section in relation to its gravity
center determined as for a solid body according to general rules of
elastic materials resistance with consideration of all cross-sectional
area of concrete and cross-sectional areas of reinforcement with
modulus ratio of reinforcement to concrete being equal to
=
1
/
b s
E E ;
Eb1 modulus of deformation of compressed concrete, taken equal to:
at short-term impact of a load
Eb1=
b
E 85 , 0 ; (4.40)

at long-term impact of a load
Eb1=
cr b
b
E
,
1 +
, (4.41)
where b,cr creep coefficient of concrete taken depending on relative air
humidity and class of concrete from Table 4.4.
ble 4.4
Relative ambient
air humidity ,%
Values of creep coefficient b,cr at compression class of concrete
B10 B15 B20 B25 B30 B35 B40 B45 B50 B55 B60
over 75
(increased)
2,8 2,4 2,0 1,8 1,6 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,0
40-75 (normal)
3,9 3,4 2,8 2,5 2,3 2,1 1,9 1,8 1,6 1,5 1,4
below 40
(reduced)
5,6 4,8 4,0 3,6 3,2 3,0 2,8 2,6 2,4 2,2 2,0
Note. Relative air humidity is taken according to SNiP23-01-99 as a monthly
average relative humidity of the warmest month in the construction area.

SKEWNESS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS IN SEGMENTS
WITH CRACKS IN TENSIONED ZONE

4.24. Skewness of a flexural reinforced concrete element in segments with
cracks in tensioned zone is determined from formula

r
1
=
red red b
I E
M
,
, (4.42)
where Ired moment of inertia of transformed section in relation to its
gravity center determined according to general rules of elastic
materials resistance with consideration of cross-sectional area of
concrete only in compressed area, cross-sectional areas of
compressed reinforcement with modulus ratio s1 and tensioned
reinforcement with modulus ratio s2 (Diagram 4.7);
Eb,red transformed modulus of deformation of compressed concrete taken
equal to Eb,red =
red b
ser b
R
, 1
,
, where value b1,red equals:

at short-term impact of a load
4
10 15

;
at long-term impact of a load depending on relative ambient air
humidity w%:

1
a)
A'
s s1
b
A
M
s2 s
A
sm
'
s
s
= E /
sm s s
'= ' E
s s s
b
= E
b b b,red
)
c
m
m
X

-

Y
h
a
'
x
m
0

Diagram 4.7. Transformed cross section () and schematic of stressed
deformational state of a flexural element with cracks at calculation of its
deformations ()

at w > 75%
4
10 24

;
at 75% w 40%
4
10 28

;
at w < 40%
4
10 34

.
Relative ambient air humidity is taken according to the note to Table
4.4.
Values of modulus ratios of reinforcement to concrete are taken equal
to:
for compressed reinforcement - s1 =
red b
s
E
E
,
;
for tensioned reinforcement -s2 =
red b s
s
E
E
,

where s see para 4.13.
Coefficient s1 can also be determined from formulae:
at short-term impact of a load - s1 = ;
300
,ser b
R

at long-term impact of a load and normal ambient air humidity (w =
4075%) - s1 =
ser b
R
,
560
;
nd coefficient s2 - from formula s2 =
s
s
1
.

The height of compressed zone is determined by solving the following equation
Sb =s2Ss - s1S's (4.43)
where Sb, Ss and S's static moments of compressed zone of concrete,
areas of tensioned and compressed reinforcement
respectively in relation to neutral axis.
For rectangular, T- and I-sections, the height of compressed zone is
x =
+ + + z
h
h
h
a
z h
f
f s s s s
0
'
'
0
'
1
'
2
2
0
2
2 , (4.44)
where z = ss2 + 'ss1 + f';
s =
0
bh
A
s
; s' =
0
'
bh
A
s
; f' =
( )
0
' '
bh
h b b
f f

.
4.25. For flexural elements of rectangular, T- and I-sections operated
at relative ambient air humidity exceeding 40%, skewness in segments with
cracks is permitted to be determined from formula

r
1
=
2
0 1
,
2
2
h A E
R bh M
s s
ser bt

(4.45)
where 1 see Table 4.5;
2 - see Table 4.6;
4.26. Skewness of eccentrically compressed elements as well as
eccentrically tensioned element at application of force N beyond the
distance of reinforcements S and ' S in segments with cracks in tensioned
zone is determined from formula

red b red
E S
N
r
,
1
= , (4.46)
f'
Coefficient 1 at values s1, equal to

0,07
0,10 0,15 0,20 0,30 0,40 0,50 0,60 0,70 0,80 0,90 1,00
0,0 0,60 0,55 0,49 0,45 0,38 0,34 0,30 0,27 0,25 0,23 0,22 0,20
0,2 0,69 0,65 0,59 0,55 0,48 0,43 0,39 0,36 0,33 0,31 0,29 0,27
0,4 0,73 0,69 0,65 0,61 0,55 0,50 0,46 0,42 0,40 0,37 0,35 0,33
0,6 0,75 0,72 0,68 0,65 0,59 0,55 0,51 0,47 0,45 0,42 0,40 0,38
0,8 0,76 0,74 0,71 0,69 0,62 0,58 0,54 0,51 0,48 0,46 0,44 0,42
1,0 0,77 0,75 0,72 0,70 0,65 0,61 0,57 0,54 0,52 0,49 0,47 0,45

ble 4.5

DETERMINING SKEWNESS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
ELEMENTS BASED ON NONLINEAR DEFORMATIONAL
MODEL

4.27. Value of skewness is taken equal to:
at two-valued deformational distribution diagram for the section -
r
1
=
x
b max ,
;
at single-valued deformational distribution diagram for compressed
concrete for the section -
r
1
=
h
b b min , max ,

,
where b,max and b,min maximum and minimum deformations of
concrete determined based on provisions specified in
paras 3.72-3.75;
x height of compressed zone in the direction normal to the
neutral axis;
h depth of section in the direction normal to the
provisional neutral axis (Diagram 3.39,);
at single-valued deformational distribution diagram for tensioned
reinforcement for the section -
r
1
=
s
s s
h
min , max ,

,
where s,max and s,min absolute values of deformations of
reinforcement rods tensioned to the maximum and
minimum extent and determined according to paras
3.72-3.75;
hs distance between these rods in the direction normal to
the provisional neutral axis.
At that, for an element with cracks in tensioned zone of stress in
reinforcement crossing the crack is determined from formula
si=Es(si+0,8s,crc), (4.50)
s1 =
1
0
s
s
bh
A
; 'f =
( )
1
0
'
0
' '
s
s
f f
bh
A
bh
h b b
+

at long-term impact of loads s1 = 560/Rb,ser,
at short-term impact of loads s1 = 300/ Rb,ser.


where si averaged relative deformation of tensioned reinforcement at the
current stage of calculation, corresponding to the linear law of
strain distribution over the section;
s,crc relative deformation of tensioned reinforcement in the section
with a crack immediately after the crack formation (i.. at the
impact of moment Mcrc) equal to s,crc = s,crc /Es, where s,crc
see para 4.13.

If there are cracks in the element, the stressed deformational state of
compressed concrete is determined using a bilinear diagram
b
-
b
using a
transformed modulus of deformation for compressed concrete E
b,red
,
determined according to para 4.24, and values
b0
and
b2
, taken according
to Table 4.7.
In the absence of cracks, the stressed deformational state of
compressed concrete is determined using a three-line diagram (Diagram
4.8), where
b1
= 0,6
1
,
b
ser b
E
R
,
b0
and
b2
see Table 4.7; E
b1
is taken equal
to: at short-term impact of a load E
b
, at long-term impact of a load see
formula (4.41). Stressed deformational state of tensioned concrete can also
be determined using a three-linear diagram (see Diagram 4.8) with
replacement of R
b,ser
with R
bt,ser
,
b0
with
bt0
,
b2
with
bt2,
, where values
bt0

and
bt2
see Table 4.7

ble 4.7
Type of the load
Relative deformations of concrete
at compression at tension
3
0
10
b

3
2
10
b

3
, 1
10
red b
3
0
10
bt

3
2
10
bt

3
, 1
10
red bt

short-term 2,0 3,5 1,5 0,10 0,15 0,08
long-term at relative
ambient air humidity
,%
over 75
40..75
below 40
3,0
3,4
4,0
4,2
4,8
5,6
2,4
2,8
3,4
0,21
0,24
0,28
0,27
0,31
0,36
0,19
0,22
0,26


b,ser
b1
=0,6R

b1 b0 b2
arctgE
b
b,ser
b
R
b

Diagram 4.8.Three-line diagram of the state of compressed concrete.

Skewness can also be determined in a computer-assisted way using a
non-linear deformational model.
At calculation of statically indeterminate structures with consideration
of physical nonlinearity for certain segments of the element, stiffnesses
equal to D=M:
r
1
are used where maximum moment in relation to
geometrical axis of the element in the segment in view,
r
1
- corresponding
skewness determined according to para 4.27.


DETERMINING SHEARING ANGLES OF REINFORCED CONCRETE
ELEMENTS

4.28. Shearing deformation angle is determined from formula

x
=
crc b
x
Gbh
Q

2 , 1
, (4.51)
where Q
x
transverse force in the section from an impact of external load;
b
coefficient considering the concrete creep effect and taken equal to:
at long-term impact of loads
b
= 1+
b,cr
where
b,cr
see Table
4.4; at short-term impact of loads
b
= 1,0;
crc
coefficient considering the influence of cracks to shearing
deformation and taken equal to:
- in segments along the element length having no normal cracks or
cracks inclined to the normal axis of the element, -
crc
= 1,0;
- in segments having only inclined cracks -
crc
= 4,0;
- in segments having only normal or normal and oblique cracks,
coefficient
crc
is determined from formula

crc
=
x x
red b
r M
I E
1 3
(4.52)
where
x
and
x
r

1
- moment and skewness from an external load at its
short-term impact, respectively;
I
red
moment of inertia of total transformed section at
modulus ratio of reinforcement to concrete
= E
s
/E
b
.
Inclined cracks formation corresponds to meeting condition
Q > 0,5R
bt,ser
bh
0
. (4.53)


Example 45. Given: reinforced concrete flooring slab of a civil
building of rectangular section with dimensions h = 200 mm,
b = 1000 mm; h
0
= 173 mm; span l = 5,6 m; concrete of class B15
(E
b
= 24000 MPa; R
b,ser
= 11 MPa, R
bt,ser
= 1,1 MPa); tensioned
reinforcement of class A400 (E
s
=
6
10 2 MPa) with cross-sectional area A
s

= 769 mm
2
(514); total uniformly distributed load q = 7,5 kN/m,
including its part resulting from constant and long-term loads q
l
= 6,5
kN/m; deflection is limited by esthetic requirements.

It is required to calculate deformations of the slab.
C a l c u l a t i o n. Let us determine skewness in the middle of the
span resulting from constant and long-term loads as the deflection is limited
by esthetic requirements.
Moment in the middle of the span equals
M
max
= M
l
=
8
2
l q
l
=
8
6 , 5 5 , 6
2
= 25,5 kN
.
m =
6
10 5 , 25 N
.
mm.
One can assume without calculation that the slab has cracks in
tensioned zone, so the skewness shall be determined from formula (4.45).
Reinforcement factor equals
=
0
bh
A
s
=
173 1000
769
= 0,0045.
At long-term impact of the load, the modulus ratio of the
reinforcement equals
s1
=
ser b
R
,
560
=
11
560
= 50,9. From Table 4.5 at
s1
=
9 , 50 0045 , 0 = 0,226 and
f
'

= 0 one can find
1
= 0,43, and from Table 4.6
at
s1
=
11
300
0045 , 0 = 0,121 and '
f
=
f
= 0 one can find the coefficient
corresponding to long-term impact of the load
2
= 0,13.
Then
max
1
r
=
2
0 1
,
2
2
h A E
R bh M
s s
ser bt

=
2 5
2 6
173 769 10 2 43 , 0
1 , 1 200 1000 13 , 0 10 5 , 25

=
1
10 99 , 9
6
= .
Deflection can be determined from formula (4.33) taking according to
Table 4.3 S =
48
5
:
f = Sl
2
max
1
r
=
6 2
10 99 , 9 5600
48
5

= 32,6 mm.
According to SNiP 2.01.07-85
*
Table 19, item one can find the
deflection maximum allowable according to esthetic requirements for a
span of 5,6 m by means of linear interpolation
f
ult
= 20 + (30 20)
3 6
3 6 , 5
= 28,7 mm < f = 32,6 mm, i.. condition

(4.30) is not met.
Let us revise the value of the slab deflection by means of considering
the variable stiffness in a segment with cracks by determining it from

formula (4.34). To do that, one should determine the moment of cracks
formation M
crc
according to paras 4.5 and 4.8.
Geometrical characteristics of transformed section can be calculated at
modulus ratio =
b
s
E
E
=
24
200
= 8,33:
A
red
= bh + A
s
= 33 , 8 769 200 1000 + = 6408 10 2
5
+ =
5
10 064 , 2 mm
2
;
y
t
=
red
red
A
S
= ( ) = +
5 5
10 064 , 2 / 27 6408 100 10 2 97,7 mm;
I
red
= ( )
2 2 5
3
27 6408 ) 100 ( 10 2
12
200 1000
+ +
t t
y y =
8
10 998 , 6 mm
4
;
W =
t
red
y
I
=
7 , 97
10 998 , 6
8
=
6
10 16 , 7 mm
3
.
Replacing value W in formula (4.4) with value W
pl
= W, where
according to Table 4.1 = 1,3 one can determine value M
crc

M
crc
= R
bt,ser
W = 3 , 1 10 16 , 7 1 , 1
6
=
6
10 24 , 10 N
.
mm.
Similarly, from formula (4.45) one can determine skewness at M =
M
crc

crc
r

1
=
2
0 1
,
2
2
h A E
R bh M
s s
ser bt crc

=
2 5
2 6
173 769 10 2 43 , 0
1 , 1 200 1000 13 , 0 10 24 , 10

=
1
10 28 , 2
6
.
Let us determine skewness
el
r

1
at M = M
crc
without consideration of
cracks under long-term impact of the load and, taking from Table 4.4 for
concrete of class B15
b,cr
= 3,4 and therefore E
b1
=
cr b
b
E
,
1 +
=
4 , 3 1
24000
+
=
5455MPa.
As the influence of value ( )
el
r
1
to the element deflection is not
significant, one can determine the skewness from formula (4.38) without
recalculation of value I
red
:
el
r

1
=
red b
crc
I E
M
1
=
8
6
10 998 , 6 5455
10 24 , 10

=
1
10 68 , 2
6
.
Coefficients m and k equal:
m = M
r
/M
max
= 10,24/25,5 = 0,4019; k =
max
1
/
1
r r
crc
=2,28/9,99=0,228.
Then

f= ( )( )

+ + + +
el
r
m m k mk m
r
l 1
4 1 3 3 5
1
48
2
max
2
=
( )( ) [ ] + + + + 68 , 2 4019 , 0 4 4019 , 0 1 228 , 0 228 , 0 4019 , 0 3 4019 , 0 3 5 99 , 9
48
5600
2
2

6
10
= 27,6 mm < f
ult
= 28,7 mm,
i.. revised deflection value does not exceed the allowable one.
Example 46. Given: reinforced concrete roofing slab with design span
5,7 m; sectional dimensions (for a half of the slab section) as per Diagram
4.9; concrete of class B25 (E
b
= 30000 MPa, R
b,ser
= 18,5 MPa,
R
bt,ser
= 1,55 MPa); principal reinforcement of class A400 with cross-
sectional area A
s
=380mm
2
(122); constant and long-term uniformly
distributed load q
l
= 11 kN/m; slab deflection is limited by esthetic
requirements; ambient air humidity is reduced (w < 40%).
It is required to calculate deformations of the slab.
C a l c u l a t i o n . As approximated formula for skewness (4.45) does
not apply to structures operated at air humidity less than 40%, the skewness
shall be determined from general formula (4.42) as for elements with cracks
in tensioned zone.
Moment in the middle of the slab resulting from constant and long-term
loads for a half of the slab section equals:
50 45 635
3
0
15
1
0
0
3
0
0
65
3
1
22400

Diagram 4.9. For calculation example 46

M
max
= M
l
=
8 2
2
l q
l
=
8 2
7 , 5 11
2
= 22,34 kN
.
m.
First, the moment of cracks formation M
crc
should be determined
according to paras 4.5 and 4.8. Let us determine geometrical characteristics
of transformed section at modulus ratio =
b
s
E
E
= =
3
3
10 30
10 200
= 6,67:
A
red
= 67 , 6 380 635 30 2 / 45 300 15 100 50 300 + + + + =

5 , 2533 19050 6750 1500 15000 + + + + = = 44833 mm
2
;
y
t
= ( ) 44833 / 31 5 , 2533 285 19050 200 6750 50 1500 150 15000 + + + + =
=204,84 mm;
I
red
=
( ) ( ) + +
+ +
2
3
2
3
50 1500
12
15 100
150 15000
12
50 300
t t
y y

( ) +
+ +
12
635 30
200 6750
36
45 300
3
2
3
t
y ( ) ( )
2 2
31 5 , 2533 285 19050 +
t t
y y =
=
8
10 291 , 4 mm
4
.
Elastic section modulus W =
t
red
y
I
=
8 , 204
10 291 , 4
8
=
6
10 2,095 mm
3
.
Replacing value W in formula (4.9) with W
pl
= W , where = 1,3 (see
Table 4.1), one can determine value M
crc
:
M
crc
= R
bt,ser
W
pl
= 3 , 1 10 095 , 2 55 , 1
6
=
6
10 22 , 4 N
.
mm = 4,22 kN
.
m.
From formula (4.26) one can determine coefficient
s
s
= 1 0,8
M
M
crc
= 1 0,8
34 , 22
22 , 4
= 0,849.
Transformed modulus of deformation under long-term impact of the
load at w < 40% equals
E
b,red
=
red b
ser b
R
, 1
,
=
4
10 34
5 , 18
= 5441,2 MPa,
and then
s2
=
s red b
s
E
E

,
=
849 , 0 2 , 5441
10 2
5
= 43,29.
Height of compressed zone can be determined from formula (4.44),
taking the averaged rib width equal to 85 mm and the area of compressed
overhangs being equal to A
c
= (b
f
'-b)h
f
' = 30 635 = 19050 mm
2
, and
effective depth h
0
= 300 31 = 269 mm:
s2
=
2
0
s
s
bh
A
= 29 , 43
269 85
380
= 0,719;
f
' =
0
bh
A
=
269 85
19050
= 0,833; '
s
= 0,0;
z =
s
s2
+
f
' = 0,719 + 0,833 = 1,552;
x = h
0
+ + z
h
h
z
f
f s s
0
'
'
2
2
2
2 =

=269

+ + 1,552
269
15
833 , 0 719 , 0 2 552 , 1
2
= 116,4 mm.

I
red
= ( ) = +
+
2
0 2
2
'
3
2 3
x h A
h
x A
bx
s s
f
c

= ( ) ( )
2 2
3
4 , 116 269 29 , 43 380 15 4 , 116 19050
3
4 , 116 85
+ +
=
8
10 236 , 6 mm
4
.
From formula (4.42) one has
max
1
r
=
red red b
I E
M
,
max
=
8
6
10 236 , 6 2 , 5441
10 34 , 22

=
1
10 58 , 6
6
.
Deflection can be determined from formula (4.33), taking according to
Table 4.3 S =
48
5
:
f = Sl
2
max
1
r
=
6 2
10 58 , 6 5700
48
5

= 22,3 mm.
According to SNiP 2.01.07-85
*
Table 19, line 3, the maximum
allowable deflection according to esthetical requirements for a span of 5,7
m equals f
ult
= 29 mm > f = 22,3 mm, i.. condition (4.30) is met.

5. STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

5.1. To provide for carrying capacity, normal serviceability and
longevity of concrete and reinforced concrete structures, apart from
requirements determined by calculation, the following structural
requirements shall be met:
- to geometrical dimensions of structure elements;
- to reinforcement (content and location of reinforcement, thickness of
protective layer of concrete, anchoring and reinforcement joints);
- to protection of structures against negative environmental impact.

GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONS OF STRUCTURES

5.2. Minimum geometrical dimensions of structure sections shall be
set so as to provide for:

- possibility of appropriate location of reinforcement (distances
between the rods, protective layer of concrete etc.), its anchoring and
combined behavior with concrete;
- sufficient stiffness of structures;
- required fireproofness, watertightness of structures, heat and sound
insulation, corrosion resistance, protection against radiation etc.;
- possibility of quality manufacturing at structures concreting.
5.3. Sectional dimensions of eccentrically compressed elements to
provide for their stiffness are recommended to set at such values that their
flexibility
i
l
0
in any direction does not exceed:
- for reinforced concrete elements - 200 (for rectangular sections at
l0/h 60);
- for column serving as building elements - 120 (at l0/h35);
- for concrete elements - 90 (at l0/h 2b).
5.4. Thickness
1
of monolithic ribbed floorings thickness shall be taken
no less than, mm:
for roofs 40;
for interstorey floorings of living and public
buildings50;
for interstorey floorings of industrial buildings
60.
5.5. In structures of buildings and facilities one should envisage their
slitting with permanent and temporary contraction joints with distances
between them set according to climatic conditions, structural features of the
facility, sequence of works execution etc.
If nonuniform settlement of foundation is possible, one should
envisage structures slitting with settlement joints.

REINFORCEMENT

PROTECTIVE LAYER OF CONCRETE

5.6. Reinforcement located inside the section of a structure

1
Here and further in the text values of section dimensions, thickness of protective layer
of concrete etc. specified in the present Training Aid pertain to nominal values used at
design stage and specified in Diagrams. In kind, there can be deviations form these
nominal values, not exceeding values specified in corresponding state standards,
technical specifications etc.

shall have a protective layer of concrete (distance from
reinforcement surface to surface of a corresponding face of a
structure) to provide for:
- composite action of reinforcement and concrete;
- anchoring of reinforcement in the concrete and possibility of
jointing of reinforcement elements;
- protection of reinforcement from environmental impact (including
that of aggressive environment);
- fire resistance and fire endurance.
5.7. Thickness of protective layer of concrete is set based on
requirements of para 5.6 with account of the structure type, intended
purpose of reinforcement in the structures (longitudinal principal,
crosswise, distributional, structural reinforcement), environmental
conditions and diameter of reinforcement.
Minimum thickness values of protective layer of concrete for principal
reinforcement should be taken according to Table 5.1.

ble 5.1
Operational conditions of the building structures
Thickness
of
protective
layer of
concrete,
mm, no
less than
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.
In closed rooms at normal and reduced humidity
In closed rooms at increased humidity (if no additional
protective measures are envisaged)
In the open air (if no additional protective measures are
envisaged)
In the ground (if no additional protective measures are
envisaged), in foundations, if concrete blinding is
available
In monolithic foundations if no concrete blinding is
available
20

25

30

40

70


For precast elements, minimum thickness values of protective
layer of concrete for principal reinforcement specified in Table 5.1
shall be decreased by 5 mm.
For reinforced concrete slabs made of concrete of class B20 and
higher manufactured at plants in metallic moulds and protected in a facility
with concrete blinding or screed, the thickness of protective layer for upper
reinforcement is permitted to be set at 5 mm.
For structural reinforcement, minimum thickness values of
protective layer of concrete are set by 5 mm lower than the required
ones for principal reinforcement.
In all cases, thickness of protective layer of concrete should also be
taken no less than a diameter of a reinforcement rod.
5.8. In flexural, tensioned and eccentrically compressed (with
Ml/Nl > 0,3 h) elements, except for foundations, thickness of protective
layer for tensioned principal reinforcement should not, as a rule, exceed 50
mm. In a protective layer over 50 mm thick, structural reinforcement in the
form of meshes should be installed. At that, cross-sectional area of
longitudinal reinforcement of meshes shall be no less than 0,05 As, spacing
of crosswise reinforcement shall not exceed section depth and meet
requirements specified in para 5.18.

MINIMUM DISTANCES BETWEEN REINFORCEMENT RODS

5.9. Minimum clearances between reinforcement rods should be taken
so as to provide combined behavior of reinforcement and concrete and
quality manufacturing of structures associated with placement and
compaction of concrete mixture but no less than the largest diameter of a
rod, as well as no less than:
25 mm at horizontal or inclined position of rods during concreting
for lower reinforcement located in one or two rows;
30 mm - same, for upper reinforcement;
50 mm - same, at lower reinforcement location in greater than two
rows (except for rods of two lower rows) as well as at vertical position of
rods during concreting.
In elements or nodes with highly concentrated reinforcement or
embedded items manufactured without usage of a platform vibrator or a
falsework-fixed vibrator, in certain places clearance of 60 mm shall be
provided for in order to allow the heads of spud vibrators compacting the

concrete mixture to pass between the reinforcement rods. Distances
between these places shall be no greater than 500 mm.
Under constrained conditions it is permitted to locate rods in groups
bunches (without clearances between them). At that, clearances between
the bunches shall also be no less than a transformed diameter of a rod
equivalent to cross-sectional area of a reinforcement bunch taken equal to
ds,red =

n
i
si
d
2
where dsi diameter of one rod in the bunch, number of
rods in the bunch.
5.10. Clearances between the rods of ribbed profile specified in para
5.9 are determined based on nominal diameter without consideration of
projecting parts and ribs.
At determining reinforcement location in a section under constrained
conditions with consideration of other adjoining reinforcement elements
and embedded items, one should take into account diameters of rods with
consideration of projecting parts and ribs (Appendix 1) as well as allowable
deviations from nominal dimensions of reinforcement rods, welded meshes
and frames, embedded items, shape and location of reinforcement and
embedded items in the section.

LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT

5.11. In reinforced concrete elements, cross-sectional area of
longitudinal tensioned reinforcement as well as compressed one if it is
required according to calculation, as percentage of cross-sectional area of
concrete, equal to the product of a rectangular section width or a rib width
of a T- or I-section by the effective depth of section, s = % 100
0

bh
A
s
should
be taken no less than the one specified in Table 5.2
In elements with longitudinal reinforcement located uniformly over
the section contour as well as in centrally tensioned elements, the minimum
cross-sectional area of all longitudinal reinforcement should be taken twice
as large as that specified in Table 5.2 and include them into the total area of
cross-sectional area of concrete.
Elements not meeting the requirements of minimum reinforcement are
regarded as concrete elements.
Requirements of the present paragraph are not taken into account at
determining a cross-sectional area of reinforcement installed along the slab

or panel contour based on calculation of deflection in the plane of slab
(panel).
5.12. In concrete structures one should envisage structural
reinforcement:
- in places of sharp changes of element section dimensions;
- in concrete walls under and above apertures;
- in eccentrically compressed elements calculated for durability
without considering behavior of tensioned concrete, at faces where tensile
stresses appear; at that, factor of reinforcement s is taken no less than
0,025%.

ble 5.2.
Operational conditions of reinforcement s,min ,%
1.Reinforcement S in flexural and eccentrically tensioned
elements with normal force being applied beyond the effective
depth of the section
2.Reinforcement S and S in eccentrically tensioned elements
with normal force being applied between the reinforcement S
and S
3.Reinforcement in eccentrically compressed elements at:
) l0 /i < 17 (for rectangular sections - at l0/h 5)
) 17 < l0 /i 35 (5 < l0 /h 10)
) 35 < l0 /i < 83 (10 < l0 /h <25)
) l0 /i 83 (l0 /h > 25)
0,10

0,10

0,10
0,15
0,20
0,25
Note: For eccentrically compressed elements at 17 < l0 /i <83 value s,min ,(%)
can also be determined by means of linear interpolation between values 0,10
and 0,25

5.13. In reinforced concrete linear structures and slabs the ;largest
distances between axes of longitudinal reinforcement rods providing for
efficient engagement of concrete, uniform distribution of stresses and
deformations as well as limitation of cracks opening width between
reinforcement rods shall be no greater than:
- in reinforced concrete beams and slabs:
200 mm at cross-section depth h 150 mm;
1,5 h and 400 mm at cross-section depth h > 150 mm;
- in reinforced concrete columns:
400 mm in the direction perpendicular to the plane of flection;

500 mm - in the direction of flection.
In reinforced concrete walls distances between rods of vertical
reinforcement are taken no greater than 2t and 400 mm (t- wall thickness),
and those of horizontal reinforcement no greater than 400 mm.
In hollow-core floorings the distances between axes of principal rods
are permitted to be increased in accordance with hollow parts of section but
no greater than 2h.
At reinforcing continuous slabs with welded rolled meshes, close to
intermediate supports it is permitted to transfer all lower rods into upper
zone.
Continuous slabs no greater than 80 mm thick are permitted to be
reinforced with single flat meshes without bendings.
5.14. In beams and ribs over 150 mm thick, the number of
longitudinal principal tensioned rods in the cross-section shall be no less
than two. At the element thickness of 150 mm and less it is permitted to
install one longitudinal rod in the cross-section.
5.15. In beams, rods of longitudinal principal reinforcement with
cross-sectional area no less than 1/2 of the section area of the rods in the
span and no less than two rods should be brought to the support
In slabs, rods of longitudinal principal reinforcement over 1 m of the
slab width with cross-sectional area no less than 1/3 of the section area of
rods over 1 m of the slab thickness in the span and no less than two rods
should be brought to the support.
5.16. In flexural elements at section depth over 700 mm, structural
longitudinal rods shall be placed at lateral faces, with distances between
rods being no greater than 400 mm and cross-sectional area no less than 0,1
% of the cross-sectional area of concrete having a dimension equal by the
element height to the distance between these rods, by the width to a half
of the element rib width, but no greater than 200 mm (Diagram 5.1).

Diagram 5.1. Installation of structural longitudinal reinforcement by the depth of
beam section


5.17. Diameter of longitudinal rods of eccentrically compressed linear
elements of monolithic structures shall be no less than 12 mm. In columns
with a dimension less than the section side of 250 mm and over, diameter of
longitudinal rods is recommended to be set at no less than 16 mm.
In reinforced concrete walls, diameter of longitudinal rods is
recommended to be set at no less than 8 mm.

CROSSWISE REINFORCEMENT

5.18. Crosswise reinforcement should be installed based upon
calculation of force bearing as well as in order to limit cracks formation,
retention of longitudinal rods in design position and prevention of their
lateral deflection in any direction.
Crosswise reinforcements installed at all surfaces of reinforced
concrete elements with longitudinal reinforcement installed close to them.
At that, distances between crosswise rods at each surface of the element
shall be no greater than 600 mm and no greater than doubled width of the
element face. Crosswise reinforcement is permitted not to be installed at
faces of thin ribs with width of 150 mm and less, having only one
longitudinal rod installed in the width.
5.19. In eccentrically compressed elements with their carrying
capacity at the given eccentricity of normal force if used at less than 50 %,
as well as in elements with flexibility
i
l
0
< 17 (for instance, windowsills),
where according to calculation no compressed reinforcement is needed and
the number of tensioned reinforcement does not exceed 0,3 % it is
permitted not to install crosswise reinforcement required according to para
5.18, along faces parallel to the plane of flection. At that, reinforcement
along faces perpendicular to the plane o flection is carried out with welded
frames and meshes with protective layer of concrete less than 50 mm thick
and no less than two diameters of longitudinal reinforcement.
5.20. Diameter of crosswise reinforcement (stirrups) in tied frames of
eccentrically compressed elements is taken no less than 0,25 of the largest
diameter of longitudinal reinforcement and no less than 6 mm.
Diameter of crosswise reinforcement in tied frames of flexural
elements is taken no less than 6 mm.
5.21. In reinforced concrete elements in which according to
calculation a transverse force cannot be supported by concrete alone, one

should envisage installation of crosswise reinforcement with spacing no
greater than 0,5h0 and no greater than 300 mm.
In solid slabs as well as in hollow-core and multiribbed plates less
than 300 mm high and in beams (ribs) less than 150 mm high at the element
segment where according to calculation a transverse force is supported by
concrete only, it is permitted not to install any crosswise reinforcement.
In beams and ribs with height of 150 mm and over as well as in
multiribbed plates with height of 300 mm and over where according to
calculation a transverse force is supported by concrete only, one should
envisage installation of crosswise reinforcement with spacing no greater
than 0,75 h0 and no greater than 500 mm.
5.22. Bent reinforcement rods shall be envisaged in flexural elements
when reinforcement is provided by means of tied frames. Bendings shall be
carried out in an arc with radius no less than 10d (Diagram 5.2). In flexural
elements at the ends of bent rods straight parts shall be provided with length
of no less than 0,8l, taken according to provisions of para 5.32 but no
less than 20d in tensioned zone and 10d in compressed zone.

Diagram 5.2. Structure of reinforcement bendings

Straight parts of bent plain rods shall end with hooks.
Distance from the face of free support to the upper end of the first
bending (counting from the support) shall be no greater than 50 mm.
The inclination angle of the bendings to the longitudinal axis of the
element shall be taken within 30 - 60, it is recommended to take the angle
equal to 45.
5.23. in eccentrically compressed linear elements as well as in flexural
elements, if proven necessary by calculation compressed longitudinal
reinforcement is available, in order to prevent bending of longitudinal
reinforcement, one should envisage installation of crosswise reinforcement
with spacing no greater than 15d and no greater than 500 mm (d diameter
of compressed longitudinal reinforcement).
0,8l; 10d
r10d
50 mm 0,8l ; 20d

If concentration of compressed longitudinal reinforcement installed at
one of the element faces exceeds 1,5%, crosswise reinforcement shall be
installed with spacing no greater than 10d and no greater than 300 mm.
Distances between stirrups of eccentrically compressed elements in
places of principal reinforcement jointing by overlapping without welding
shall be no greater than 10d.
5.24. Structure of stirrups (crosswise rods) in eccentrically
compressed linear elements shall be chosen the way that longitudinal rods
(at least every second rod) would be located in places of bending, and these
bendings at a distance of no greater than 400 mm over the face width. At
the face width of no greater than 400 mm and the number of longitudinal
rods at this face no greater than four, it is permitted to use a single stirrup to
wrap all longitudinal rods (Diagram 5.3).

Diagram 5.3. Structure of spatial reinforcement frames in compressed elements

5.25. In reinforced concrete walls crosswise rods normal to the plane
of the wall are located at distances no greater than 20d vertically and no
greater than 600 mm horizontally. At that, if, according to calculation, the
required longitudinal reinforcement has lower concentration than the
minimum percentage of reinforcement (see Table 5.2), crosswise rods can
be located at distances no greater than 600 mm vertically and no greater
than 1000 mm horizontally.
At concentration of longitudinal reinforcement in reinforced concrete
walls of over 2%, crosswise rods shall be located at distances no greater
than 15d vertically and no greater than 500 mm, and horizontally no
greater than 400 mm and no greater than 2 spaces of vertical rods.
In this paragraph, d diameter of vertical rods.
5.26. Crosswise reinforcement in slabs in the zone of pushing in the
direction perpendicular to the sides of design contour is installed with
spacing no greater than h0/3 and no greater than 300 mm. The closest to
the contour of load area rods are installed no closer than h0/3 and no farther
than h0/2 from this contour. At that, the width of the crosswise

reinforcement installation area (from the contour of the load area) shall be
no less than 1,5h0.
Distances between the rods of crosswise reinforcement in the direction
parallel to the sides of the design contour are taken no greater than 1/4 of
the length of the corresponding side of the design contour.
5.27. Crosswise reinforcement in the form of welded meshes of lateral
reinforcement at exposure to local compression (bearing) shall meet the
following requirements:
) the mesh rods area per unit of length in one and the other directions
shall not differ greater than 1,5 fold;
) spacing of meshes (distance between the meshes in the axes of rods
of the same directions) should be taken no less than 60 and no greater than
150 mm;
) mesh cell clearance size shall be no less than 45 and no greater
than 100 mm;
) the first mesh is located at the distance of 15-20 mm from the
loaded surface of the element.
5.28. Crosswise reinforcement intended to support transverse forces
and torque moments shall have a closed contour with reliable anchorage at
the ends by means of welding or wrapping with longitudinal reinforcement
providing for full-strength connections in crosswise reinforcement.

REINFORCEMENT ANCHORING

5.29. reinforcement is anchored using of the following methods or a
combination thereof:
- as a straight rod end (straight anchoring);
- with a bend at the rod end in the form of a hook, fold (pawl) or a
loop;
- with welding or installation of transverse rods;
- using special anchoring devices at the rod end.
5.30. Straight anchoring and anchoring with pawls is allowed for use
only with periodic profile reinforcement. hooks, loops, welded transverse
rods or special anchoring devices should be provided For extended plain
rods.
Pawls, hooks and loops are not recommended for use with compressed
reinforcement anchoring, except for smooth reinforcement, which can
undergo tension under certain load combinations.

5.31. WHEN calculating the length of reinforcement anchoring the
following should be considered: anchoring method, reinforcement class and
profile, reinforcement diameter, concrete durability and its stressed state in
the anchoring zone, design of the element in the anchoring zone (transverse
reinforcement, position of rods in the element section, etc.).
5.32. The basic (principal) anchoring length necessary for the
transmission of effort in the reinforcement with the total computed value of
resistance Rs for concrete is determined using the formula
l0, an=
s bond
s s
u R
A R
, (5.1)
where As and us are the cross-sectional area of the anchored reinforcement
rod and the perimeter of its sections determined along the
nominal rod diameter respectively;
Rbond is the calculated resistance of reinforcement cohesion with
concrete taken to evenly distributed along the leng of
anchoring and determined using the formula
Rbond =
bt
R
2 1
, (5.2)
here 1 is the coefficient taking into account the influence of the
reinforcement surface type taken to equal:
1.5 for smooth reinforcement (a240 class);
2.0 cold-deformable periodic profile reinforcement (v500 class)
2.5 for hot-rolled and thermomechanically reinforced periodic
profile reinforcement (a300, A400 and A500 classes);
2 is the coefficient taking into account the influence of the
reinforcement diameter size taken to equal:
1.0 for reinforcement diameter ds 32 mm;
0.9 for reinforcement diameters 36 and 40 mm.
5.33. The required calculated reinforcement anchoring length taking
into account element design in the anchoring zone is determined using the
formula
lan =
ef s
cal s
an
A
A
l
,
,
, 0
, (5.3)
where l0, an is the basic anchoring length determined using formula (5.1);
As,cal, As,ef are the cross-sectional areas of reinforcement required
according to the calculation with the full design impedance
and actually established, respectively;

is the coefficient taking into account the influence of the concrete
and reinforcement stressed state and element design in the
anchoring zone on the anchoring length.
when anchoring periodic profile rods with the straight ends (straight
anchoring) or smooth reinforcement with hooks or loops without additional
anchoring devices for extended rods is taken equal to = 1.0, and for
compressed rods = 0.75.
It is allowed to decrease the anchoring length depending on the
quantity and diameter of the transverse reinforcement and the value of
transverse concrete compression in the anchoring zone (for example, from
bearing pressure), in accordance with the indications in p.3.45.
The values of the relative anchoring length an = lan/ds for rods that
work with the full design impedance with diameters less than 36 mm, are
provided in table.3.3 p.3.45.
in any case the actual anchoring length is taken at no less than
, , 0
3 . 0
an
l
and no less than 15ds and 200 mm.
5.34. The effort experienced to the anchored reinforcement rod Ns, is
determined using the formula
Ns=RsAs
an
s
l
l
rsAs (5.4)
where lan is determined according to p.5.33 with As,cal/As,ef = 1.0;
ls is the distance from the anchored rod end to the cross section of the
considered element.
5.35. At the outer free supports of elements the length of overreach of
the tie bars over the internal face of the free support, if the Q 0.5Rbtbh0
condition is met, must be at least 5ds. If the indicated condition is not met,
the length of reinforcement overreach over the support face is checked by
calculation according to paragraphs.3.43 3.46.
5.36. Special measures for the anchoring of longitudinal rods must be
adopted when it is impossibile to meet the requirements of p. 5.33:
A) a device at the ends of special anchors in the form of plates,
washers, nuts, corners, closing heads, etc. (Drawing 5.4). thereby the
anchor-to-concrete contact area must meet the concrete crumpling condition
(see Section 3.81), and the thickness of the anchoring plate must be at least
1/5 of the total width (diameter) and meet the welding conditions; the length
of rod fixation must be calculated for riving and taken at no less than 10d;
b) the 90 fold of the anchored rod over the circular arc with a radius
in the clear no less than 10d(1 l1/lan) [where l1 IS THE length of THE

straight section at the START of the fixation (Drawing 5.5.)], and no less
than the values stipulated in p.5.41; additional stirrups against rods
unbending are placed in the bent section;
c) welding over the fixation length ls of the transverse anchoring rods;
in this case the length of anchoring lap, determined according to p. 5.32,
decreases by the length L = lan
s s
w
A R
N
[where for Nw see formula (3.75) in
p.3.45], but more than for 0.43ls; L 150 mm, plain rods may be supplied
without hooks, whereby the value of lan does not decrease.

DRAWING 5.4. reinforcement Anchoring using devices at the ends of special
anchors, as
a a welded-on plate; b pressed plate; C closing head; d closing head with
washer; e rod welded-on to the corner; f nut with an outside washer; g internal
nut

DRAWING 5.5. ANCHORING OF REINFORCEMENT BY FOLDING

REINFORCEMENT CONNECTIONS

5.37. one of the following joints types is used to connect
reinforcement:
A) overlapped joints without welding:
- with straight periodic profile rod ends;
- with straight rod ends with welding or installation of transverse
rods along the length of the overlap;
- with bends at the ends (hooks, pawls, loops); thereby only hooks
and loops are used for plain rods.
b) welded and mechanical butting joints:
- reinforcement welding;
- using special mechanical devices (joints with the pressed sockets,
screwed sockets, etc.).
5.38. the provisions of p.5.30 apply To overlapping reinforcement
connections.
The joints of extended or compressed reinforcement must have a
bypass (overlap) length no less than the value of ll determined using the
formula
ll=
ef s
cal s
an
A
A
l
,
,
, 0
, (5.5)

where l0,an is the reference anchoring length determined using formula
(5.1);
As,cal, As,ef - see p.5.33;
is the coefficient taking into account the influence of the stressed
reinforcement state, element design in the rods connection zone, amount of
butted reinforcement within one section with respect to the total amount of
reinforcement in this section, distance between butting rods.
when connecting periodic profile reinforcement with straight ends and
plain rods with hooks or loops without additional anchoring devices, the
coefficient for extended reinforcement is taken equal to 1.2, and 0.9 for
compressed reinforcement. trhereby the following conditions must be met:
- the relative amount of working extended periodic profile
reinforcement butted in one design level element cross-section
must not exceed 50%, for smooth reinforcement (with hooks or
loops) this value should not be more than 25%;
- the effort experienced by the entire transverse reinforcement
placed within the joint limits must be no less than half the effort
experienced by the working extended reinforcement butting in one
design level element cross-section;
- the distance between the butted working reinforcement rods must
not exceed 4ds (DRAWING 5.6, A);
- the distance between adjacent overlapped joints (along the width of
the reinforeced concrete element) must be no less than 2ds and no
less than 30 mm (Drawing 5.6, b).


Drawing 5.6 the arrangement of overlapping butted rods and joints
a the arrangement of rods in the joint; b the arrangement of joints

an element section with a length of 1.3ll along the butted
reinforcement is adopted As one design element cross-section examined to
determine the relative amount of butted reinforcement within one section. It
is considered that the reinforcement joints are located in one design cross-
section, if the centers of these joints are within the limits of the length of
this section (Drawing 5.6,b).
It is allowed to increase the relative amount of working extended
reinforcement butted in one design element cross-section to 100%, taking
the coefficient value equal to 2.0. when the relative amount of periodic
profile reinforcement butted in a design cross-section is more than 50% or
more than 25% for smooth reinforcement, the coefficient value is
determined by linear interpolation.
The length of butting rods overlap may can reduced when there are
additional anchoring devices at the ends of butting rods (welding of
transverse reinforcement, bending of periodic profile butting rod ends, etc.),
but not more than by 30%.
in any case the actual overlap length must be no less than 0.4
an
l
, 0
,
no less than 20 ds and no less than 250 mm.
d
s

ll 2ds; >30mm
0 e 4ds
d
s

1.3ll
2ds; >30mm
ll

5.39. When connecting reinforcement using welding the welded joint
types and welding methods are selected taking into account the facility
operating conditions, steel weldability and production technology
requirements in accordance with the valid regulatory documents (gost
14098-91).
5.40. When using socket-type mechanical devices to connect
reinforcement elements (threaded sockets, pressed sockets, etc.) the bearing
capacity of the socket connection must be the same as of the butting rods
(during extension or compression respectively). The ends of butting rods
should be inserted into the socket for the required length determined by
calculation or experimentally.
When using threaded sockets they must be tightened to eliminate gaps
in the thread must.

BENT RODS

5.41. when using bent reinforcement (folds, rod ends bends), the
minimum diameter of the bend of a separate rod must be such as to avoid
the destruction or splitting of concrete inside the reinforcment rod bend and
its destruction at the bending point (see paragraphs 5.22, 5.36).
The minimum diameter of the dop mount for reinforcement is
adopted depending on the diameter of rod ds but no less than:
- for the plain rods
dop = 2.5 ds for ds < 20 mm;
doP = 4 ds for ds 20 mm;
- for periodic profile rods
doP = 5ds for ds < 20 mm;
doP = 8 ds for ds 20 mm.

REQUIREMENTS TO CONCRETE AND
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

5.42. The sizes of composite concrete and reinforced concrete
elements should be assigned taking into account load capacity and
dimensional limitations of the technological, transport and installation
equipment at the manufacturing plants and at the construction sites. when
necessary the possibility of lifting the reinforced concrete item together
with the form should be considered.

5.43. To avoid damages from local stress concentrations during an
abrupt change in the directions of the element faces (for example, within the
internal corners) the outline should be softened with, if possible, small
drafts, bevels or roundings (up to 50 mm) so that local reinforcement would
not be required (DRAWING 5.7, A, B, C).
sharp external corners should be equiped with slants or roundings to
avoid concrete splitting off (Drawing 5.7, e).

Drawing 5.7. Roundings and bevels
a roundings in a ribbed slab; b bevel between a flange and the wall in a T-beam; c
A combination of bevel and rounding at a truss knot; d softening a sharp cross bar
corner; e rounding the opening for communications, slinging, etc.
5.44. Openings in reinforced concrete elements intended for
communication lines, slinging etc. should be taken as small as possible and
located within the reinforcement grids cells and frames so that it would not
be necessary to cut the reinforcement and reinforce on the spot. It is
desirable to make the openings corners smooth (Drawing 5.7, d)
5.45. During the design of concrete and reinforced concrete structures
their outline should be adopted taking into account the design and method
of exploitation of the forms (moulding).
when applying forms with the flaps the outline of the article must not
prevent the edge from turning (Drawing 5.8,A) during the removal of
moulding.
when applying permanent forms the possibility of removing the article
from them must be ensured using technological inclines of at least 1:10
(Drawing 5.8, b, c). when applying permanent forms using pressing-off the
incline must be no less than 1:15 (Drawing 5.8,D).
during the immediate removal of the molds while ensuring a fixed (to
avoid the damage of concrete) vertical displacement of the molding rigging
element (Drawing 5.8, d, e) the incline must not be less than 1:50.
Node a
E)
D)
C)
B)
A)

Drawing 5.8. Technological inclines
a in a form with flaps; b and c in a permanently attached form; d the same with
the application of the press-off; e and f for immediate molds removal; g in a form
with a solid edge; h the same, with the press-off
1 article; 2 form; 3 the flap; 4 press off; 5 insert

when using forms with one fixed and one flap side the shift from a
larger to a smaller article width [for example, from the lower flange to the
wall (Drawing 5.8, G)] should be adopted as smooth with an of AT least
45 to ensure the possibility of vertical lift during the removal of moulding.
This requirement may be disregarded, if the form is equiped with a pressing
device (Drawing 5.8.3).
The use of pressing off and the immediate removal of molds must be
coordinated with the items manufacturer.
5.46. when designing composite reinforced concrete articles a
convenient methods of their acquisition using load-gripping devices during
the removal from the form (removal of the molds) and during loading-
unloading and installation should be provided.
i
1
:
5
0


the Methods and points of acquisition should be designated taking into
account the itemss production and installation technology and its design
features.
the item must be checked by calculation for the operating conditions
under the adopted method and arrangement of acquisiotion points.
5.47. slinging devices should be provided In concrete and reinforced
concrete items: sling openings (including for inventory loops), grooves,
ledges, etc. or stationary steel sling loops, which must be made from hot-
rolled steel according to p. 2.16.
items should be acquired as far as possible without applying devices
that require the expenditure of steel through the creation of depressions,
grooves, openings, ledges, etc. (Drawing 5.9).
5.48. standard loops should be used for the design of items with sling
loops. in the absence of standard loops with the required characteristics it si
recommended to design loops of the types indicated in Drawing 5.10.
The minimum parameters for loops with straight and bent branches of
p1,1 and P2,1 types (see Drawing 5.10) are indicated in table 5.3.
5.49. The diameter of loop d rod should be adopted according to table 5.4
depending on the mass of the item applied to the loop. The mass of the item
article is determined according to the provisions in p. 2.12. when lifting flat
items using four loops, the mass of the items is considered to be distributed
over three loops.

daig.5.9. Examples of sling devices without loops
a during block slinging; b sling openings in a column; c a combination of two
different sling devices in one item
1 cargo slings; 2 acquisition cut; 3 acquisition opening; 4 acquisition loop for
extraction from form

DRAWING 5.10. TYPES OF SLING LOOPS
a freely placed in items made of steel classes A240 and A300; b placed in
constricted conditions made of steel class A240; c the same, made of A300 steel

Table 5.3
Loops
Designations of
sizes
Sizes
d 6-12 14; 16 18-22 25
R 30 30 40 60
R 20 30 40 60
a1 3d
a2 6d

Table 5.4
Diameter
of loop
rod, mm
Mass of item m, kg,
assigned during lifting
to one loop made of
steel of class:
Diameter
of loop
rod, mm
Mass of item m, kg,
assigned during lifting to
one loop made of steel of
class:
A 240 A 300 A 240 A 300
'
8
10
12
14
16
150
300
700
1100
1500
2000

900
1500
1900
2500
18
20
22
25
28
32
2500
3100
3800
4900
6100
8000
3100
3900
4700
6100
7600
9900
Notes: 1. the Values of t correspond to the angle between the slings and
the horizon equal to 45 and more; smaller slope angles are not allowed.
If items slinging using vertical slings is provided, during the selection of
loop diameter it is allowed to decrease the item mass applied to the loop
1.4 times.
2. for a loop rod diameter from 8 to 22 mm (incl.) it is allowed to increase
the provided values of t by 25% with a special substantiation.

When lifting using three loops and more located at the same side of
the item (for example, on the wall panel), item mass is tken as distributed to
only two loops; therefore, in this case it is not recommended to install more
than two loops.
when using devices (self-balancing traverses) ensuring the self-
balancing of the efforts between the slings, it is allowed to distribute the
item mass between the loops in accordance with the device design.
5.50. The gudgeon height he (Drawing 5.10) that corresponds to the
sizes of the cargo slings hoisting hooks should be taken equal to (in mm):
60 for loop rod diameter from 6 to 16 mm;
80 from 18 and 22 mm;
150. from 25 to 32 mm.
Length ls and penetration depth hb of the ends of loop branches into
the items concrete (see Drawing 5.10) should be taken according to table
5.5
when arranging sling loops in standard deepenings (Drawing 5.11,A)
the value of hb may be counted off from the upper surface of the concrete
element.


Table 5.5
standard cubic
durability of concrete
at the moment of first
item lifting, MPa
Length of penetration
into concrete ls
Depth of penetration
into concrete hb
From 3 to 7
SV 5 to 10
,, 10 ,, 20
,, 20 ,, 30
SV 30
45d (50d)
35d (40d)
30d (35d)
25d (30d)
20d (25d)
35d (40d)
25d (30d)
20d (25d)
15d (20d)
15d (20d)
Note. The values indicated in brackets refer to the cases of vertical
lifting single-layer thin-walled elements (such as heavy-aggregate
concrete wall panels) with a thickness not exceeding 220 mm.

Drawing 5.11. dimensions of holes for penetrating sling loops openings
a closed deepenings; b extended deepenings (at the item edges) for a loop rod
diameter 6-16mm: R1=125mm, a=30mm, b1=50mm, l1=25mm, l2=30mm; for a loop
diameter of 18-22mm: R1=150mm, a=40mm, b1=65mm, l1=30mm, l2=30mm

In all cases the value of ls should be taken no less than 200 mm.
For loops made of reinforced steel 25A240 and 28a300 and more
the values of ls and hb should be increased by 20%.
loop branches made of class a240 steel, as well as straight (without
folds) loop branches made of class a300 steel must end in hooks.

where necessary, it is allowed to arrange the branches at an angle to
each other not exceeding 45.
The distance between the side surface of the loop hook tail section and
the item surface, measured in the hook plane, should be adopted no less
than 4d (Drawing 5.10, A).
if it is not possible to penetrate the loop ends for the necessary length,
the loop must be anchored using other methods, for example, by welding to
inset components, by passing behind operating longitudinal reinforcement,
etc. the reliability of the adopted loop anchoring should be confirmed by
calculation or checks.
5.51. It is allowed to okace sling loops in deepenings so that their
openings were located below the concrete or reinforced concrete item
surface. This arrangement is especially recommended for mechanized
concrete surface finishing when protruding loops would impede such
finishing. loop Deepenings may be closed (see Drawing 5.11, A) or open
(Drawing 5.11, b). In the latter case the accumulation of water that may
freeze in them is prevented, and the conditions of the loop fixation are also
improved. due to the condition of passing a sling hoisting hook into the
opening the hole should be displaced with respect to the middle of the item
in the openings plane.

REINFORCEMENT FIXATION

5.52. THE CORRESPONDENCE OF REINFORCEMENT
ARRANGEMENT TO ITS DESIGN POSITION MUST BE
ENSURED BY APPLYING FIXATION MEANS.
reinforcement should be fixated using:
A) SINGLE USE DEVICES THAT REMAIN IN THE
CONCRETE;
b) inventory devices extracted from the concrete before or after its
hardening:
c) special components fastened to the working surface of form or
moulding that do not impede the extraction of the reinforced concrete
element from the form or the removal of the moulding from it.
5.53. the following single use lock pins should be used:
A) to ensure the required protective concrete layer thickness
according to Drawing 5.12;

Drawing 5.12. single use lock pins ensuring the required protective concrete layer
thickness S
a c with a large form contact surface, manufactured from cement mortar; d with
a small form contact surface, made from cement-sand solution; e the same, made
asbestos cement; f-h the same, made of plastic (perforated); i the same, made of a
perforated aluminum strip; j-k the same, made of reinforcement steel;
1 form working surface; 2 lockng pin; 3 fixed reinforcement; 4 twist from
binding wire; 5 binding wire sealed in the locking pin; 6 possible elastic ring; 7
supports welded to the reinforcement

b) in order to ensure the required distance between the separate
reinforcement items or the rods - according to Drawing 5.13;
c) in order to meet the requirements indicated in subparagraphs a
and b - according to Drawing 5.14.
The type of locking pin to ensure the thickness of the protective
concrete layer on the top faces of elements should be selected according to
the requirements in table 5.6. It is not allowed to use cut sections of
reinforcement rods, plates, etc as locking pins.


Drawing 5.13. single use locking pins ensuring the required distance
a-c between separate reinforcement items; d between rods
1 reinforcement steel separator installed between grid rows; 2 locking pin - lining
to ensure the protective concrete layer; 3 elongated transverse form rods bent
around the grid rods; 4 locking pin to connect crossing rods (spring wire helix); 5
truss point

IT IS NOT ALLOWED TO SET PLASTIC LINING UNDER
WORKING REINFORCEMENT RODS OR CLOSE TO THEM,
UNDER DISTRIBUTIVE REINFORCEMENT RODS IN THE
CONCRETE TENSION AREA OF ELEMENTS OPERATED UNDER
AGGRESSIVE CONDITIONS. IN SUCH ITEMS DENSE CEMENT-
SAND SOLUTION, CONCRETE OR ASBESTOS CEMENT LINING
SHOULD BE USED PREDOMINANTLY.
5.54. when using single use locking pins in accordance with the
requirements of table 5.6 the working drawings should indicate, which of
these locking pins are allowed in this element. The thickness of the
protective concrete layer at the locking pin lining installation spot should be
adopted in multiples of 5 mm.

Drawing 5.14. single use locking pins simultaneously ensuring the required
protective concrete layer thickness and the distance between separate reinforcing
elements
a in flat plates; b and C in rectangular cross section girders; d in circular cross
section elements
1 inverted U-type form locking pin; 2 reinforcement grids; 3 the working surface
of the form; 4 rack-body type locking pin; 5 flat reinforcing form; 6 locking pin
rod welded additionally to the forms; 7 applied clamp type locking pin made of
reinforcement wire; 8 concentrical forms; 9 truss point

drawings should be made For single use locking pins made of
reinforcement steel. the working drawings of reinforcement items and, if
necessary, the general drawings of reinforced concrete elements
reinforcement should show the location of these locking pins or supporting
rods, and the specifications should stipulate the expenditure of steel for their
manufacture.
The arrangement and quantity of nonmetallic locking pins linings may
not be provided in the working drawings.

Table 5.6
element
Operating
conditions
type of element top
face
TYPE OF LOCKING PIN
Solution,
concrete,
asbestos
cement
Plastic
(polyethylene)
Steel
rM rB PM PB SZ CH
open air
Clean concrete for
painting; coated by
ceramic slab, etc.
during concreting
+ - + - + -
Processed by the
mechanical method
+ - - - - -
rooms with
normal
humidity
Clean concrete
+ - + - + -
Concrete for painting
with the aqueous
compounds

+ + +
Concrete for painting
with oil, enamel and
synthetic paints;
concrete for revetment
+ + + + + +
Concrete for wall-
papering
+ + + + + -
Notes: 1.legend: R - solution, concrete, asbestos cement locking pins; P plastic,
polyethylene locking pins; C steel locking pins; M - small locking pin contact
surface with the form (moulding); B large lokcing pin contact surface with the
form (moulding); z - locking pins protected from corrosion; N - locking pins not
protected from corrosion.
2. sicn +allowed; sign - not allowed; sign Allowed but not recommended.

APPENDIX 1
STANDARD REINFORCEMENT GAUGE
ROD
NOMIN
AL
DIAME
TER OF,
mm
EFFECTIVE AREA OF CROSSWISE RODS, MM
2
, WITH CERTAIN
NUMBER OF RODS
-
-

1

-
,

-

-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A240
A400
A500
A300 B500
3 7.1 14.1 21.2 28.3 35.3 42.4 49.5 56.5 63.6 0,052 - - + -
4 12.6 25.1 37.7 50.2 62.8 75.4 87.9 100.5 113 0,092 - - + -
5 19.6 39.3 58.9 78.5 98.2 117.8 137.5 157.1 176.7 0,144 - - + -
6 28.3 57 85 113 141 170 198 226 254 0,222 + - + 6,75
8 50.3 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 453 0,395 + - + 9,0
10 78.5 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 0,617 + + + 11,3
12 113.1 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1018 0,888 + + + 13,5
14 153.9 308 462 616 769 923 1077 1231 1385 1,208 + + - 15,5
16 201.1 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 1810 1,578 + + - 18

ROD
NOMIN
AL
DIAME
TER OF,
mm
EFFECTIVE AREA OF CROSSWISE RODS, MM
2
, WITH CERTAIN
NUMBER OF RODS
-
-

1

-
,

-

-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A240
A400
A500
A300 B500
18 254.5 509 763 1018 1272 1527 1781 2036 2290 1,998 + + - 20
20 314.2 628 942 1256 1571 1885 2199 2513 2828 2,466 + + - 22
22 380.1 760 1140 1520 1900 2281 2661 3041 3421 2,984 + + - 24
25 490.9 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 3,84 + + - 27
28 615.8 1232 1847 2463 3079 3685 4310 4926 5542 4,83 + + - 30,5
32 804.3 1609 2413 3217 4021 4826 5630 6434 7238 6,31 + + - 34,5
36 1017.9 2036 3054 4072 5089 6107 7125 8143 9161 7,99 + + - 39,5
40 1256.6 2513 3770 5027 6283 7540 8796 10053 11310 9,865 + + - 43,5
45 1590.4 3181 4771 6362 7952 9542 11133 12723 14313 12,49 - + - 49
50 1963.5 3927 5891 7854 9818 11781 13745 15708 17672 15,41 - + - 54
55 2376 4752 7128 9504 11880 14256 16632 19008 21384 18,65 - + - 59
60 2827 5654 8481 11308 14135 16962 19789 22616 25443 22,19 - + - 64
70 3848 7696 11544 15392 19240 23088 26936 30784 34632 30,46 - + - 74,0
NOTE: 1. Nominal diameter of RODS for isteg reinforcement steel corresponds to

nominal diameter of equareal RODS. actual dimensions of high bond RODS ARE
SPECIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH GOST 5781 82.
2. symbol + denotes availability of the diameter in mix of this class
2
0
7

REFERENCE MANUAL FOR CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES WITHOUT
REINFORCEMENT PRETENSIONING BASED ON SP 52-101-2003

Appendix 2

BASIC LETTER DESIGNATIONS

FORCES FROM EXTERNAL LOADS AND ACTIONS IN ELEMENT
CROSS SECTION

MOMENT OF FLECTION;
N NORMAL FORCE;
Q TRANSVERSE FORCE;
TORQUE MOMENT.

MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS

R
b,n
, - characteristic axial compressive strength of concrete;
Rb, Rb,ser - design axial compressiON strength of concrete for limit
states of the first and second groups, respectively;
Rbt,n - characteristic axial tensile strength;
Rbt,Rbt,ser - design axial tensile strength of concrete for limit states
of the first and second groups, respectively;
Rs, Rs,ser - design axial tensile strength of reinforcement for limit states
of the first and second groups, respectively;
Rsw - design tensile strength of transverse reinforcement;
Rsc - design compressiON strength of reinforcement for limit
states of the first group;
Eb - initial modulus of concrete elasticity for compression and
tension;
Es - initial modulus of reinforcement elasticity.

CHARACTERISTICS OF LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT
LOCATION
S designation of longitudinal reinforcement:
a) located in tensile area when compressed and tensile areas are
present due to external loads;
b) located at the least compressive cross section edge when cross-
section is completely compressive due to external load;

c) located at the most tensile cross-section edge when cross
section is completely tensile due to external load;
completely in transverse cross-section for centric tensile
elements;
S ' designation of longitudinal reinforcement:
) located in compressed area when compressed and tensile areas are
present due to external loads;
) located at the most compressive cross section edge when cross-
section is completely compressive due to external load,
) located at the least cross-section tensile edge when cross-
section of eccentric tensile elements is completely tensile.

GEOMETRIC DATA

b - WIDTH OF RECTANGULAR CROSS SECTION; rib width
OF T- AND I-SECTIONS;
bf , b'f - WIDTH OF FLANGE OF T- AND I-SECTIONS IN
TENSILE AND COMPRESSIVE AREAS RESPECTIVELY;
h - HEIGHT OF RECTANGULAR, T- AND I-SECTIONS;
hf, h'f - HEIGHT OF FLANGE OF T- AND ISECTIONS IN
TENSILE AND COMPRESSed AREAS RESPECTIVELY;
a, a' - DISTANCE FROM FORCE RESULTANT IN
REINFORCEMENT S AND S', RESPECTIVELY, TO THE
NEAREST CROSS SECTION EDGE;
h0 - OPERATING HEIGHT OF CROSS SECTION EQUAL TO h
- ;
x - HEIGHT OF CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE AREA;
- RELATIVE HEIGHT OF CONCRETE COMPRESSed
AREA EQUAL TO
0
h
x
;
sw - DISTANCE BETWEEN STIRRUPS MEASURED ALONG
THE ELEMENT LENGTH;
0 ECCENTRICITY OF NORMAL FORCE N WITH RESPECT
TO CENTER OF GRAVITY OF THE TRANSFORMED
CROSS SECTION DEterminED WITH ALLOWANCE FOR
INSTRUCTIONS OF PARAGRAPH 3.6;

, ' - DISTANCE FROM POINT OF APPLICATION OF
NORMAL FORCE N TO FORCE RESULTANT IN
REINFORCEMENT S AND S, RESPECTIVELY.
l - ELEMENT BAY;
l0 - DESIGN LENGTH OF THE ELEMENT SUBJECT TO
ACTION OF COMPRESSive NORMAL FORCE;
i - radius of inertia of element cross-section in relation to the
gravity center of its section;
ds, dsw - NORMINAL DIAMETERS OF RODS OF LONGITUDINAL
AND TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT,
RESPECTIVELY;
As, A's - SECTIONAL AREA OF REINFORCEMENT S AND S',
RESPECTIVELY;
Asw - SECTIONAL AREA OF STIRRUPS LOCATED IN THE
SINGLE PLANE NORMAL TO LONGITUDINAL
ELEMENT AXIS CROSSING A SLOPING CROSS
SECTION;
s - PERCENTAGE OF REINFORCEMENT DEFINED AS THE
RATIO OF REINFORCEMENT SECTIONAL AREA S TO
ELEMENT CROSS SECTIONAL AREA bh0 WITHOUT
REGARD TO OVERHANGS OF COMPRESSed AND
TENSILE FLANGES;
A - SQUARE OF THE ENTIRE CONCRETE IN NORMAL
CROSS SECTION;
Ab - SECTIONAL AREA OF CONCRETE OF COMPRESSed
AREA:
I - MOMENT OF INERTIA OF A SECTION OF THE ENTIRE
CONCRETE WITH RESPECT TO gravity center OF CROSS
SECTION;
Dcir - DIAMETER OF ANNULAR AND circular CROSS
SECTIONS.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Preface ..3
1. General recommendations..4
Basic provisions .....4
Basic design requirements......5
2. Materials for concrete and reinforced concrete structures.....6
Concrete..6
Concrete quality characteristics and their design application....6
Specified and design concrete characteristics....8
Reinforcement.....10
Reinforcement quality characteristics..10
Specified and design reinforcement characteristics.....11
3. Calculation of limit states of the first group for concrete and reinforced
concrete elements ......13
Calculation of durability for concrete elements...13
General provisions...13
Calculation for eccentrically compressed elements..14
Calculation of flexural elements...18
Calculation examples19
Calculation of durability for reinforced concrete elements..20
Flexural elements..20
Calculation of durability of reinforced concrete elements under the
impact of flection moments.20
General provisions20
Rectangular sections..22
- and I-sections....24
Calculation examples.26
Rectangular sections..26
- and I-sections....28
Elements in biaxial bending..30
Calculation examples....35
Calculation of reinforced concrete elements under the impact of
transverse forces.....38
Calculation of reinforced concrete elements along the strip
between the inclined sections......39
Calculation of reinforced concrete elements along the inclined
sections for the impact of transverse forces.39

Constant height element, reinforced by stirrups perpendicular to
the element axis...39
Elements with variable height and crosswise
reinforcement....43
Elements reinforced with offset bends...45
Elements without crosswise reinforcement........47
Calculation of inclined sections of reinforced concrete elements
for the impact of transverse forces....49
Calculation examples........56
Eccentrically compressed elements.....70
Calculation for the impact of transverse forces....71
Consideration of elements deflection....71
Calculation of limit forces for normal sections. ...74
Rectangular sections with symmetrical reinforcement .....74
Rectangular sections with asymmetrical reinforcement .......78
I-sections with symmetrical reinforcement ...79
Ring sections......81
Circular sections....83
Elements in biaxial eccentrical compression.....85
Calculation examples.....86
Rectangular sections with symmetrical reinforcement ..86
Rectangular sections with asymmetrical reinforcement ....94
I-sections....95
Annular sections.....99
Circular sections.......101
Elements in oblique eccentrical compression..102
Calculation of inclined sections.. ....104
Centrally and eccentrically tensioned elements......105
Centrally tensioned elements ..105
Eccentrically tensioned elements....105
Calculation examples ......108
Calculation of normal sections based on nonlinear deformational model 110
Elements exposed to bending with torsion.....115
Rectangular section elements......115
Calculation of combined impact of torque moment and moment
of flection.......115

Calculation of combined impact of torque moment and
transverse force...118
Calculation examples.......121
Calculation of reinforced concrete elements for the local impact of
loads..125
Calculation of local compression.......125
Calculation examples..128
alculation of elements for pushing...........................129
General provisions..129
Calculation of pushing for elements without crosswise
reinforcement....131
Calculation of pushing for elements with crosswise
reinforcement....133
Calculation examples...133
4. Calculation of limit states of the second group for reinforced concrete
elements..142
Calculation of cracks opening in reinforced concrete elements....142
General provisions..142
Determining the cracks formation moment....143
Determining the opening width of cracks normal to longitudinal axis of
the element ...147
Calculation of deformations for reinforced concrete structures.....159
General provisions......159
Calculation of deflection for reinforced concrete elements160
Determining of skewness in reinforced concrete elements.164
SKEWNESS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS IN SEGMENTS WITHOUT CRACKS IN
TENSIONED ZONE......165
SKEWNESS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS IN SEGMENTS WITH CRACKS IN
TENSIONED ZONE......166
DETERMINING SKEWNESS OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS BASED ON
NONLINEAR DEFORMATIONAL MODEL .....170
DETERMINING SHEARING ANGLES OF REINFORCED CONCRETE ELEMENTS.........173
5.Structural requirements..178
General provisions.....178
Geometrical dimensions of structures.......178

Reinforcement........179
Protective layer of concrete....179
Minimum distances between reinforcement rods....181
Longitudinal reinforcement.....182
Crosswise reinforcement ........184
Reinforcement anchoring........188
Reinforcement connections...191
Bent rods......194
Requirements to concrete and reinforced concrete structures...194
Reinforcement fixation......201
Appendix 1....206
Appendix 2....208

SP 52-101-2003, Reference Materials ENG

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SP 52-101-2003, Reference Materials ENG

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

REFERENCE MANUAL for CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE structures without

reinforcement pretensioning based on sp 52-101-2003

in non-corrosive environment with static load impact.

, frost resistance concrete

taken no less than:

is a coefficient taken to be equal to

and - normal and shearing stress in the considered section fiber

using formula (3.22):

: using formula (3.22).

is a component of flection moment in the plane of axis (two

, herewith, condition (3.40) shall be checked, assuming

(MPa), however no more than R

(see Table 3.2).

, ONE CAN LEAVE C =

shall be taken into account assumed no less than:

(see para 3.49). Calculation in the plane

is a coefficient assumed to be equal to

are external moments with respect to gravity center of

. The depth of section at that equals h = 600 mm.

according to para 3.49.

act along both axes of reference and y in

in relation to the same axes,

) and the other one is greater

= 92,1 kN. > T = 68,2 kN.,

= 2,787 > 2, value equals

+ 584 878 75 , 0 = 827550 n;

= 146,5 N/mm < R

/b = bf /b > 6 and hf/h = hf /h 0,2

/b = bf /b 15 and hf/h = hf /h < 0,2

/b = bf /b 15 and hf/h = hf /h < 0,2

static moments of compressed zone of concrete, areas of

> 0,68, (4.29)

= 1,1 > 0,80 from the graph in Diagram 4.2

= 0,0027 < 0,005,

= 0,0062 > 0,005, value W and e can be

= 8,333. For a rectangular section with symmetrical reinforcement

- moment of flection in section x from the impact of single force

- skewness of the element on the left and the right

- skewness in the middle of the span at the

transverse force in section x from the impact of a single force

, where value b1,red equals:

= 28,7 mm < f = 32,6 mm, i.. condition

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen